JP7338547B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

For example, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery opportunity, and when the lottery result is a specific result, a player is given a predetermined privilege. (See Patent Document 1, for example).

JP-A-2004-81853

Here, there is still room for improvement in terms of game effects in the gaming machines and the like as exemplified above.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing game effects.

The present invention
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as an upper limit;
grant determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant information;
Privilege granting capable of granting a privilege to a player based on the fact that the grant determination result by the grant determination means is a grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. means and
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, the information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination, rather than the special information being the target of the grant determination. a destination identifying means for identifying at the previous timing;
a specific notification execution means capable of executing a specific notification by a predetermined notification means based on the identification result of the destination identification means;
with
It has a plurality of rendering states including a first rendering state and a second rendering state different from the first rendering state,
a first means for setting a specific state that grasps that a transition to the second effect state is made after a predetermined first condition is satisfied in the first effect state;
a second means for executing a transition to the second rendering state when a predetermined second condition different from the predetermined first condition is established in the specific state;
means for enabling the execution of the specific notification corresponding to the specific special information acquired in the specific state in the specific state to be restricted;
means for enabling the specific notification corresponding to the specific special information to be executed after the end of the specific state;
characterized by comprising

According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably perform game effects.

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in one embodiment. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an expanded state; FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an expanded state; FIG. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (a) is a schematic diagram of the second working port in the closed state, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the second working port in the open state. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in the closed state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device in the open state. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a pattern display apparatus. It is a figure for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a pattern display apparatus. It is a figure for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a pattern display apparatus. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning or losing lottery. It is a figure which shows an example of a right/wrong table. (a) is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot classification table for 1st special figures, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot classification table for 2nd special figures. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a variation display time table for big hits, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a variation display time table for loss. 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing in the MPU of the main control unit; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows a prize-winning process for operation openings. It is a flow chart which shows information acquisition processing. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing; 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. 4 is a flowchart showing data setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. 9 is a flow chart showing a variable display time setting process; It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a pending|holding prefetch process. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a production|presentation control apparatus and its peripheral device. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process in MPU of a production|presentation control apparatus. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of a holding storage area; FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a pending notice effect, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a pending change point during a game cycle. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing setting processing for holding notice; FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining production mode. It is a figure which shows an example of a final display mode lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a production|presentation scenario lottery table. (a) is a flow chart showing a first execution process of a pending notice, and (b) is a diagram showing a configuration of a display mode storage area. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a change suggesting effect; FIG. 8A is a flowchart showing shift-time command correspondence processing, and FIG. It is a flow chart showing processing for special figure fluctuation display. It is a flow chart which shows production mode switching processing. 9 is a flowchart showing setting processing for advance notice return; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing second execution processing of the suspension notice; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a process for execution of a third suspension notice; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process for promotion of a pending|holding notice. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for promotion determination. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for suspension|holding. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for suspension|holding. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for suspension|holding. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing according to the second embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows production mode switching processing. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a second setting process for holding notice; FIG. It is a flow chart showing processing for special figure fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for suspension|holding. It is a flow chart which shows processing for production mode change concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for return determination. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for suspension|holding. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing setting processing for holding notice; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a final display mode lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a final display mode lottery table. 4 is a flowchart showing processing for an opening/closing execution mode; 9 is a flowchart showing setting processing for advance notice return; It is a figure which shows an example of the table for return determination. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for suspension|holding. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for suspension|holding. 10A is a flowchart showing information acquisition processing according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 11B is a flowchart showing pending command setting processing. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st reservation|holding prefetch process. 4 is a flowchart showing processing for an opening/closing execution mode; It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd reservation|holding prefetch process. 9 is a flowchart showing setting processing for advance notice return; It is a figure which shows an example of an upper limit display mode table. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for suspension|holding. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for suspension|holding. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration according to a sixth embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing in MPU of a production control device. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flowchart which shows the process for return of a pending|holding notice. 7 is a flow chart showing display mode setting processing. It is a flow chart showing processing for special figure fluctuation display. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a fourth execution process of the suspension notice; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process for promotion of a pending|holding notice. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for suspension|holding. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for suspension|holding. (a) is a flowchart showing main processing according to the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows production setting processing. 7 is a flow chart showing display mode setting processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for suspension|holding. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for suspension|holding. It is a flow chart which shows the production mode switching process according to the eighth embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing mode switching determination processing; It is a figure which shows the aspect of switching restriction|limiting of production mode. It is a figure which shows the switching aspect of the production|presentation mode which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows production mode switching processing. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a second setting process for holding notice; FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for suspension|holding.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 viewed from the front side, and FIGS. 2, the configuration inside the game area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for the sake of convenience.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main body 12 attached to the outer frame 11 .

The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting plate materials on four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not have to have the outer frame 11, and the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with the outer frame 11 on the island facilities of the game arcade.

The game machine main body 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. Specifically, an upper supporting metal fitting 17 is fixed to a connecting portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a lower support bracket 17 is fixed to a connecting portion between the lower frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11. A side support fitting 18 is provided. A support mechanism is composed of these upper support metal fittings 17 and lower support metal fittings 18, and the support mechanism rotates the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 in a front view of the pachinko machine 10 so that the left side is the base end side, With the right side as the tip of rotation, the pachinko machine 10 can be rotated forward (see FIGS. 2 and 3).

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit arranged behind the inner frame 13. 15. The inner frame 13 of the game machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 . More specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable backward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view ( See Figure 3).

Next, the front door frame 14 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a frame body 20 made of synthetic resin whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11, and covers substantially the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. there is A substantially elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the central portion of the frame 20 so that substantially the entire game area PE, which will be described later, can be visually recognized from the front. It is closed from the rear side of the front door frame 14.例文帳に追加

The glass unit 22 includes a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder that holds the glass panels 23 . A partition portion is formed in the glass holder to partition the holding area of the glass panel 23 in the front and rear direction, and the two glass panels 23 face each other in the front and rear direction with the partition portion interposed therebetween. In other words, by securing a predetermined gap between both glass panels 23, interference between the glass panels 23 is avoided, and the glass panels 23 doubly cover the game area PE from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加state.

It should be noted that it is not always necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be individually attached to the frame 20 . Furthermore, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more. However, from the viewpoint of improving safety and security, it is preferable to employ a plurality of glass panels and to face each glass panel in the front and rear with a predetermined gap therebetween. Incidentally, it is also possible to employ a transparent synthetic resin panel member in place of the glass panel.

As shown in FIG. 1, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window portion 21). For example, a lamp portion (annular illumination portion) 26 containing light emitting means such as an LED is provided along the periphery of the window portion 21 . The lamp part 26 lights up or blinks in accordance with changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined reach is reached. In addition, an error display lamp part 27 is provided at the center of the lamp part 26 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10, and is lit at the time of a predetermined error. A section 28 is provided. In addition, speaker units 29 are provided at positions close to the left and right winning ball lamp units 28 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state.

Below the window portion 21 of the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulging portion 31 and a lower bulging portion 32, which bulge forward, are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31 , and a lower plate 34 that similarly opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 32 . The upper plate 33 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later, aligning them in a line, and guiding them to the side of a game ball shooting mechanism described later. In addition, the lower tray 34 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 33 .

In addition, on the upper surface of the upper bulging portion 31, there is provided an operating portion 36 (more specifically, a push operation button) for presentation that is manually operated by the player. For example, by manually operating the effect operation unit 36 according to suggestions displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75, which will be described later, the effect content on the display screen G or the like changes from the predetermined effect content corresponding to the same operation. Become.

A game ball shooting handle 41 is provided on the right side of the lower swelling portion 32 so as to protrude forward. By operating the game ball shooting handle 41, a game ball is shot from a game ball shooting mechanism which will be described later.

A passage forming unit 45 is attached to the rear surface of the front door frame 14 as shown in FIG. The passage forming unit 45 is molded of synthetic resin and has a front door side upper tray passage leading to the upper tray 33 and a front door side lower tray passage leading to the lower tray 34 . In the passage forming unit 45, a receptacle projecting rearward and opening upward is formed at an upper corner of the passage forming unit 45, and the receptacle is divided into left and right by a partition wall to form an entrance of the front door side upper tray passage. A section and an entrance section of the front door side lower tray passage are partitioned. A game ball entering the front door side upper tray passage is guided to an upper tray 33, and a game ball entering the front door side lower tray passage is guided to a lower tray 34.例文帳に追加

Projection shafts are provided at the upper end and lower end of the rear surface of the front door frame 14 on the rotation base end side. These projecting shafts constitute an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13 . Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a plurality of hook fittings 49 extending rearward are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction on the front end side of the rotation on the back surface of the front door frame 14 . These hooks 49 constitute a locking mechanism for the inner frame 13 .

Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. FIG. The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 50 having a substantially rectangular outer shape like the outer frame 11 . The height dimension of the resin base 50 is set slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11 . The resin base 50 is arranged close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11 , and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the resin base 50 . A curtain plate is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close this gap. The curtain plate is arranged below the resin base 50 (specifically, its lower end), and when the inner frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the resin base 50 is placed on the curtain plate. .

Support metal fittings 51 and 52 are attached to upper and lower ends of the front surface of the resin base 50 on the base end side of rotation. Axial holes are formed in the support fittings 51 and 52, and the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by inserting the protruding shafts of the front door frame 14 into the axial holes. ing.

Insertion holes for inserting hook fittings 49 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 are provided on the front surface of the resin base 50 on the front end side of the rotation. In the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 3, a locking device 55 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is hidden behind the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the front door frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 13 so that the front door frame 14 cannot be opened by engaging the hook fitting 49 with the locking device 55 (specifically, the front door hook receiving member) through the insertion hole. The locking device 55 also has a plurality of inner frame hook members 57 extending rearward of the inner frame 13 . The game machine main body 12 is locked with respect to the outer frame 11 in a closed state by hooking these inner frame hook members 57 on the hook receiving member 19 of the outer frame 11 .

A cylinder lock 58 for unlocking the locking device 55 is installed at the lower right corner of the resin base 50 . The cylinder lock 58 is integrated with the locking device 55. When the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 58 is turned clockwise, the front door frame 14 is unlocked from the inner frame 13, and the key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 58. The locking device 55 is configured to unlock the inner frame 13 from the outer frame 11 when the key is turned to the left.

A substantially elliptical window hole 54 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 50 , and the window hole 54 is closed from behind by a game board 60 mounted on the resin base 50 . The game board 60 comprises a wooden plywood board and a sheet member covering the front surface of the plywood board. A game area PE in which game balls flow down is formed on the exposed portion, ie, the front surface of the game board 60 . The game board 60 is not limited to being made of wood, and can be made of synthetic resin.

The game board 60 (especially various configurations arranged in the game area PE) will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 60. FIG.

The game board 60 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in its thickness direction (front-rear direction). Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 61, a first operating opening 62, a second operating opening 63, a through gate 64, a variable winning device 65, a variable display unit 67, and the like.

When a ball enters the general winning port 61, the variable winning device 65, the first operating port 62 and the second operating port 63, it is detected by the winning sensor (detection sensor), and based on the detection result, a predetermined number of A privilege such as payout of prize balls is given to the player. In this case, 10 game balls are paid out when a ball enters the general winning hole 61, and 15 game balls are paid out when a ball enters the variable winning device 65. is executed. Also, when a ball enters the first operating port 62, three game balls are put out, and when a ball enters the second operating port 63, one game ball is paid out. is executed. Incidentally, even if a ball enters the through gate 64, the game ball is not paid out.

In addition, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary. The number of prize balls related to the above may be larger than the number of prize balls related to the first operation port 62 . Also, the number of prize balls associated with the variable winning device 65 may be the same or less than the number of prize balls associated with other operating ports. Further, it may be configured such that a predetermined number of game balls are paid out when a ball enters the through gate 64 .

An out port 68 is provided at the bottom of the game board 60, and game balls that do not enter various ball entry portions are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 68. - 特許庁Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening portion, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening portion, but also the game ball passing through the opening portion. A mode in which it is not discharged later from the game area PE is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out hole 68, entering the general winning hole 61, the operation holes 62, 63, the variable winning device 65 or the through gate 64 is It is also expressed as winning a prize.

The game board 60 is also provided with a large number of nails 69 for properly distributing and adjusting the flow paths of the game balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills. The flow of the game ball is diversified by various configurations such as these pegs 69 and windmills, and adjustment is made so that winning to the above-described general winning opening 61 or the like occurs with an appropriate probability.

At the center of the game board 60, the variable display unit 67 is arranged. The variable display unit 67 is installed on the back side of the game board 60 (FIG. 3), and the display screen G can be viewed through an opening provided in the center of the game board 60 . A frame-shaped center frame 76 is attached to the front surface of the game board 60 so as to correspond to the peripheral edge of the opening.

The center frame 76 projects forward from the front surface of the game board 60, and the clearance between the front surface of the center frame 76 and the glass unit 22 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. This prevents the game balls flowing down the game area PE from flowing into the inner area of the center frame 76 and contacting the display screen G. In addition, the center frame 76 distributes the flow path of the game ball when it flows down the game area PE to the left and right, forming a left route passing through the left side of the center frame 76 and a right route passing through the right side.

Which of the left route and the right route the game ball flows down (passes through) is determined by the amount of rotation operation of the game ball shooting handle 41, that is, the momentum of the game ball. Since the shot game ball enters the game area PE from the upper left side of the game board 60, the stronger the shooting force of the game ball, the easier it is for the game ball to flow down the right route.

Specifically, when the player performs a rotation operation of the game ball shooting handle 41 with a rotation operation amount in a first range that is equal to or more than the predetermined rotation amount and is less than the reference rotation amount as the first shooting operation, the game ball is shot. The ball flows down the left route, and when the player rotates the game ball shooting handle 41 with a rotation operation amount in a second range that is equal to or larger than the reference rotation amount as a second shooting operation, the shot game ball Take the right route. The predetermined amount of rotation is the amount of rotation operation that allows a shot game ball to pass through a guide rail 100 (to be described later) and enter the game area PE. It is the amount of rotation operation that shoots the game ball with a reachable launch force.

Below the center frame 76 (variable display unit 67), a first operating port 62 opened upward is arranged. The first operating port 62 is located in the left-right central part of the game board 60, and a game part such as a nail 69 is arranged so that a game ball flowing down the right route does not enter the first operating port 62.例文帳に追加That is, only game balls that flow down the left route can win the first operation port 62 . Therefore, when the player aims to win a prize in the first operation port 62, the game ball is shot so that the game ball flows down the left route. The first operation opening 62 is provided with a first operation opening winning sensor 62a (FIG. 7), and the winning sensor 62a detects a game ball that has won the first operation opening 62.

A second operating port 63 is arranged on the right side of the center frame 76 (variable display unit 67). The configuration of the second operating port 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

The second operation port 63 is provided with a universal electrical accessory 63a (variable receiving means) as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. Specifically, the pair of movable pieces supported so as to be rotatable in the horizontal direction are arranged so as to sandwich the opening as the second operation opening 63 from both the left and right sides.

By rotating each of the movable pieces, the closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) shown in FIG. 5(a) and the open state (supported state or guided state) shown in FIG. It is possible to switch to Specifically, a projecting portion 63d is provided in the upper portion of the second operating port 63 so as to project forward, and when the movable piece is in the upright posture as shown in FIG. The gap between each movable piece and the projecting portion 63d becomes less than the diameter of the game ball, and the inflow of the game ball into the second operating port 63 is blocked. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5(b), when the movable piece rotates so as to incline outward, an opening of a size through which the game ball can pass is formed between the projecting portion 63d and the movable piece. , the inflow of the game ball into the second operating port 63 is permitted. A winning sensor 63c for the second working opening is provided in the second working opening 63, and a game ball that has won the second working opening 63 is detected by the winning sensor 63c.

In addition, the general electrical accessory 63a is provided with a driving section 63b for driving each movable piece. Each movable piece is driven by the driving portion 63b through a link mechanism (not shown) to switch between an open state (inclined posture) and a closed state (upright posture). Incidentally, the first operating port 62 is not provided with a universal electrical accessory (opening/closing structure).

Note that, in the above configuration, winning to the second operating port 63 is disabled when the game is in the closed state, but a configuration that allows winning may also be used. That is, it may be possible to win a prize in the second operation opening 63 in the closed state, but it is more difficult to win than in the open state (difficult to win a prize). The point is that the easiness of winning the second operation opening 63 is different between the open state and the closed state, and the degree of closing or opening is arbitrary. In addition, the configuration of the universal electrical accessory 63a is not limited to the above. It may be something to do.

As shown in FIG. 4, a through gate 64 is arranged above (upstream side) the second operation port 63 on the right route. The through-gate 64 has a through-hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and a game ball entering the through-gate 64 passes through the through-gate 64 and flows down the game area PE again. Therefore, the game ball that has won the through gate 64 can also win the second operation opening 63 . The through gate 64 is provided with a through prize winning sensor 64a (FIG. 7), and a game ball that has entered the through gate 64 is detected by the prize winning sensor 64a.

The through gate 64 serves as a trigger for opening the universal electrical accessory 63a provided in the second operating port 63. As shown in FIG. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed with the winning of the through gate 64 as a trigger, and the result of the internal lottery is an open result (support winning), so that the general electrical accessory 63a is changed from the closed state to the open state, After that, the accessory opening/closing game (support execution mode) for returning to the closed state is executed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged below (downstream side) the second operation port 63 on the right route. The configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIG.

The variable winning device 65 includes a large winning opening 65a that opens forward, and an opening/closing door 65b that opens and closes the large winning opening 65a. The big winning opening 65a has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a size that allows a plurality of game balls to win simultaneously. The big winning hole 65a communicates with a guide passage 65e provided on the back side of the game board 60, and all game balls winning the big winning hole 65a are guided to the guiding passage 65e. The guide path 65e is provided with a winning sensor 65c for a large winning opening, and the winning sensor 65c detects a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 65a.

In addition, the variable winning device 65 is provided with a drive section 65d for driving the open/close door 65b. The open/close door 65b is driven by a drive unit 65d through a link mechanism (not shown) to open a closed state (FIG. 6(a)) in which a game ball cannot enter the big winning opening 65a, or a closed state (FIG. 6A) in which a game ball cannot enter the big winning opening 65a. It is switched to an open state (FIG. 6(b)) in which a prize can be won. Specifically, the opening/closing door 65b is normally in a closed state, and is switched to an open state when the internal lottery wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (jackpot game).

The open/close execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a jackpot is won. The opening/closing execution mode will be described later in detail. As an opening mode of the variable prize winning device 65, in the case of a jackpot, the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or the winning of a predetermined number (for example, 10) is regarded as one round, and multiple rounds (for example, 10 rounds) are variable as the upper limit. There is a mode in which the winning device 65 is repeatedly opened.

In addition, in the above configuration, winning to the big winning opening 65a is not possible when it is in the closed state, but it may be configured to allow winning. That is, in the case of the closed state, it is possible to win a prize in the big prize winning opening 65a, but it may be more difficult to win a prize than in the open state (difficult to win a prize). The point is that the easiness of winning into the big winning opening 65a is different between the open state and the closed state, and the degree of closing or opening is arbitrary.

Here, with respect to the second operation port 63, the through gate 64, and the variable winning device 65, only game balls flowing down the right route can win. Therefore, when the player aims to win a prize in the second operating port 63, the through gate 64, or the variable prize winning device 65, the game ball is shot so as to flow down the right route.

As shown in FIG. 4, below the variable winning device 65, a main display unit 81 is provided. The main display unit 81 is arranged along the outer edge of the lower side of the game area PE, and protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board 60 . On the front surface of the main display unit 81, a special-figure display section 43 and a general-figure display section 44, which display predetermined patterns and the like, are provided. These display portions 43 and 44 are visible from the front through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14 . The gap dimension between the front surface of the main display unit 81 and the glass unit 22 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. This prevents the game ball from passing in front of the main display unit 81, and the visibility of the various display sections 43 and 44 is ensured.

In the special figure display unit 43, the first special figure display unit AS that displays the lottery result performed based on the winning of the first operation opening 62, and the second operation opening 63 It is performed based on the winning. A second special figure display portion BS for displaying the lottery result is provided.

In the first special figure display part AS, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning to the first working port 62 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, it was performed based on the winning to the first working port 62 The results of the internal lottery will be clearly stated. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the first operation port 62 is the winning result corresponding to the big hit, the variable display is stopped in the first special figure display unit AS, and the predetermined pattern is displayed as the stop result. After being displayed, the opening/closing execution mode is entered.

In the second special figure display part BS, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning to the second working port 63 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, it was performed based on the winning to the second working port 63 The results of the internal lottery will be clearly stated. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the second operation port 63 is the winning result corresponding to the big hit, the fluctuation display is stopped in the second special figure display part BS, and the predetermined pattern is displayed as a result of the stop. After being displayed, the opening/closing execution mode is entered.

In the following, in order to distinguish between the pattern that is variably displayed upon winning the first operating port 62 and the pattern that is variably displayed upon winning the second operating port 63, the former will be referred to as the first special symbol. Or it may be called the first special pattern, and the latter may be called the second special pattern or the second special pattern.

Here, based on the winning of any of the operation ports 62 and 63, the corresponding special figure display units AS and BS start variable display, display a predetermined stop result, and until the variable display is stopped corresponds to one game round in the special figure display units AS and BS. However, one game round is not limited to the above contents. In the configuration in which the variable display is performed in the display area, the variable display is started in the single display area, and the time until the variable display is stopped while the predetermined stop result is displayed is one game round. and

In addition, the main display unit 81 is provided with a special figure pending number display portion AM. The number of times the game ball wins the first operation port 62 or the second operation port 63 is reserved up to four times, and the special figure reservation number display part AM shows the first special figure (first operation It is possible to display the reserved number of the port 62) and the reserved number of the second special figure (second operation port 63) separately.

The display part 44 for normal figure is a display part for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 64 . In this case, in the display unit 44 for the normal pattern, the winning of the through gate 64 triggers the variable display of the pattern, and as a result of the stop of the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 64 is performed. The result of is specified by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the prize winning to the through gate 64 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the support state that opens the universal electrical accessory 63a, the predetermined stop result on the universal diagram display unit 44 After is displayed and the fluctuation display is stopped, it shifts to the support state. It should be noted that the pattern that is variably displayed upon winning the through gate 64 may be referred to as a normal pattern or a normal pattern.

Here, based on the win to the through gate 64, the variable display is started in the normal map display unit 44, the predetermined stop result is displayed, and the variable display is stopped. corresponds to one game round in . In the following, in order to distinguish between the game rounds in the normal-map display section 44 and the game rounds in the special-picture display sections AS and BS, the former may be called the normal-picture game round, and the latter may be called the special-picture game round.

In addition, the normal map display unit 44 is provided with a normal map reserved number display unit FM. The number of times the game ball wins the through gate 64 is reserved up to four times, and the reserved number of the normal drawing (through gate 64) can be displayed in the normal drawing reserved number display part FM. .

The special figure display unit 43 and the normal figure display unit 44 are configured by a segment display device having a plurality of segments, but are not limited to this, and may be configured by another display device such as a liquid crystal display device. may

In addition, although illustration is omitted, the main display unit 81 is provided with a round display section for indicating the number of rounds in the open/close execution mode. In the round display section, the display of the number of rounds is started when the open/close execution mode is started or has been started. This display continues without changing the display contents while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends or ends.

Next, the variable display unit 67 will be explained. The variable display unit 67 is provided with a pattern display device 75 for variable display (or variable display or switching display) of a pattern, which is one type of pattern.

The pattern display device 75 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device which will be described later. The pattern display device 75 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

On the pattern display device 75, for example, patterns are displayed arranged in the top, middle, and bottom, and these patterns are scrolled in the left-right direction so as to be variably displayed. In this case, the variable display on the symbol display device 75 is started based on the winning of the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 . That is, when the variable display is performed in the special figure display unit 43, the variable display is also performed in the symbol display device 75 accordingly. When the variable winning device 65 shifts to a jackpot game state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable prize winning device 65 is opened, the symbol display device 75 stops and displays a predetermined symbol combination on a preset effective line. .

Further, on the symbol display device 75, a hold display corresponding to the first special figure display portion AS and the second special figure display portion BS is performed. In this holding display, a predetermined holding image is displayed, and the number of holdings of each operation port 63, 64 is indicated by the displayed number. It should be noted that the number of pending items is not limited to that indicated by the above-described pending image, and may be indicated by numerical display. Further, not limited to the pattern display device 75, for example, a display section provided on the game board 60 separately from the pattern display device 75 (a separate display section from the respective reserved number display sections AM and FM of the main display unit 81) or a light emitting unit (holding lamp unit) or the like.

The structure of the inner frame 13 will be described with reference to FIG. 2 again. Below the mounting area of the game board 60 in the resin base 50, there is provided a game ball shooting mechanism 110 for shooting game balls toward the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball shooting handle 41 described above. The game ball shooting mechanism 110 includes a solenoid 111 for shooting a game ball placed at a predetermined shooting standby position, a shooting rail 112 for defining the shooting direction of the game ball shot by the solenoid 111, and a game ball at the shooting standby position. and a base plate 114 on which the various components 111 to 113 are mounted. The base plate 114 is fixed to the resin base 50 , whereby the game ball shooting mechanism 110 is integrated with the resin base 50 .

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an oblique state so as to be inclined upward toward the game board 60 side. At a position near the downstream end (that is, the lower end) of the launch rail 112, a ball stopper is provided for stopping the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 113 at the launch standby position described above. The solenoid 111 is arranged at a position further downstream than the ball stopper.

Solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power source and firing control device, which will be described below. By reciprocating the output shaft of the solenoid 111 in the expansion and contraction direction based on the output of an electrical signal from the power supply and the firing control device, the game ball placed in the firing standby position moves to the game board 60 side, more specifically, the game It is driven out toward the guide rail 100 attached to the board 60 .

As shown in FIG. 4, the guide rail 100 divides the game area PE so that the outer shape of the game area PE is substantially circular. In addition, the guide rail 100 is composed of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 which are arranged to face each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. formed. The guide passage 103 has an entrance portion opened to the tip side (diagonally downward) of the launch rail 112 and an exit portion located above the game area PE. A game ball shot based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the shooting rail 112→the guide rail 100 (entrance part→exit part).

In addition, on the front side of the exit portion of the game board 60, more specifically, near the tip of the inner rail 101, a backflow prevention member 106 is attached to prevent the game ball that has reached the game area PE from returning back into the guide passage 103. This prevents the game ball that has reached the game area PE first from hindering the launch of the following game ball.

As shown in FIG. 2, the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112 are arranged so that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are diagonally opposed to each other with the lower edge of the game board 60 therebetween. . In other words, both rails 100 and 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are laterally shifted near the lower edge of the game board 60 . As a result, both rails 100 and 112 are brought closer to the lower edge of the game board 60, and a gap of a predetermined distance is formed between the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112.例文帳に追加

A foul ball passage 46 is arranged below the gap thus formed. The foul ball passage 46 is formed integrally with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14 . If the game balls shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 110 do not reach the game area PE and return inside the guide passage 103 as foul balls, the foul balls enter the foul ball passage 46 through the clearance. becomes. The foul ball passage 46 communicates with the front door side lower tray passage, and the game balls entering the foul ball passage 46 are discharged to the lower tray 34. - 特許庁As a result, the game ball that has become a foul ball is returned to the player while suppressing interference between the foul ball and the game ball to be launched next.

A through hole is formed in the resin base 50 on the left side of the firing rail 112 (specifically, on the side supporting the front door frame 14) to pass through the resin base 50 in the front-rear direction. 121 are provided. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the resin base 50 and has a main body side upper plate passage and a main body side lower plate passage. The upstream side of the main body side upper tray passage and the main body side lower tray passage communicates with a game ball distribution section which will be described later. Further, below the passage forming member 121, the socket portion of the passage forming unit 45 attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted, and below the main body side upper tray passage, the front door side upper tray passage is arranged, A front door side upper tray passage is arranged below the main body side lower tray passage.

Below the passage forming member 121 in the resin base 50, an opening/closing member 124 for opening and closing the main body side upper tray passage and the main body side lower tray passage is attached. The opening/closing member 124 is supported by a support shaft provided at its lower end so as to be rotatable in the front-rear direction. is provided. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13, the opening/closing member 124 rises as shown in the drawing to close the main body side upper tray passage and the main body side lower tray passage. As a result, when the front door frame 14 is opened while the game balls are stored in the main body side upper tray passage or the main body side lower tray passage, the inconvenience of the stored balls falling can be prevented. On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the open/close member 124 is pushed open by the receptacle provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14 against the urging force. In this state, the main body side upper tray passage and the front door side upper tray passage communicate with each other, and the main body side lower tray passage and the front door side lower tray passage communicate with each other.

Next, the rear configuration of the inner frame 13 (the resin base 50 and the game board 60) will be described with reference to FIG.

Bearing metal fittings 132 are vertically arranged side by side on the rotation base end side of the back surface of the resin base 50 . Bearing portions are formed in the bearing metal fitting 132 so as to be vertically spaced apart, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions.

A plurality of locking metal fittings are provided on the back surface of the resin base 50, and the game board 60 is attached to the resin base 50 by these locking metal fittings. Here, the configuration of the back surface of the game board 60 will be described.

A display control device is attached to the variable display unit 67 arranged in the center of the game board 60 so as to cover the variable display unit 67 from behind (not shown). Then, behind the display control device, an effect control device unit 142 is mounted so as to overlap the display control device. The performance control device unit 142 is configured to include a performance control device 143 and a mount 144 , and the performance control device 143 is mounted on the mount 144 .

The performance control device 143 is equipped with a performance control board that controls the sound, lamp display, and display control device according to instructions from the main control device, which will be described later. It is housed in the

As shown in FIG. 3, a collective plate 150 is provided below the variable display unit 67 on the rear surface of the game board 60 . The gathering board 150 is provided with a game ball collection mechanism for collecting game balls that have entered various winning holes, a detection mechanism for detecting entry of game balls into various winning holes, and the like.

To explain the game ball recovery mechanism, the assembly plate 150 is provided with recovery passages individually corresponding to various ball entry portions such as the general prize winning port 61 . These recovery passages descend along the back surface of the game board 60 from the ball-entering portions, and define the falling path of the game balls. Each recovery path joins near the lower end of the game board 60, and all game balls that have passed through the ball entry part such as the general prize winning port 61 gather at the bottom of the game board 60 via the recovery path. Become. The exit portion of each recovery passage is opened downward, and a discharge passage is provided on the tip side thereof (more specifically, below the game board 60). The game balls gathered under the game board 60 by the collection passage are led out to the discharge passage. Incidentally, the out port 68 is similarly connected to the discharge passage, and game balls that do not win in any of the prize winning ports are led out to the discharge passage through the out port 68.

Describing the detection mechanism, the assembly plate 150 is provided with prize winning sensors (detection sensors) individually corresponding to various ball entering portions such as the general prize winning port 61 . These various prize winning sensors are arranged at positions in the middle of each collection passage connected to the ball entry portion such as the general prize winning port 61, and the game ball is dropped in the state that the falling path of the game ball is defined in the collection passage. Detect passage. That is, when a game ball passes through a detection area provided in the middle of each collection path, it is detected that the ball has entered the ball entrance such as the general winning opening 61 . The winning sensor is composed of, for example, a magnetic sensor that grasps a change in the magnetic field that occurs when a game ball passes through the detection area.

These various winning sensors are electrically connected to a main control device unit 160 (more specifically, the main control device) provided on the back side of the game board 60, and detection signals from the winning sensors are sent to the main control device. It is configured to be output as The main controller unit 160 and its accompanying configuration will be described below.

The main control device unit 160 is mounted on the game board 60 so as to cover the assembly plate 150 from the rear side, and is composed of a synthetic resin mounting base 161 and a main control device 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. It is The main control device 162 comprises a main control board having a function (main control circuit) for controlling the main game, and the main control board is accommodated in a board box 163 made of a transparent resin material or the like. there is

The board box 163 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are unopenably connected by a sealing portion as sealing means, whereby the board box 163 is sealed. A plurality of sealing portions are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

Any configuration can be applied to the sealing portion as long as it is configured to connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner. It is designed to be inseparably joined. The sealing process by the sealing unit prevents unauthorized opening after sealing, and even if unauthorized opening should occur, such a situation can be detected early and easily. It is possible to perform the sealing process again later. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting the locking pawl into at least one long hole of the plurality of sealing portions. When the circuit board box 163 is to be opened, such as when a problem occurs with the main control circuit board housed therein, or when the main control circuit board is inspected, the connecting portion between the sealing portion into which the locking claw is inserted and another sealing portion is removed. disconnect. As a result, the box base and box cover of the board box 163 are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking pawl is inserted into the long hole of the other sealing portion. If the history of the opening of the board box 163 is left in the board box 163, it is possible to easily discover that the board box 163 has been illegally opened.

A plurality of coupling pieces are provided on one of the short sides of the board box 163 so as to protrude laterally. These connecting pieces correspond one-to-one with a plurality of connecting pieces formed on the mounting table 161, and sealing processing is performed between the board box 163 and the mounting table 161 by the connecting pieces and the connecting pieces. will be

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is covered with a back pack unit 15 from behind. The back pack unit 15 has a back pack 201 to which a payout mechanism 202, a discharge passage board 203 and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached.

The back pack 201 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIG. 3, a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion 212 which protrudes to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. and The protective cover part 212 has a shape in which left and right sides and an upper surface are closed and only a lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 67 .

An external output terminal 213 is provided on the upper right portion of the base portion 211 . Various output terminals are provided in the external output terminal 213, and various signals are output to the hall computer HC (management control device) on the game hall side through these output terminals. Also, the base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower latching pins at the right end as viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the latching pins are inserted into the bearing metal fittings 132 (specifically, the bearing portion) provided on the inner frame 13. The back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13. Further, a fastener for fastening to a hole to be fastened provided in the inner frame 13 is provided at the tip of the rotation of the base portion 211, and the fastener is fitted into the hole to be fastened. A back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13 .

A payout mechanism part 202 is arranged on the base part 211 so as to bypass the protective cover part 212 . The payout mechanism unit 202 is provided with a tank 221 arranged on the top of the back pack 201 and opened upward, and the tank 221 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall. be. A tank rail gently sloping downstream is connected to the lower portion of the tank 221, and a vertically extending case rail is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail. A dispensing device 222 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail. The game balls paid out from the payout device 222 are supplied to the game ball distribution section provided in the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage provided downstream of the payout device 222 .

The game ball distribution unit has a function of distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 222 to either the upper tray 33, the lower tray 34, or a discharge passage to be described later, and the inner opening is the main body side described above. It is formed so that it communicates with the upper tray 33 via the upper tray passage and the front door side upper tray passage, and the outer opening communicates with the lower tray 34 via the main body side lower tray passage and the front door side lower tray passage. .

As shown in FIG. 3, the discharge passage board 203 and the control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the lower end of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end in the front and rear. The discharge passage board 203 has a rearwardly open discharge passage formed on a surface facing the control device assembly unit 204 , and the opening of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204 . The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game balls to the island facilities of the game hall, etc., and the game balls drawn out from the collection passage or the like to the discharge passage pass through the discharge passage to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Ejected.

The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base, on which a payout control device 181 and a power supply and firing control device 191 are mounted. The payout control device 181 and the power supply and launch control device 191 are arranged one on top of the other so that the payout control device 181 is behind the pachinko machine 10 .

In the payout control device 181, a payout control board for controlling the payout device 222 is accommodated in the board box, and a state return switch provided on the payout control board protrudes outside the board box. For example, when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging occurs in the dispenser 222, pressing the state recovery switch will clear the ball clogging.

The power supply and shooting control device 191 has a power supply and shooting control board housed in a board box. The launching of the game ball accompanying the operation of the handle 41 is controlled.

The power supply and launch control device 191 is provided with a power failure monitoring unit (power failure monitoring circuit) 315 that monitors the power supply and detects the occurrence of a power failure such as a power failure. The pachinko machine 10 has a memory holding function of various data, so that even in the event of a power failure, the state at the time of the power failure is retained, and upon recovery from the power failure, the state at the time of the power failure can be restored. It's becoming For example, when the power supply is cut off according to a normal procedure such as when the game hall is closed, the state before the cutoff is stored and held. Also, the power supply and launch control unit 191 is provided with a RAM erase switch. When the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch, the RAM data is initialized.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

An MPU 312 is mounted on the main control board 311 of the main controller 162 . The MPU 312 includes a ROM 313 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 312, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 313. A RAM 314, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated.

The RAM 314 is configured to retain (back up) data even after a power failure has occurred by the backup voltage from the power source and the launch control device 191, and the RAM 314 temporarily stores various data. A backup area is provided separately from the area for The backup area is an area for storing the values of the stack pointer, each register, I/O, etc. at the time of power interruption when power failure occurs. When the power is restored from the power failure state (when the power is restored), the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power failure based on the information in the backup area.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 7, the ROM 313 and the RAM 314 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 312, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which they are individually integrated into chips is also possible. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 162 .

The MPU 312 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 312 is connected with a payout control device 181 and a power supply and launch control device 191 . Various sensors are connected to the input side of the MPU 312 . Various sensors include a general winning opening 61, a first working opening 62, a second working opening 63, a through gate 64, a winning sensor 61a for the general winning opening that detects winning to the variable winning device 65, and a winning opening for the first working opening. A sensor 62a, a second operation opening winning sensor 63c, a through winning opening sensor 64a, a large winning opening winning sensor 65c, and the like are provided. In the MPU 312, based on the detection results of these various sensors 61a, 62a, 63c, 364a, and 65c, winning judgment (ball entry judgment) for each ball entry section is performed. Further, the MPU 312 executes various lotteries based on winnings to the first operation opening 62, the second operation opening 63, and the through gate 64. FIG.

An output side of the MPU 312 is connected with a payout control device 181, an effect control device 143, and the like. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 181, for example, based on the winning determination result to the prize ball corresponding entering ball section corresponding to the payout of the prize ball.

Various commands such as a variation start command, a type command, a variation end command, an opening command and an ending command are output to the effect control device 143 . In this case, the command information storage area 313e of the ROM 313 is referred to when outputting these various commands. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each of the above commands is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various types of information are included as the information of the predetermined number of bytes.

Further, to the output side of the MPU 312, as various drive units, a drive unit 63b for the universal electrical accessory 63a and a drive unit 65d for the variable winning device 65 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 311, and the MPU 312 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits. Specifically, when the transition to the opening/closing execution mode occurs, the MPU 312 controls the drive section 65d so that the opening/closing door 65b of the variable winning device 65 is driven. Further, when the transition to the support state occurs, the MPU 312 executes drive control of the drive unit 63b so that each movable piece of the universal electrical accessory 63a is driven. In addition, display control of the first special figure display portion AS or the second special figure display portion BS in the special figure display portion 43 is executed at each special figure game round. In addition, display control of the display unit 44 for the normal pattern is executed during the normal pattern game round.

Furthermore, the above-described external output terminal 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 312, and through this external output terminal 213, the hall computer HC receives ball entry information into various ball entry sections and information on lottery results such as big wins. output. As a result, the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be grasped by the hall computer HC.

The power supply and launch control device 191 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control board 311, the payout control device 181, and the like generate operating power necessary for each, and supply the generated operating power.

The power supply and launch control unit 191 is provided with a power outage monitor 315 that monitors the stable 24 volt DC output from the power supply and launch control unit 191 . The power failure monitoring unit 315 determines that a power failure (power shutdown) has occurred when the output voltage from the power supply and launch control device 191 becomes less than 22 volts, and sends a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt pin). As a result, main controller 162 recognizes the occurrence of power failure, immediately executes NMI interrupt processing, and further executes power failure processing based on this. By the way, the power supply and launch control device 191 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor. Power for memory retention is supplied to the RAM 314 of the main controller 162 from the power supply unit. Further, the power supply and shooting control device 191 is in charge of shooting control of the game ball shooting mechanism 110, and the game ball shooting mechanism 110 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met.

The payout control device 181 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 222 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162 .

The performance control device 143 drives and controls the lamp units 26 to 28 and the speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162, and controls the display control device 350. It is something to do. The display control device 350 executes display control of the pattern display device 75 based on the command input from the effect control device 143 . In this case, the effect control device 143, based on various commands input from the main control device 162, determines the variable display time of the symbols in the symbol display device 75 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed. Determines presence/absence of reach generation and content of reach performance.

Here, the display contents of the pattern display device 75 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 8(a) to (j), the pattern, which is one type of pattern, consists of 9 types of main patterns to which numbers "1" to "9" are respectively attached, and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of a sub pattern. More specifically, nine types of character patterns, such as an octopus, are assigned numerals "1" to "9", respectively, to form the main pattern.

As shown in FIG. 9(a), the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 has three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of upper, middle and lower rows. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is constructed by arranging main symbols and sub-symbols in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper pattern row Z1, 9 types of main patterns "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-design is arranged between each main design. . In the lower pattern row Z3, 9 types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1" A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the upper part, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. In other words, only the middle pattern row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols with 10 main symbols arranged. On the display screen G, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. As shown in FIG. 9(b), the display screen G is designed so that three symbols are statically displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3×3 are statically displayed. It is designed to be

Five effective lines are set on the display screen G, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of upper symbol row Z1→lower symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2, and all symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on any of the effective lines. When the fluctuation display of ~Z3 is completed, a jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of a normal 4R jackpot result or a 10R probability variable jackpot result, which will be described later.

In the pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and when a 10R probability variable jackpot result occurs, the same specific symbols are used. The combination is displayed frozen. In addition, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and when the result of a normal large 4R hit occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped. Is displayed.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given with reference to FIG. 10 regarding the variable display of each symbol row. When the game cycle is started, high-speed fluctuation display is first started for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is difficult or impossible to recognize which pattern row is being variably displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 10(a), the variable display mode of the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from the high-speed variable display to the low-speed variable display so that the player can recognize the variable-displayed symbols. Then, as shown in FIG. 10(b), when the variable display of the upper symbol row Z1 is completed, the variable display mode of the lower symbol row Z3 is switched from high-speed variable display to low-speed variable display. Then, as shown in FIG. 10(c), the variable display of the lower symbol row Z3 ends. After all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are changed, there is provided a stop display period in which the stop display is maintained and waited for a predetermined period.

By the way, in the gaming machine, when the symbols are stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 75, the symbols in the final stop row (the middle symbol row Z2 in the present embodiment) are not suddenly stopped, but gradually displayed while reducing the variable display speed. It is common to stop at In this case, if the symbols of the middle symbol row Z2 (final stop row) are started to stop in accordance with the start of the stop display on the special symbol display unit 43, the deceleration time until the symbols stop on the symbol display device 75 is As much as necessary, the time during which the pattern is stopped is shortened, resulting in a substantial shortening of the stop display time.

Therefore, before starting the stop display on the special figure display unit 43, the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 including the final stop column are stopped (temporarily stopped), and then the stop display on the special figure display unit 43 is performed. In accordance with the start timing of , the temporarily stopped symbols are finally stopped (determined display). The display mode of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the temporary stop is different from that in the final display. For example, at least one of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 gently reciprocates, or at least a part of a character such as an octopus (FIG. 8) that constitutes the main symbol or sub-symbol moves. In other words, the temporary stop is performed so as to maintain an imperfect stop state (stop display), although the pattern appears to be stopped at first glance. On the other hand, the confirmation display is performed in such a manner that the reciprocating fine movement and the character movement are not performed, and the state is completely stopped.

The temporary stop display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started with the result of the winning lottery or the stop result corresponding to the type of jackpot, and then shifts to the confirmation display as it is, or the stop not corresponding to the result of the winning lottery or the type of jackpot. After the result is temporarily stopped and displayed, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are again changed to display the stopped result corresponding to the result of the lottery, etc., and then the display may shift to the finalized display.

By the way, in the special figure game cycle executed by the special figure display unit 43, the pattern is not temporarily stopped and displayed, and the variably displayed pattern is suddenly stopped according to the lapse of the variable display time, and the state (pattern is stopped) is maintained until the fixed display time elapses. In other words, the stop display of the pattern on the special figure display unit 43 becomes the fixed display as it is. This is the same for the normal game cycle executed by the normal map display unit 44 .

The pattern display device 75 is not limited to the one described above, and may be arbitrarily selected. Combinations of symbols corresponding to big hits and misses can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 9(b), at the bottom of the display screen G, there is provided a hold display section 200 for displaying a number of hold images corresponding to the number of game rounds held before execution. By visually recognizing the display unit 200, the player can recognize the number of pending games. In the pending display portion 200, a first pending display area Ga corresponding to the first special figure and a second pending display area Gb corresponding to the second special figure are set.

In the first reservation display area Ga, the same number of unit reservation display areas Ga1 to Ga4 as the maximum number of reservations when the game ball wins the first operation opening 62 are divided and displayed so as to be arranged side by side in the left and right direction. there is Specifically, when the game ball wins the first operation port 62, the maximum number of reservations is four, and correspondingly, in the first reservation display area Ga, the first unit reservation display area Ga1, the first A two-unit reserved display area Ga2, a third unit reserved display area Ga3, and a fourth unit reserved display area Ga4 are set.

For example, when the game ball wins the first operation opening 62 and the number of reservations is one, a predetermined reservation image is displayed only in the first unit reservation display area Ga1, and the game ball is placed in the first operation opening. When the number of reservations in the case of winning 62 is 4, a predetermined reservation image is displayed in all of the first unit reservation display area Ga1 to the fourth unit reservation display area Ga4.

In addition, in the second reservation display area Gb, the unit reservation display areas Gb1 to Gb4 of the same number as the maximum number of reservations when the game ball has won the second operation opening 63 are divided and displayed so as to be arranged side by side in the left-right direction. It is Specifically, when the game ball wins the second operation port 63, the maximum number of reservations is four. A two-unit reserved display area Gb2, a third unit reserved display area Gb3, and a fourth unit reserved display area Gb4 are set.

For example, when the number of reservations when the game ball wins the second operation opening 63 is 1, a predetermined reservation image is displayed only in the first unit reservation display area Gb1, and the game ball is placed in the second operation opening. When the number of pending prizes in the case of winning 63 is 4, a predetermined pending image is displayed in all of the first unit pending display area Gb1 to the fourth unit pending display area Gb4.

Further, an execution display area D is set so as to be sandwiched between the first reservation display area Ga and the second reservation display area Gb. In the execution display area D, a holding image corresponding to the game round to be executed (in progress) is displayed. For example, when the game round is finished and the next game round is started, in the first unit reserved display area Ga1 of the first reserved display area Ga or the first unit reserved display area Gb1 of the second reserved display area Gb The displayed image for suspension is moved to the execution display area D and displayed. This allows the player to recognize that the suspended game round will be executed.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in MPU 312 of main controller 162>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the MPU 312 of the main controller 162 will be described with reference to FIG.

The MPU 312 uses various counter information during the game to set the jackpot generation lottery, the display setting of the special figure display unit 43, the display setting of the normal figure display unit 44, etc. Specifically, FIG. , the initial values of the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery for the occurrence of the jackpot, the jackpot type counter C2 used when judging the jackpot type such as the probability variable jackpot result and the normal jackpot result, and the jackpot random number counter C1 are set. A random number initial value counter CINI used for , and a variation type counter CS for determining the variation display time in each special figure display unit AS and BS in the special figure display unit 43 are used. Furthermore, a random number counter C3 per general pattern used for the lottery of whether or not the general electrical accessory 63a of the second operation port 63 is in a support state (open state) is used.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 314 a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 314 . In the lottery counter buffer 314a, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS is stored as acquired information when a prize is won in the first operation port 62 or the second operation port 63. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b as means.

The reserved ball storage area 314b includes a reserved area RE consisting of a first special figure reserved area Ra and a second special figure reserved area Rb, and an execution area AE. Each of the reserved areas Ra and Rb has a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area. Each numerical value information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS stored in the buffer 314a is stored in one of the areas as reserved information. Note that the pending information corresponds to special information.

In this case, in the first area to the fourth area, when the winning to the first working opening 62 or the second working opening 63 occurs multiple times in a row, the first area → second area → third area → Each numerical value information is stored chronologically in the order of the fourth area. By providing four areas in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 are reserved and stored. In addition, the total reservation number storage area is provided in the reservation ball storage area 314b. Information for specifying is stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the reservation area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display unit 43. Based on the various numerical information stored in the area AE, determination of success or failure is performed.

For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 199, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 199). In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 199). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball enters the first operation opening 62 or the second operation opening 63. More specifically, it is stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 62, and the second special figure of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins the second operation opening 63. is stored in the reservation area Rb.

The values of the random numbers for winning the jackpot are stored as a success/failure table (a success/failure information group) in a success/failure table storage area 313a as success/failure information group storage means in the ROM 313 . Here, the contents of the success/failure table will be described with reference to FIG.

In the success/failure table, address information consisting of binary number information and jackpot numerical value information likewise consisting of binary number information are set in a one-to-one correspondence. Specifically, the address information is represented by a decimal number and five types of "1" to "5" are set, and the jackpot numerical information is represented by a decimal number and is "7", "17", and "27". , "37", and "47" are set, and these address information and jackpot numerical information are associated one-to-one. The numerical value of each jackpot numerical value information is included in the numerical range of random number information "0" to "199" that can be updated in the jackpot random number counter C1.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, a low-probability mode (low-probability state) and a high-probability mode (high-probability state) are set as the lottery mode of the win/fail lottery means. The number of jackpot numerical information referred to in the low-probability mode and the number of jackpot numerical information referred to in the high-probability mode are different, and the former is smaller than the latter. Specifically, in the low-probability mode, only the jackpot numerical information whose address information is "1" is referred to in the lottery, and in the high-probability mode, the jackpot numerical information corresponding to all the address information is referred to in the lottery. Referenced. That is, in the low-probability mode, there is one piece of numerical information for winning the jackpot, and in the high-probability mode, there are five pieces, which is more than in the low-probability mode. As a result, the probability of winning a jackpot in the low-probability mode is 1/200, whereas the probability of winning a jackpot in the high-probability mode is 1/40, and the high-probability mode is higher than the low-probability mode. Higher chance of winning. In each lottery mode, the lottery result is a wrong result except for the value of the random number for winning the jackpot. As long as the probability of winning is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number and value of random numbers for winning are arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is for allocating the jackpot type when the jackpot hits, and is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). It's becoming The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball enters the first operation opening 62 or the second operation opening 63. More specifically, it is stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 62, and the second special figure of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins the second operation opening 63. is stored in the reservation area Rb.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the type table storage area 313b of the ROM 313 as a jackpot type table. Here, the jackpot type table will be described with reference to FIG.

As the jackpot type table, a jackpot type table for the first special figure (FIG. 13(a)) and a jackpot type table for the second special figure (FIG. 13(b)) are set. When the jackpot is achieved based on the winning of the first operating port 62, the jackpot type table for the first special figure is referred to, and when the jackpot is achieved based on the winning of the second operating port 63, the The jackpot type table for 2 special figures is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 13(a), in the jackpot type table for the first special figure, 4R probability variable jackpot results and 4R normal jackpot results are set as selectable jackpot types. All of these jackpot results are those in which the number of round games to be executed is four. Here, the round game means that the variable winning device 65 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and then the variable winning control to be closed is executed at least once. In the present embodiment, the variable prize winning control is executed once for one round game.

The 4R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode is set to the high probability mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends, and the support mode in the general electrical accessory 63a of the second operation port 63 is set to the high frequency support mode. is. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode in this case are continued until the next big win occurs (until the next opening/closing execution mode is started). Incidentally, during execution of the opening/closing execution mode, the lottery mode is set to the low-probability mode, and the support mode is set to the low-frequency support mode.

Here, when the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are compared in a situation where the game ball is continuously shot in the same manner to the game area PE, the winning frequency to the second operation port 63 is The driving mode of the universal electrical accessory 63a is controlled so that the level becomes relatively high or low. Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode, the winning probability of the general figure success or failure lottery using the general figure random number counter C3 is higher than the low frequency support mode, and the general electricity when winning the general figure success or failure lottery The number of times the accessory 63a is opened is larger in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode, and the time for one release is longer in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operation port 63 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operation opening 62 is higher than in the second operation opening 63, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation opening is more likely than the first operation opening 62. The probability of winning a prize to the mouth 63 is increased. When a prize is awarded to the second operation port 63, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of balls in his hand too much. It can be carried out.

In addition, the configuration for realizing the high frequency support mode is not limited to the above, for example, after equalizing the winning probability of the general figure success or failure lottery in both modes, the general electricity in the high frequency support mode It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the number of times the accessory 63a is opened or the duration of one opening is treated more favorably than in the low-frequency support mode. In short, it is sufficient if the frequency of winning the second operation port 63 per unit time is higher than the low frequency support mode, and any one condition or any of the general drawing success or failure lottery, the number of times of opening and the opening time A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode may be set by differentiating the combination conditions.

The 4R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode is set to the low-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and the support mode in the universal electrical accessory 63a of the second operation port 63 is set to the high-frequency support mode. is. The high-frequency support mode in this case is continued until the number of game rounds executed after the open/close execution mode reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 100 times). When the upper limit number of times is reached, the high-frequency support mode ends and the support mode switches to the low-frequency support mode while the lottery mode remains the low-probability mode. That is, the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode, and the game state (normal game state) in which the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode is entered.

In this embodiment, "0" to "64" of the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to the 4R probability variable jackpot result, and "65" to "99" correspond to the 4R normal jackpot result. That is, the probability of being assigned to the 4R variable probability jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being assigned to the 4R normal jackpot result is set to 35%.

As shown in FIG. 13(b), in the jackpot type table for the second special figure, a 10R probability variable jackpot result and a 4R normal jackpot result are set as selectable jackpot types. The 10R probability variable jackpot result is that the number of round games to be executed is 10 times. In addition, as for the 10R probability variable jackpot result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode is set to the high probability mode, and the support mode in the general electric accessory 63a of the second operation port 63 is set to the high frequency support mode. It is a jackpot result. The high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode in this case are continued until the next big win occurs.

Incidentally, the 4R normal jackpot result set in the jackpot type table for the second special figure is the same as the 4R normal jackpot result set in the jackpot classification for the first special figure. That is, when the 4R normal jackpot result is triggered by winning the second operation port 63, the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode, the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode, and after the opening and closing execution mode This state continues until the number of times the game is played reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, 100 times).

In this embodiment, "0" to "64" of the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to the 10R variable probability jackpot result, and "65" to "99" correspond to the 4R normal jackpot result. That is, the probability of being assigned to the 10R probability variable jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being assigned to the 4R normal jackpot result is set to 35%.

In this way, the probability of being distributed to the probability variable jackpot result is the same in both the type table of the first special figure display unit and the type table of the second special figure display unit. However, when the probability variable jackpot result is selected, the type table of the second special figure display unit will be the 16R jackpot result, while the type table of the first special figure display unit is set to be the 4R jackpot result. It is In other words, when the probability variable jackpot result is obtained based on the winning of the second operating port 63, the number of rounds in the opening and closing execution mode is greater than the case of the probability variable jackpot result based on the winning of the first operating port 62. As a result, it becomes possible to expect the payout of more game balls. That is, the game in which the game ball enters the second operating port 63 is more advantageous for the player than the game in which the game ball enters the first operating port 62 .

As described above, there is a clear difference in advantages for the player between the first operating port 62 and the second operating port 63 . Therefore, the player plays the game expecting that the second operation opening 63 of the first operation opening 62 and the second operation opening 63 will win a prize. The degree of attention of the player to the high-frequency support mode in which the frequency of winning prizes increases.

In addition, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine the stop result of the pattern stopped and displayed on each special figure display portion AS, BS when the result of the winning lottery based on the winning to the operation ports 62, 63 is a jackpot. is also used. The stop result is determined by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313 d of the ROM 313 . In the stop result table, a plurality of data of the stop result (jackpot pattern stopped and displayed on each special figure display unit AS, BS) in the case of a big win are set in correspondence with the value of the big win type counter C2, When determining the stop result, the data corresponding to the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is read out of the plurality of stop result data. Here, since the same jackpot type counter C2 is used for both determination of the stop result and determination of the jackpot type, the jackpot pattern stopped and displayed on each special figure display unit AS, BS and the jackpot determined at the time of the jackpot It corresponds to the type.

The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). The variation type counter CS is used to determine the variation display time in the first special figure display portion AS and the second special figure display portion BS of the special figure display portion 43 in the MPU 312.

The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the variation type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 62 or the second operation opening 63. More specifically, it is stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 62, and the second special figure of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins the second operation opening 63. is stored in the reservation area Rb.

The allocation destination of the variation display time for the variation type counter CS is stored in the variation display time table storage area 313c of the ROM 313 as a variation display time table. Here, the variable display time table will be described with reference to FIG.

As the variation display time table, a variation display time table for big hits (FIG. 14(a)) and a variation display time table for loss (FIG. 14(b)) are set. When the result of the winning lottery based on the winning to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 is a big win, the fluctuation display time table for big winning is referred to, and the winning to the above operating ports 62 and 63 is determined. If the result of the winning lottery based on the winning lottery results in a loss, the variable display time table for losing is referred to.

In each fluctuation display time table, the numerical range of the fluctuation type counter CS and the fluctuation pattern information are associated and set. In FIG. 14, information on the variable display time is shown together with the variable pattern for ease of understanding. are stored in the ROM 313 separately.

As shown in FIG. 14(a), in the variation display time table for big wins, variation pattern 1A (15 sec), variation pattern 2A (60 sec), variation pattern 3A (60 sec) and variation pattern 3A (60 sec) are available as selectable variation patterns. A pattern 4A (120 sec) and a variation pattern 5A (120 sec) are set. When the variation pattern is selected using the variation type counter CS, the pattern variation in the first special figure display unit AS or the second special figure display unit BS at the variation display time corresponding to the selected variation pattern display is performed.

Moreover, when a variation pattern is selected, the information which shows the variation pattern is transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 143 as a variation start command. The effect control device 143 grasps the variation pattern selected by the main control device 162 based on the received variation start command. Then, the display control device 350 is controlled so that the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed at the variable display time corresponding to the grasped variation pattern. As a result, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed on the symbol display device 75 in synchronization with the variable display of the symbols on the first special symbol display unit AS or the second special symbol display unit BS.

In addition, each variation pattern also corresponds to a game round effect such as a ready-to-win effect performed by the pattern display device 75 . Specifically, the variation pattern 1A corresponds to normal reach performance, the variation pattern 2A corresponds to SP reach (super reach) A performance, the variation pattern 3A corresponds to SP reach B performance, and the variation pattern 4A is It corresponds to the SPSP reach A winning effect, and the variation pattern 5A corresponds to the SPSP reach B winning effect. That is, when the performance control device 143 grasps the variation pattern from the received variation start command, it controls the display control device 350 so that the pattern display device 75 performs the game rotation performance corresponding to the variation pattern.

In each ready-to-win effect, after the ready-to-win display is performed, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in a big winning symbol combination. Here, the ready-to-win display (ready-to-win state) is provided with a pattern display device 75 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of patterns (patterns), and the stop display result after the variable display is the special display result (jackpot result), in the gaming machine in which the game state becomes a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player, the variable display (or variable display) of the patterns (pictures) on the pattern display device 75 is started. It is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to result in the special display result, before the stop display result is derived and displayed.

In other words, by stopping and displaying the symbols of some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, a big winning figure combination corresponding to the occurrence of the big winning state is established. It is a display state in which possible combinations of ready-to-win symbols are displayed, and in this state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows. More specifically, as a step prior to terminating the variable display of symbols, while the symbols of the last stop row are being variably displayed, the symbols of the symbol rows other than the last stop row are placed on the effective line in the display screen G to hit the jackpot. is to form a reach line by stopping and displaying in a manner forming a combination of symbols.

In the normal ready-to-win performance, symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination of big winning symbols after the ready-to-win display is performed. The SP ready-to-win effect is a higher-level ready-to-win effect than the normal ready-to-win effect, and a predetermined effect in which a character or the like appears after forming the reach line is performed, and after the predetermined effect, the symbols are stopped and displayed with a combination of symbols for a big win. be. It should be noted that the SP reach A effect and the SP reach B effect differ in the content of the predetermined effect after forming the reach line. The SPSP ready-to-win performance is a ready-to-win performance higher than the SP ready-to-win performance, and after the development performance developed from the SP ready-to-win performance is performed, the symbols are stopped and displayed in combination with the symbols for the big win. The SPSP reach A production develops from the SP reach A production, and the SPSP reach B production develops from the reach B production.

It should be noted that the items in the "remarks (effect aspect)" column in FIG. 14(a) are added for convenience and are not set in the variable display time table.

As shown in FIG. 14(b), in the fluctuation display time table for error, the fluctuation patterns that can be selected are fluctuation pattern 1H, fluctuation pattern 2H (15 sec), fluctuation pattern 3H (60 sec), and fluctuation pattern 4H ( 60 sec), a variation pattern 5A (120 sec), and a variation pattern 6H (120 sec) are set. It is the same as the variation display time table for big hits in that the variation display time is defined corresponding to each variation pattern, but the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern 1H is the first special figure or It fluctuates depending on the number of reservations of the second special figure. Specifically, when the variation pattern 1H is selected in a situation where the number of reservations is 2 or less, the variation display time is 8 seconds, and when the variation pattern 1H is selected in a situation where the number of reservations is 3 or more is configured so that the variable display time is 4 sec, which is shorter than 8 sec.

Variation pattern 1H corresponds to the complete loss production in the pattern display device 75, variation pattern 2H corresponds to the normal reach loss production, variation pattern 3H corresponds to the SP reach A loss production, and variation pattern 4H corresponds to the SP reach B loss production. , the variation pattern 5H corresponds to the SPSP reach A deviating effect, and the variation pattern 6H corresponds to the SPSP reach B deviating effect.

In the completely lost performance, symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination of symbols that are out of reach without performing the ready-to-win display. In addition, after the ready-to-win display is performed, each of the above-mentioned out-of-reach effects is a combination of symbols in which the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are out of the reach (the symbols in the final stop row that are stopped and displayed on the ready-to-reach line are combined with the ready-to-reach symbols. The symbols are stopped and displayed in a state where symbols other than symbols that form a big hit are formed by combination). In addition, the SP reach-out A performance corresponds to the SP reach-A hit performance, and after the predetermined performance of the same kind as the SP reach-A win performance is performed, the symbols are stopped and displayed with the symbol combination of the reach out. is. Also, the SP reach B out performance, the SPSP reach A out performance, and the SPSP reach out B performance also correspond to the SP reach B win performance, SPSP reach A win performance, and SPSP reach B win performance, respectively.

In the variation display time table for the big hit, "0" of the variation type counter CS corresponds to the variation pattern 1A, "1" to "12" correspond to the variation pattern 2A, and "13" to "28" are the variation patterns. 3A, "29" to "63" correspond to the variation pattern 4A, and "64" to "99" correspond to the variation pattern 5A. On the other hand, in the fluctuation display time table for failure, "0" to "59" of the fluctuation type counter CS correspond to fluctuation pattern 1H, "60" to "79" correspond to fluctuation pattern 2H, and "80" to "89" corresponds to the variation pattern 3H, "90" to "96" correspond to the variation pattern 4H, "97" to "98" correspond to the variation pattern 5H, and "99" corresponds to the variation pattern 6H. are doing.

When the result of the winning lottery based on the prize winning to the operation ports 62, 63 is a jackpot result, the variation pattern 5A corresponding to the SPSP reach B performance is most likely to be selected, and the result of the winning lottery is a wrong result. , the variation pattern 6H corresponding to the SPSP reach B effect is the least likely to be selected. In other words, the SPSP reach B effect is most likely to be executed in the case of a big hit, and is a reach effect that is least likely to be executed in the case of a loss, so it functions as the highest reach effect with the highest expectation of a big win. Become.

As for the variation patterns other than the variation pattern 5A and the variation pattern 6H, the variation pattern corresponding to the higher reach effect is more likely to be selected in the case of a big hit, and is less likely to be selected in the case of a loss. That is, the degree of expectation for a big win is higher in the order of normal reach effect<SP reach A effect<SP reach B effect<SPSP reach A effect.

The random number counter C3 per normal figure is, for example, incremented by one within the range of 0 to 250, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). The random number counter C3 per normal pattern is periodically updated, and is stored in the normal pattern reservation area 314c of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 64.例文帳に追加Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electrical accessory 63a to the open state based on the stored value of the random number counter C3 per general pattern. For example, if C4=0 to 190, the general electrical function 63a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4=191 to 250, the general electrical function 63a is not controlled to be open.

<Regarding Various Processing Executed by Main Controller 162>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 312 of the main controller 162 will be described. The processing of the MPU 312 can be broadly divided into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing and normal processing that are executed to advance the game, and NMI that is started by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. and interrupt processing. For convenience of explanation, NMI interrupt processing and timer interrupt processing will be described first, and then main processing and normal processing will be described.

<NMI interrupt processing>
NMI interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. This process is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power outage or the like. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring unit 315 of the power supply and launch control device 191 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 312, and the MPU 312 suspends the control being executed. to start NMI interrupt processing.

In the NMI interrupt process, first, in step S11, the data in the use register provided in the MPU 312 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 314. FIG. In step S12, a power failure flag (power failure occurrence information) is set in the backup area. In step S13, the data saved in the backup area is returned to the use register of the MPU 312, and then the NMI interrupt processing is terminated. Note that if the power failure flag can be set without destroying the data in the use register of the MPU 312, the processing of steps S11 and S13 can be omitted.

After the execution of the NMI interrupt processing, it is confirmed that the power failure flag is set in the normal processing, which will be described later, and the power failure processing is executed. The processing will be described later.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started by the MPU 312 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing of various winning sensors is executed. That is, it reads the states of various winning sensors connected to the main controller 162, determines the states of the winning sensors (detection information from the winning sensors), and saves the detection information (winning detection information). For example, when it is determined that the winning to the first operation port 62 has occurred, the winning detection flag for the first special figure is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314, and the winning to the second operation port 63 is When it is determined that it has occurred, the winning detection flag for the second special figure is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. Also, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 64, a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM314.

In step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 314 .

In step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the random number counter C3 per normal pattern are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the random number counter C3 per normal pattern are each incremented by 1, and each of these counter values is cleared to 0 when they reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C3 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 314. FIG.

In step S104, winning processing for through accompanying winning to the through gate 64 is executed. In the winning process for through, it is determined whether or not a winning detection flag for through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314, and if the flag is stored, it is stored in the normal figure reservation area 314c. On the condition that the stored number of accessory reserved storage is less than 4, the value of the normal pattern random number counter C3 updated in step S103 is stored in the normal pattern reservation area 314c. Further, when the winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 314e, the winning detection flag is erased and the winning processing for the through gate is ended.

After executing the winning process for the through gate in step S104, the process advances to step S105 to execute the winning process for the operating openings associated with the winning of the operating openings 62 and 63, and the timer interrupt process ends.

<Winning process for working mouth>
The winning process for the operation opening in step S105 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first operating hole 62 (starting winning) based on the detection state of the first operating hole winning sensor 62a. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the first operating port 62, in step S202, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 181 to pay out three game balls is set.

In step S203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the first operation hole 62. FIG. In step S204, the value stored in the reservation number storage area of the first special figure reservation area Ra is read, and the start reservation number RaN that is reserved and stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra is set (hereinafter , also referred to as the first start holding storage number RaN). After that, in step S205, information acquisition processing for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS is performed, and the prize winning processing ends.

In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S201 (when the winning to the first operating port 62 has not occurred), the process proceeds to step S206, whether or not the game ball has won the second operating port 63 (start winning) is determined by the detection state of the second operation opening winning sensor 63c. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second operation port 63, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 181 to pay out one game ball is set in step S207.

In step S208, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the second operation hole 63. FIG. In step S209, the value stored in the reservation number storage area of the second special figure reservation area Rb is read, and the start reservation number RbN that is reserved and stored in the second special figure reservation area Rb is set (hereinafter , also referred to as the second start holding storage number RbN). After that, information acquisition processing is performed in step S205, and the main winning processing ends.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S206 (when no winning to the second operation opening 63 has occurred), the main winning processing is terminated as it is.

Incidentally, the prize ball command set in the step S202 or step S207 is transmitted to the payout control device 181 in the external output process of the normal process to be described later.

Here, the information acquisition processing in step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the number N (RaN or RbN) of start pending storage set in step S204 or step S209 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). If the number N of starting pending memories is the upper limit, this information acquisition process is terminated as it is, and if it is less than the upper limit, the number of starting pending memories of the corresponding special figure holding areas Ra, Rb in step S302 Increment N by 1. In step S303, the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as common pending number CRN) is incremented by one.

In step S304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS are stored in the first storage area among the free storage area areas of the corresponding reservation area for the special figure display section, that is, in the above step S302 Store in the storage area corresponding to the number of pending storage incremented by one.

That is, when the starting reservation storage number RaN for the first special figure is set, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS is set to the first special figure reservation area Ra It is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas, that is, the reservation area Ra corresponding to the starting reservation storage number RaN for the first special figure incremented by one in step S302.

In addition, when the starting reservation storage number RbN for the second special figure is set, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second special figure is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas, that is, the start suspension storage number RbN for the second special figure incremented by 1 in the above step S302 and the corresponding suspension area Rb.

In step S305, a pending prefetch process for executing a pending notice effect, which will be described later, is executed. Details of the pending prefetch processing will be described later. After execution of step S305, this information acquisition process is terminated.

<Main processing>
Main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The main process is when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the external power is supplied, or when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on) and external power is supplied).

First, in step S2001, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, wait processing is executed for about one second, for example, in order to wait for the sub-side control device (payout control device 181, etc.) to become operable. In the subsequent step S2002, access to the RAM 314 is permitted.

In step S2003, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch of the power supply and launch control device 191 is turned on. In step S2005, the RAM determination value is calculated, and in step S2006, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value is normal. Specifically, the RAM determination value calculated in step S2005 is compared with the RAM determination value saved when the power failure occurred, and it is determined whether or not they match. If both match, the RAM determination value is determined to be normal, and the data stored in the RAM 314 is recognized as valid. Conversely, if the two do not match, the RAM determination value is determined to be abnormal, and the data stored in the RAM 314 is recognized as invalid. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of RAM 314 . It is also possible to judge the validity of the stored data by checking whether the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 314 is correctly saved.

If the RAM determination value is normal, the process advances to step S2007 to write the value of the stack pointer saved in the backup area to the stack pointer of the MPU 312 and restore the stack state to the state before the power was cut off. In step S2008, a power recovery command is output to restore the sub-side control device (payout control device 181, etc.) to the gaming state before the power interruption. In step S2009, the power failure flag stored in the backup area is erased. After that, in step S2010, the interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to normal processing, which will be described later.

If the determination in step S2003 is affirmative (if the RAM erase switch is pressed) or if the determination in step S2006 is negative (if the RAM determination value is not normal), the process proceeds to step S2011, where the sub-side control device (payout control output an initialization command to initialize the device 181, etc.). At step S2012, the used area of the RAM 314 is cleared to 0, and at step S2013, the RAM 314 is initialized. After that, in step S2010, the interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to normal processing, which will be described later.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is activated when the power is turned on is executed, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an overview, the processing of steps S401 to S408 is executed as regular processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S409 and S410 is executed during the remaining time.

In normal processing, first, an external signal output processing is executed in step S401. In the external signal output process of step S401, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 181 . In addition, when command for production such as fluctuation start command, type command and fluctuation end command is set, it is transmitted to production control device 143.

In step S402, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 314 .

In step S403, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In this game round control process, big hit determination, display control of the special figure display unit 43, and the like are performed.

In step S404, game state transition processing is executed. By this game state transition processing, the game state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game round control process in step S403 and the game state transition process in step S404 will be described later.

In step S405, an electric support process for driving and controlling the universal electric accessory 63a provided in the second operation port 63 is executed. In this electric support process, numerical information obtained from the general pattern per random number counter C3 stored in the general pattern reservation area 314c of the RAM 314 is used to determine whether or not to open the general electric role 63a. A winning lottery is performed, and when winning, the opening/closing process of the universal electrical accessory 63a is executed. In addition, the display control of the display unit 44 for the general pattern is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the general pattern success/failure lottery.

Here, as already explained, as a form of support by the general electric accessory 63a, a low frequency support mode and a high frequency support mode are set, and the user can switch to one of the support modes in the game state transition process described later. Migration takes place. After this processing, if the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314, the high frequency support mode is set, and if the flag is not set, the low frequency support mode is set.

In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode is set by determining whether or not the high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314 . Then, in the case of the high-frequency support mode, when the electric role open state is won, the general electric role 63a is set to be in the open state more times than in the low-frequency support mode, and once set a longer opening time. In addition, in the case of the high-frequency support mode, when the electric role open state is won and the open state of the general electric role item 63a occurs multiple times, the next open state is started after one open state is completed. The closing time until the opening is set to be shorter than the opening time of one time.

In step S406, game ball launch control processing is executed. In the game ball shooting control process, the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 110 is energized once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a shooting permission signal is input from the power supply and shooting control device 191. . As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE.

In step S407, it is determined whether a power failure flag is stored in the backup area of RAM314. The power failure flag is set by NMI interrupt processing (FIG. 15) executed when a power failure occurs, and is used by the MPU 312 to recognize the occurrence of a power failure.

If the power failure flag is not stored (if the power failure state has not occurred), in step S408, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has come, that is, a predetermined time ( In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not 4 msec) has elapsed. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process.

That is, in step S409, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 314 . Further, in step S410, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 314 .

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S401 to S408 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated. The variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated.

If the determination in step S407 is affirmative (if the power failure flag is stored), the process proceeds to step S411 to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt process. In step S412, the value of the stack pointer of MPU 312 is stored in the backup area of RAM 314, and in step S413, a power failure flag is set in the backup area.

In step S414, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of RAM 314 . In step S415, access to the RAM 314 is prohibited, and thereafter the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Even after the power is completely cut off, the data storage holding power of the RAM 314 is supplied from the power supply and launch control device 191, so the information stored in the RAM 314 before the power cut off remains unchanged. It is held within a period (for example, 1 day or 2 days).

<Game Round Control Processing>
The game round control processing of step S403 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag is stored (memorized) in the various flag storage area 314 e of the RAM 314 . The opening/closing execution mode flag is stored when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode in the game state transition processing described later, and is erased when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the game state transition processing.

If it is in the opening/closing execution mode, the processing after step S502, that is, the processing for starting the game cycle in steps S502 to S505, the processing for progressing the game cycle in steps S506 to S507, and the end of the game cycle in steps S508 to S509. This game round control process is terminated without executing any of the processes for use. In other words, when it is in the opening/closing execution mode, regardless of whether or not winning to the operation ports 62 and 63 has occurred, the special figure game cycle is not started.

It should be noted that the game round (normal game round) based on the success or failure lottery triggered by winning the through gate 64 is executed regardless of whether it is in the opening/closing execution mode. That is, during the opening and closing execution mode, although the execution of the special figure game times is restricted, the general figure game times are executed in the same manner as when not in the opening and closing execution mode. Therefore, when the result of the general figure success or failure lottery is a winning result during the opening and closing execution mode, the second operation port 63 (universal electrical accessory 63a) is opened.

If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the special figure display unit 43 is in the process of variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first special figure display portion AS and the second special figure display portion BS is being displayed in a variable manner. Note that this determination is made by determining whether or not a variable display flag is stored (memorized) in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. FIG. The variable display flag is stored when the variable display is started for either the first special figure display portion AS or the second special figure display portion BS, and is erased when the variable display ends.

When the special figure display unit 43 is not in variable display, the process proceeds to step S503, and it is determined whether or not the common pending number CRN is "0". When the common reservation number CRN is "0", it means that the start reservation memory numbers RaN and RbN for both the first operation port 62 and the second operation port 63 are "0". Therefore, the game round control process is terminated as it is.

When the common reservation number CRN is not "0", data for setting the data stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra or the second special figure reservation area Rb for variable display in step S504 After executing the setting process and further executing the fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display on the special figure display unit 43 and the fluctuation display on the symbol display device 75 in step S505, the game round control process is ended.

Here, the data setting process in step S504 and the variation start process in step S505 will be described in detail below.

First, the data setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the second start reservation storage number RbN reserved and stored in the second special figure reservation area Rb is "0". When the second start-holding memory number RbN is "0", the data setting process for the first special figure (first operation port 62) in steps S602 to S608 is executed, and the second start-holding memory number RbN is If it is not "0", data setting processing for the second special figure (second operation port 63) of steps S609 to S615 is executed.

As already explained, the data setting process is performed when the common pending number CRN is 1 or more. It means that at least one of RbN is 1 or more. In this case, in the data setting process, it is first determined whether or not the second start pending memory number RbN is "0", and if the second start pending memory number RbN is "0", that is, the second special figure It is configured to execute processing related to the reservation information for the first special figure on the condition that the reservation information for is not present. Therefore, when the reservation information is stored in both the first special figure reservation area Ra and the second special figure reservation area Rb, the second special figure stored in the second special figure reservation area Rb The holding information for the figure (second operating port 63) is preferentially processed.

In the data setting process for the first special figure, first, in step S602, the first starting reservation storage number RaN of the first special figure reservation area Ra is decremented by one. In step S603, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by one. In step S604, the data stored in the first area of the first special figure reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE.

In step S605, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure reservation area Ra (reservation information such as the jackpot random number counter C1) is executed. In this process, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in the second to fourth areas are sequentially moved to lower areas.

In step S606, it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM314. The 2nd special figure flag is for MPU312 to grasp that the pending information of the 2nd operation mouth 63 exists. When the second special figure flag is stored, the second special figure flag is erased in step S607.

After the execution of step S607 or when a negative determination is made in step S606 (when the second special figure flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S608, and the effect control device 143 that the data of the reservation area has been shifted Set the shift command (shift occurrence information) for notification. In this case, from the command information storage area 313e of the ROM 313, the information that the reservation area that is the target of this data shift corresponds to the first special figure reservation area Ra, that is, the first operation port 62 A shift command including information indicating that it is compatible is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 143 . After that, the data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S608 is transmitted to the effect control device 143 in step S401 in normal processing (FIG. 20). Based on the received shift command, the effect control device 143 executes processing for changing the display in the first reserved display area Ga of the pattern display device 75 in accordance with the decrease in the reserved number.

In the data setting process for the second special figure, first, in step S609, the second start reservation storage number RbN of the second special figure reservation area Rb is decremented by one. In step S610, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by one. In step S611, the data stored in the first area of the second special figure reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

In step S612, a process of shifting the data (reservation information such as the jackpot random number counter C1) stored in the storage area of the second special figure reservation area Rb is executed. In step S613, it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. When the second special figure flag is not stored, the second special figure flag is set in step S614.

After the execution of step S614 or when the affirmative determination is made in step S613 (when the second special figure flag is stored), the process proceeds to step S615, and the sub-side control device that the data in the reservation area has been shifted Set a shift command (shift occurrence information) that is information for the effect control device 143 to recognize. In this case, from the command information storage area 313e of the ROM 313, the information that the reservation area that is the target of the data shift this time corresponds to the second special figure reservation area Rb, that is, the second operation port 63 A shift command including information on what is being done is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 143 . After that, the data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set at step S613 is transmitted to the effect control device 143 at step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). Based on the received shift command, the effect control device 143 executes processing for changing the display in the second reserved display area Gb of the pattern display device 75 in accordance with the decrease in the reserved number.

Next, fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a high-probability mode flag is stored (stored) in the various flag storage area 314 e of the RAM 314 . The high-probability mode flag is for the MPU 312 to recognize that the high-probability mode is in progress, and is set when shifting to the high-probability mode.

If the mode is not the high-probability mode, the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode in step S702. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value (for example, "7") set as the jackpot winning for the low probability mode. . On the other hand, if it is the high-probability mode, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode in step S703. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is set as a jackpot winning value for the high probability mode (for example, "7", "17", "27", "37 , "47").

After execution of step S702 or step S703, in step S704, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning determination in step S702 or step S703 is a jackpot winning. If the jackpot is won, it is determined in step S705 whether or not the second special figure flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. When the second special figure flag is not stored, at step S706, a lottery for the jackpot category is performed with reference to the category table for the first special figure display unit (FIG. 13(a)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 4R probability variable jackpot result or the numerical range of the 4R normal jackpot result.

On the other hand, when the second special figure flag is stored, in step S707, the lottery for the jackpot category is performed with reference to the second special figure table (FIG. 13(b)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 10R probability variable jackpot result or the numerical range of the 4R normal jackpot result.

After execution of step S706 or step S707, in step S708, the type flag indicating the jackpot type selected by lottery in step S706 or step S707 is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. For example, when the jackpot type selected by lottery is the 10R probability variable jackpot, the 10R probability variable jackpot flag is stored.

In step S709, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of the ROM 313 is referenced to set the stop result for the big win. Specifically, the stop result corresponding to the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is read from the stop result table, and set as the stop result of the current game cycle.

If a negative determination is made in step S704 (if no big hit has occurred), the process proceeds to step S710 to set a stop result for a failure. In the present embodiment, only one type of stop result for failure is provided, and that stop result is set in step S710.

After the execution of step S709 or step S710, in step S711, the variable display time setting process for setting the variable display time of the current game round in the first special figure display portion AS or the second special figure display portion BS to run.

Here, the processing for setting the variable display time will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination in the current game round is a big win. If it is a big win, the process proceeds to step S802, and a variable display time table for big win (FIG. 14(a)) is obtained as a table for lottery of variable display times (variation patterns). On the other hand, if it is not a jackpot but a loss, the process proceeds to step S803 to acquire a variation display time table for loss (FIG. 14(b)).

After step S802 or step S803 is executed, in step S804, the variation display time table (variation pattern) is selected using the variation display time table acquired in step S802 or S803. Specifically, one variation pattern corresponding to the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is specified from among the variation pattern group set in the variation display time table.

In step S805, the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern identified in step S804 is set as the variation display time of the current game round. In this step, the variable display time value corresponding to the specified variation pattern is set in the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 314 d of the RAM 314 . For example, if the variable display time is 15 seconds, 7500 is set in the variable display time counter area as the corresponding value. This set value is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16) is started. After execution of step S805, the variable display time setting process ends.

Returning to the description of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 23), after step S711 is executed, the fluctuation start command and the type command are set in step S712. The fluctuation start command includes information on the fluctuation pattern. As for the variation pattern, since the variation pattern for the big hit and the variation pattern for the loss are set separately (FIG. 14), the effect control device 143 analyzes the variation pattern from the variation start command, and the main controller 162 It is possible to determine the result of the pass/fail judgment performed in . In other words, the variable start command includes not only information about the variable display time but also information about the result of the success/failure determination. In addition, the type command includes information on the jackpot type. In addition, the type command is set only when the result of the winning/failing determination is a jackpot.

The variation start command and the type command set in step S712 are transmitted to the effect control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). The effect control device 143 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variation start command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. The content of this effect includes a variable display mode of the pattern on the pattern display device 75, and the determined variable display mode of the pattern is output from the effect control device 143 to the display control device 350 as a display content command. be. The display control device 350 controls the display of the pattern display device 75 based on the display content command received from the effect control device 143 so that the symbols corresponding to each game cycle are displayed in a variable manner.

In step S713, the variable display of the special figure display unit 43 is started. At that time, the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314 are referred to, and when the second special figure flag is stored, the pattern of the second special figure display portion BS is determined as the current game round corresponds to the second special figure. is displayed variably. On the other hand, when the second special figure flag is not stored, the pattern of the first special figure display part AS is variably displayed on the assumption that the current game round corresponds to the first special figure. After execution of step S713, this fluctuation start processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of the game round control process (FIG. 21), if the affirmative determination is made in step S502 (if the special figure display unit 43 is displaying a variable display), the process proceeds to step S506, and the variable display time of the current game round determines whether or not has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 314 has become "0".

If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S507. In the variable display processing, display control is performed on the special figure display unit so that each display segment is turned on and off in a predetermined order in the special figure display unit related to the current game round (Emission control of each display segment )do. After execution of step S507, this game round control process is terminated.

If the variation display time has elapsed, variation end processing is executed in step S508. In the fluctuation ending process, the special figure display units AS and BS are controlled so that the pattern displayed in fluctuation is stopped and displayed according to the stop result set in step S709 or step S710.

In step S509, a variation end command is set, and then the game round control process is ended. The fluctuation end command set in step S509 is transmitted to the effect control device 143 in step S401 in normal processing (FIG. 20). The performance control device 143 transmits the received fluctuation end command to the display control device 350 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 350 receives the variation end command to confirm and display (final stop display) the combination of the final stop symbols in the game round.

<Game state transition processing>
The game state transition processing of step S404 (FIG. 20) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S902, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display in each special figure display portion AS and BS is finished (final display is finished). If it is not the end timing of the variable display, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

If it is the end timing of the variable display, in step S903, it is determined whether or not the game result of the current game cycle corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, that is, whether or not the result of the winning/failing determination is a big win. do. In this step, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is achieved by referring to whether or not the type flag (step S708 in FIG. 23) is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM314. If the game result of the current game round does not correspond to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S903 (if the game result of the current game round corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode), the process proceeds to step S904 to execute the opening/closing execution mode start processing. In the start process, the opening/closing execution mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. Also, an opening period is set for waiting for the start of the first round while the variable winning device 65 is closed. Further, when the high-probability mode flag and the high-frequency support flag are stored in the various flag storage area 314e, a process of erasing these flags is executed.

In step S905, round display start processing for notifying the number of rounds in the open/close execution mode is executed. In this step, the current jackpot type is grasped based on the type flag stored in the various flag storage area 314e, and the round display section is controlled so as to display the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type. The display of the number of rounds on the round display section continues until the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In step S906, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type of this time is the 10R probability variable jackpot result. If it is not a 10R variable probability jackpot result, that is, if it is either a 4R probability variable jackpot result or a 4R normal jackpot result, in step S907, "4" is set in the round counter area RC provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314. do. On the other hand, if the current jackpot type is the 10R probability variable jackpot result, "10" is set in the round counter area RC in step S908.

After executing step S907 or step S908, in step S909, an opening command for notifying the effect control device 143 of the opening start and opening period is set. This set opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 143 at step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20).

In step S910, after executing the external signal setting process, the game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the output terminal for the jackpot signal provided at the external output terminal 213 is put into an output state. As a result, when the output terminal for the jackpot signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine 10 generates a jackpot in the management control device. you can figure out what you did.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S901 (if the opening/closing execution mode is in progress), the process proceeds to step S911 to determine whether or not the opening period has passed. If the opening period has not passed, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is. When the opening period has passed, the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed in step S912.

Here, the processing for opening and closing the big winning opening will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening 65a is being opened. This determination is made based on the drive state of the drive section 65d. If the big winning opening 65a is not open, it is determined in step S1002 whether or not the value of the round counter area RC is "0". When the value of the round counter area RC is not "0", that is, when there is a round game to be executed, the value of the timer area T provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 314 is "0" in step S1003. Determine whether or not there is This process determines whether or not a waiting period between rounds (a round interval period) has elapsed.

When the value of the timer area T is "0", the process proceeds to step S1004, and "15000" is set in the timer area T as a value corresponding to the upper limit opening time (30 sec) of the variable winning device 65 in one round game. to set. The value set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16) is started. In step S1005, "10" is set in the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 344b as a value corresponding to the maximum winning number (10) to the variable winning device 65 in one round game.

In step S1006, the variable winning driving section 32c is brought into a driving state so as to open the big winning opening 65a. In step S1007, an opening command for notifying the effect control device 143 that the opening of the large winning opening 65a (variable winning device 65) has started is set, and then the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. This set opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 143 at step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20).

If the determination in step S1002 is affirmative (the value of the round counter area RC is 0) or if the determination in step S1003 is negative (the value of the timer area T is not 0), the main winning opening opening/closing process is continued. finish.

Further, when the affirmative determination is made in the above step S1001 (when the big winning opening 65a is being opened), the process proceeds to step S1008, and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer area T is "0". This process determines whether or not the upper limit opening time of the variable winning device 65 set in step S1004 has passed.

If the value of the timer area T is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1009, and it is determined whether or not a prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 65a based on the detection state of the winning sensor 65c for the large winning opening. If no prize has been won, the main prize winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if a prize has been won, the value of the prize counter area PC is decremented by 1 in step S1010, and then it is checked in step S1011 if the value of the prize counter area PC is "0". judge. If the value of the prize winning counter area PC is not "0", the main prize winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1008 (the value of the timer area T is 0) or if an affirmative determination is made in the step S1011 (the value of the winning counter area PC is 0), the process proceeds to step S1012, and the drive unit 65d is switched to a non-driving state to close the big winning opening 65a. At step S1013, the value of the round counter area RC is decremented by 1, and at step S1014, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter area RC is "0".

If the value of the round counter area RC is not "0", that is, if there is a remaining round game, the process proceeds to step S1015, where the variable prize winning device 65 is closed and the start of the next round game is awaited. "1000" is set in the timer area T as a value corresponding to (2 sec).

In step S1016, a closing command for notifying the effect control device 143 that the variable winning device 65 has been closed (that the round game has ended) is set, and then the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. The set closing command is transmitted to the effect control device 143 at step S401 in normal processing (FIG. 20).

When the determination in step S1014 is affirmative (when the value of the round counter area RC is 0), that is, when the final round of the opening/closing execution mode ends, the process advances to step S1017 to execute ending start processing. In the start process, an ending period is set to wait for the start of the next game round (the first game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends) while the variable prize winning device 65 is kept in the closed state. In step S1018, an ending command for notifying the effect control device 143 of the start of the ending and the ending period is set, and then the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. The set ending command is transmitted to the effect control device 143 at step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20).

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 25), after executing the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S912, it is determined in step S913 whether or not the value of the round counter area RC is "0". If the value of the round counter area RC is not "0", the game state transition processing is terminated as it is so as to continue the open/close execution mode.

If the value of the round counter area RC is "0", the process advances to step S914 to determine whether the ending has ended (whether the ending period has elapsed). If the ending has not ended, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is so as to continue the ending. On the other hand, if the ending has ended, the process advances to step S915 to execute transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Here, the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1101, the type flags stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314 are referred to, and it is determined whether or not the current big win is the probability variable big win result. In the case of a variable probability jackpot result, in step S1102, a high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e, and in step S1103, a high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. As a result, the winning/failure lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode (so-called probability variable game state with electric support). This game state continues until the next big win occurs. After execution of step S1103, the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S1101 (if the current jackpot is not a probability variable jackpot result), that is, if this jackpot is a normal jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S1104, and the high frequency support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. to set. If the jackpot this time is a normal jackpot result, the high probability mode flag is not set, so by the processing of step S1104, the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode. game state). In the following step S1105, "100" is set in the number-of-games counter area provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM314. This set value is decremented by 1 each time the special figure game is executed once in the situation of the time saving game state, and when the value of the game counter area becomes "0", the above various flags The high frequency support flag stored in the storage area 314e is deleted. Therefore, the time-saving game state ends when the game is played 100 times, and then the game state (normal game state) in which the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. do. After execution of step S1105, the transition processing at the end of the open/close execution mode ends.

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition processing (FIG. 25), after the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in step S915 is completed, in step S916, round display termination processing is executed. In the processing, the round display unit is controlled so that the round display unit in the special figure display unit 43 is turned off.

In step S917, end processing of the opening/closing execution mode is executed, and then the game state transition processing is ended. In the opening/closing execution mode ending process, a process for deleting the type flag and the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 314e is executed.

<Holding prefetch processing>
The pending prefetch processing of step S305 (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed when suspension information is acquired based on the winning of the first operation port 62 or the second operation port 63, and for the acquired suspension information, the variation corresponding to the suspension information Prior to execution of the start process (FIG. 23), the presence or absence of a big win, the type of big win, and the variation pattern are selected by lottery.

First, in step S1201, the start holding storage numbers RaN and RbN stored in the holding areas Ra and Rb of the holding ball storage area 314b and the common holding number CRN stored in the total holding number storage area of the holding ball storage area 314b. and stored in the registers of the MPU 312 .

In step S1202, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the hold information acquired in step S304 (FIG. 18) (random numerical value). In step S1203, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step S1202 is used to determine whether the game is successful or not. At this time, if the lottery mode when the pending information is acquired is the low probability mode, refer to the success/failure table for the low probability mode, and if the lottery mode when the pending information is acquired is the high probability mode The success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode.

In step S1204, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination in step S1202 is a big hit. If the jackpot is won, in step S1205, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 included in the hold information acquired based on the current winning to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 (the jackpot type is selected by lottery) random number).

At step S1206, the lottery for the jackpot type is performed using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped at step S1205. At this time, if the hold information is based on the winning of the first operation port 62, the type table for the first special figure (FIG. 13(a)) is referred to, and the reservation based on the winning of the second operation port 63 is performed. In the case of information, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is specified with reference to the type table for the second special figure (FIG. 13(b)). The processing of steps S1203 to S1206 is the same as steps S701 to S707 in the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 23).

In step S1207, the big win information indicating the big win and the type information indicating the big win type drawn in step S1206 are stored in the register of the MPU312.

After the execution of step S1207 or when a negative determination is made in step S1204 (when it is not a jackpot winning), in step S1208, the reservation information acquired based on the current winning to the first operation opening 62 or the second operation opening 63 Grasp the value of the included variation type counter CS. In step S1209, a variation pattern (variation display time) is selected by lottery using the value of the variation type counter CS grasped in step S1208. At this time, if the acquired hold information corresponds to the jackpot, refer to the fluctuation display time table for the jackpot (FIG. 14(a)), and if the acquired hold information corresponds to the loss , with reference to the fluctuation display time table for failure (FIG. 14(b)), to identify the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. The processing of this step is the same as that of steps S801 to S804 in the variable display time setting processing.

In step S1210, the variation pattern information indicating the variation pattern drawn in step S1209 is stored in the register of MPU312. In step S1211, a pending command is set as an object to be output to the effect control device 143, and then the pending prefetching process is terminated. In the hold command, in addition to information indicating whether the hold information this time corresponds to the first special figure or the second special figure, various information stored in the register (starting hold storage number RaN, RbN information, common Information of the number of reservations CRN, jackpot information, type information, variation pattern information) is included. In addition, as already explained, since the presence or absence of the big win can be grasped from the variation pattern, the pending command may be set so as not to include the big win information. The hold command set at step S1211 is transmitted to the effect control device 143 at step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20).

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the production control device 143 and the display control device 350>
The electrical configuration of the effect control device 143 and the display control device 350 will be described below with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

An MPU 342 is mounted on a performance control board 341 provided in the performance control device 143 . The MPU 342 includes a ROM 343 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 342, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 343. A RAM 344, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. are incorporated.

The MPU 342 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 342 . From the main control unit 162, commands for holding display control such as a shift command and a holding command, game round control commands such as a variation start command, a type command and a variation end command, commands for opening and closing execution modes such as an opening command and an ending command, etc. Receives various commands.

The output side of the MPU 342 is connected to the lamp units 26 to 28 and the speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14, as well as the display control device 350, as already described.

Also, the input side of the MPU 342 is connected to the performance operating section 36 provided on the front door frame 14 . A detection sensor that detects an operation of the production operation unit 36 is provided in the production operation unit 36, and detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensor is input. Based on the detection information, the MPU 342 determines whether or not the effect operation unit 36 has been operated, and determines the operation mode of what kind of operation has been performed.

The display control device 350 includes a display control board 351 on which an MPU 372, in which a program ROM 373 and a work RAM 374 are combined and chipped, a video display processor (VDP) 375, a character ROM 376, and a video RAM 377, respectively. there is

The MPU 372 analyzes the command received from the effect control device 143 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command to control the VDP 375 (specifically, to generate an internal command for the VDP 375).

The program ROM 373 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 372 and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for background images.

The work RAM 374 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 372 executes various programs. These work data and flags are stored in each area of the work RAM 374 .

The VDP 375 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 75 . Since the VDP 375 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 375 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 372 and the video RAM 377 to intervene in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 376 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 75 . The character ROM 376 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 376 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 376 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 376 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 373 .

The video RAM 377 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 75. By rewriting the content of the video RAM 377, the display content of the pattern display device 75 is changed.

<Regarding various processes executed by the production control device 143>
Next, each control process performed by MPU342 of the production|presentation control apparatus 143 is demonstrated.

<Production setting processing>
The effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The effect setting process is a process started by the MPU 342 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 2 msec).

First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not a hold command from main controller 162 has been received. A pending command received from the main control device 162 is stored in a command storage area 344 a provided in the RAM 344 of the effect control device 143 . The command storage area 344a is configured as a ring buffer that can individually store a plurality of commands and can read out from previously stored commands. Therefore, even when a plurality of commands are received at the same time, the processing corresponding to each command can be executed satisfactorily.

At the time of determination in step S1301, it is determined whether or not a pending command is stored in the current read target area in the command storage area 344a. When a hold command is stored (when a hold command is received), in step S1302, a display for displaying a hold image on the hold display section 200 (FIG. 9B) of the display screen G is performed. Execute pending command processing. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later.

After execution of step S1302 or when a negative determination is made in step S1301 (when a hold command has not been received), it is determined in step S1303 whether or not a shift command from main controller 162 has been received. If the shift command has been received, in step S1304, shift command processing for shifting the hold image displayed on the hold display unit 200 is executed. The details of the shift command handling process will be described later.

After execution of step S1304 or when a negative determination is made in step S1303 (when no shift time command is received), in step S1305, the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 changes the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, etc. To perform special figure fluctuation display processing. The details of the processing for special figure fluctuation display will be described later.

In step S1306, processing for the opening/closing execution mode is executed for effecting during the opening/closing execution mode. In the processing for the opening/closing execution mode, in addition to the round performance during the opening/closing execution mode, the processing for performing the opening performance, the ending performance, and the winning performance when the variable winning device 65 wins a prize is executed.

In step S1307, a production mode switching process for switching the production mode is executed. Details of the effect mode switching process will be described later.

In step S1308, other processing is executed, and then the effect setting processing is terminated. Other processes include displaying a demonstration screen when no starting winnings occur for a predetermined period of time, and switching to a power saving mode for reducing power consumption by stopping image display on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. Execute the process to do.

<Processing for pending command>
The command handling processing in step S1302 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1401, the pending command from the main controller 162 is analyzed, and pending information (jackpot information, type information, variation pattern information, etc.) is stored in the pending storage area 344c of the RAM344.

As shown in FIG. 32, the reservation storage area 344c is provided with a first special figure reservation area SRa and a second special figure reservation area SRb corresponding to the reservation ball storage area 314b on the main controller 162 side. It is Each reserved area SRa, SRb has four storage areas: a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area. Further, in the holding storage area 344c, an execution area SAE is provided corresponding to the execution area AE on the main controller 162 side.

In step S1401, based on the command for reservation, whether the current reservation information corresponds to any of the first special figure and the second special figure, and what number of the reservation information is in the corresponding special figure It grasps and memorize|stores variation pattern information (in addition, big-hit information and classification information, when it is a big-hit) in the corresponding memory area of the memory|storage area 344c for reservation. For example, when the current pending information is the second pending information corresponding to the first special figure, the variation pattern information and the like are stored in the second storage area of the first special figure holding area SRa.

After execution of step S1401, in step S1402, the value of the suspension number counter (start suspension storage number SN) provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344 is incremented by one. The various counter areas 344b are provided with a holding number counter for the first special figure and a holding number counter for the second special figure, and in step S1402, the start holding storage number SN of the corresponding side is updated.

In step S1403, setting processing for a pending advance notice is executed for executing a pending advance notice effect. Here, the pending notice effect will be described with reference to FIG.

In the present embodiment, depending on the display mode of the holding image displayed on the holding display portion 200 of the display screen G, a holding notice effect that informs or suggests the degree of expectation that a big win will occur in the game round corresponding to the holding image is to be carried out. As the display mode of the image for suspension, a normal display mode when the suspension notice effect is not performed and a specific display mode when the suspension notice effect is performed are set, and a plurality of displays are set in the specific display mode. mode is set.

In the present embodiment, the degree of expectation is suggested by the display color (color) of the holding image. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33A, a normal display mode HMa in which the main display color is a normal color (for example, white) is set as a normal display mode, and a main display color HMa is set as a specific display mode. blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red red display mode HMd, and rainbow color display mode HMe. . In addition, in FIG. 33(a), different hatching is given according to the difference in display color.

Among the specific display modes, the blue display mode HMb has the lowest expectation for a big win, and thereafter, the expectations for a big win increase in the order of the green display mode HMc<red display mode HMd<rainbow color display mode HMe. The rainbow display mode HMe suggests a big win.

In addition, each specific display mode also suggests an effect to be executed in the game turn corresponding to the holding image. Specifically, the blue display mode HMb indicates that a ready-to-win effect (either normal ready-to-win effect, SP ready-to-win effect or SPSP ready-to-win effect) will be performed in the game turn corresponding to the holding image. On the other hand, the green display mode HMc suggests that a ready-to-win effect with an order higher than the SP ready-to-win effect is performed, and the red display mode HMd suggests that an SPSP ready-to-win effect is performed.

The suspension notice effect using the suspension image is a period from the start of the display of the suspension image to be displayed to the end of the display of the suspension image, in other words, the game cycle of the suspension information is completed from the generation of the suspension information. at least part of the period up to The execution timing of the suspension notice effect in the period (suspension period) in which the suspension image is displayed in the first suspension display area Ga or the second suspension display area Gb is a plurality of times such as when the suspension image starts to be displayed and when the shift is performed. timing is set. Further, as shown in FIG. 33(b), a plurality of holding change points are set for the execution timing of the holding notice effect during execution of the game round. Each hold change point is set according to, for example, the start timing of a game turn (fluctuation start timing), the start timing of various ready-to-win effects, the development timing of ready-to-win effects, and the like.

Returning to the description of the pending command corresponding process (FIG. 31), in the setting process for the pending notice of step S1403, the execution lottery of whether or not to execute the pending notice effect for the current hold information, and the case of executing the pending notice effect Also, a process of setting the display mode of the holding image is executed. The details of setting processing for holding notice will be described later.

In step S1404, processing for the first execution of the suspension notice for executing the suspension notice effect is executed. In the first execution process of the pending notice, execution control of the pending notice effect is performed based on the setting result of step S1403. The details of the first execution process of the pending notice will be described later.

In step S1405, processing for displaying a pending image on the pending display portion 200 of the display screen G is executed. Specifically, a pending display command is created so that the pending image is additionally displayed in the corresponding unit pending display area in each of the pending display areas Ga and Gb, and is set as an output target to the display control device 350 . The pending display command includes information indicating whether the current pending information corresponds to the first special figure or the second special figure, and information indicating what number of the pending information. After execution of step S1405, the pending command handling process ends.

<Setting processing for hold notice>
The setting processing for holding notice in step S1403 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1501, the pending storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is referenced to grasp the variation pattern (prefetch result) in the pending information of this time. In step S1502, it is determined whether or not the current pending information corresponds to a big hit, based on the fluctuation pattern and the like grasped in step S1501.

If it does not correspond to the jackpot, that is, if the reservation information corresponding to the loss, the process proceeds to step S1503, whether the variation pattern of the reservation information is the variation pattern 1H (variation pattern corresponding to the complete loss) judge. If negative determination is made in step S1503 (variation pattern other than variation pattern 1H) or if affirmative determination is made in step S1502 (if it is reservation information corresponding to the jackpot), the current production mode is grasped in step S1504 do.

Here, the effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, an effect mode A and an effect mode B are set as the effect modes of the game effect executed on the display screen G. FIG. These production modes A and B can be distinguished from the player's point of view. For example, the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 and the background image 401 displayed on the back side of the holding display section 200 are different between the two production modes. It is supposed to

These production modes can be manually switched by the operation of the player. Specifically, during the effective period of mode switching, a predetermined operation is performed on the production operation unit 36 (FIG. 1). It is possible to switch by For example, in a situation where the production mode is the production mode A, when a predetermined operation is performed by the production operation unit 36, the production mode is switched to the production mode B, and in the production mode B, the production operation is performed. When a predetermined operation is performed by the unit 36, the production mode is switched to the production mode A.

In addition, the production mode A and the production mode B have different frequencies of occurrence of the pending advance notice production, and the production frequency of the production mode A is higher than that of the production mode B. there is Although the configuration for differentiating the occurrence frequency of the pending notice effect is not particularly limited, for example, in any of the effect modes, after executing the pending notice effect through the execution lottery, the effect mode B is performed. In , the winning probability of the above-mentioned execution lottery when the hold information corresponds to loss can be made lower than that of the effect mode A.

In this case, in the performance mode B, since the ratio of those corresponding to the prediction of the big win among the pending notice performances to be executed is higher than in the performance mode A, the degree of expectation for the big win is high when the pending notice performance is executed. Become. That is, in the production mode A, the pending advance notice effect is easily executed and the production is made to function as a mode in which it is easy to enjoy, and in the production mode B, although the pending advance notice effect is difficult to be executed, the expected degree of jackpot is high when it is executed. It can function as a high mode.

Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 35, for example, a holding image imitating a game ball is displayed in production mode A, while a holding image imitating a star is displayed in production mode B. For example, the production mode A and the production mode B may have different base images for holding images.

Returning to the description of the setting process for pending notice (FIG. 34), after grasping the current effect mode in step S1504, in step S1505, the corresponding pending notice execution lottery table is selected from the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343. get. A plurality of pending notice execution lottery tables are set corresponding to the presence or absence of a big win and the performance mode. For example, the reservation notice execution lottery table corresponding to the case where the reservation information of this time is a jackpot is set to have a higher winning probability than the reservation notice execution lottery table corresponding to the case of being out. In addition, the holding notice execution lottery table corresponding to the production mode A and corresponding to the case where the current holding information is out is the holding notice execution lottery table corresponding to the production mode B and corresponding to the case where the current holding information is out. Winning probability is set higher than the lottery table.

In step S1506, based on the holding notice execution lottery table acquired in step S1505 and the lottery counter (random value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344, the execution lottery for whether or not to execute the holding notice effect. I do. In step S1507, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S1506 is a winning result.

If the lottery result is execution winning, the process advances to step S1508 to grasp the corresponding pending number. In this step, the holding storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is referred to, and it is grasped which of the first special figure and the second special figure the current reservation information corresponds to, and the number of reservations of the corresponding special figure is grasped. . The number of pending in this case is the number including the current pending information. For example, if the current hold information is stored in the third area of the first special figure reservation area SRa in the hold storage area 344c, the hold information corresponds to the first special figure and the number of reservations is 3. In addition, when the pending information of this time is stored in the first area of the first special figure pending area SRa (if it is the first pending information), when the pending information is stored in the execution area SAE 1 is grasped as the number of reservations (when the game is being executed), and 0 is grasped as the number of reservations when the reservation information is not stored in the execution area SAE (when the game is not being executed). do.

In step S1509, the final display mode lottery table is obtained from the table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. FIG. In the present embodiment, in addition to performing the suspension notice effect by changing the display mode of the suspension image only once, the suspension notice effect may be performed by changing the display mode of the suspension image a plurality of times. It is configured. The final display mode lottery table is a table for lottery for the final display mode of the suspension image in the suspension notice effect.

In the final display mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 36, the range of selectable final display modes and the selection probability of each display mode are set in association with each variation pattern. Incidentally, in FIG. 36, the item of "remarks (effect mode)" indicating game round effects corresponding to each variation pattern is added for convenience and is not set in the final display mode lottery table.

Also, in the final display mode lottery table, a final display mode lottery table for big hits (FIG. 36(a)) and a final display mode lottery table for wins (FIG. 36(b)) are set. In the lottery table, the selection range of the final display mode and the selection probability of each option are different according to each variation pattern.

In the final display mode lottery table for big hits, as the range of the final display mode of the image for suspension in the suspension notice effect, if the current suspension information is the variation pattern 1A (normal reach), the blue display mode HMb and the rainbow color display mode HMe , In the case of variation pattern 2A (per SP reach A) or variation pattern 3A (per SP reach B), blue display mode HMb and green display mode HMc and rainbow color display mode HMe, variation pattern 4A (per SPSP reach A) or variation In the case of pattern 5A (per SPSP reach B), blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, and rainbow color display mode HMe are set. Therefore, when the holding image of the blue display mode HMb is displayed as the holding notice effect, the game round corresponding to the holding image (the game round of the holding information that triggered the holding notice effect) is more than the normal reach production. Suggesting that the ready-to-reach effect of rank will be performed, and when the image for holding in the green display mode HMc is displayed, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of rank higher than the SP ready-to-win effect will be performed, and to hold the image in the red display mode HMd. When the image is displayed, it suggests that the SPSP ready-to-win effect will be performed.

In addition, even in the final display mode lottery table for losing, when the holding image of the blue display mode HMb is displayed as the holding notice effect, the ready-to-win effect of the order higher than the normal ready-to-win effect is displayed in the game turn corresponding to the holding image. When the holding image of the green display mode HMc is displayed, it suggests that the ready-to-win effect of the order higher than the SP ready-to-win effect will be performed, and the holding image of the red display mode HMd is displayed. A selection range of the final display mode corresponding to each variation pattern is defined so as to suggest that the SPSP ready-to-win effect is performed in the case. Therefore, when the suspension notice performance is performed and any one of blue, green or red suspension images is displayed, the player can predict which level of ready-to-win performance will be performed. However, the presence or absence of a big hit cannot be determined.

In the final display mode lottery table for winning, the rainbow color display mode HMe is not set as an option for the final display mode, and the holding image in the rainbow color display mode HMe is displayed only when the jackpot is won. It has become. Therefore, the holding image in the rainbow color display mode HMe suggests a big win, and when the holding image is displayed, the player can expect a big win in the game round to which the holding image corresponds. can be predicted.

The selection probability of the rainbow display mode HMe in the final display mode lottery table for the big win is suppressed to a small probability (for example, 5%) in any variation pattern. This is because if the selection probability of the rainbow color display mode HMe is increased, chances for the player to recognize the big win before the execution of the game round will occur frequently, and there is a concern that the player will lose interest in the game round effect. This is to suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience. As for the selection probabilities of the other options, the higher display modes are more likely to be selected than the lower display modes in each variation pattern. For example, in the case of the variation pattern 3A, the green display mode HMc is more likely to be selected than the blue display mode HMb.

On the other hand, in the final display mode lottery table for winning, it is more difficult to select a higher display mode than in the case of the final display mode lottery table for big wins. For example, in the variation pattern (variation pattern 4A) corresponding to the SPSP reach A effect in the final display mode lottery table for the big win, the probability of selecting the red display mode HMd is 55%, whereas the final display mode lottery for the win is 55%. In the variation pattern (variation pattern 5H) corresponding to the SPSP reach B effect on the table, the selection probability of the red display mode HMd remains at 10%.

In each final display mode lottery table for big hits and for wins, the selection tendency of the display mode is set as described above. The degree of expectation for a big win is higher when a high-ranking display mode is displayed as the holding image corresponding to the times.

In the present embodiment, the final display mode lottery table for the big win and the final display mode lottery table for the win are used in both the production mode A and the production mode B, but different tables are used in each production mode. It is good also as a structure which sets.

Returning to the setting process for pending notice (FIG. 34), in step S1509, a final display mode lottery table corresponding to the presence or absence of a big hit in the pending information is acquired based on the variation pattern or the like grasped in step S1501. In step S1510, based on the variation pattern grasped in step S1501, the final display mode lottery table acquired in step S1509, and the lottery counter (random value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344, the current hold A lottery is drawn for the final display mode in the advance notice performance.

The lottery counter is acquired when a hold command is received from the main controller 162, in other words, when hold information to be a lottery process target is generated. This is the same for the counter (random number value) used for other lottery processing executed by the effect control device 143 .

At step S1511, the effect scenario lottery table is obtained from the table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. FIG. The effect scenario lottery table is a table for lottery for the effect scenario of the pending advance notice effect.

In the effect scenario lottery table, as shown in FIG. 37, a plurality of effect scenarios are set in association with the number of pending events and the final display mode of the pending advance notice effect. Specifically, groups are set from a group of production scenario 0 corresponding to the number of reservations = 0 to a group of production scenarios 4 corresponding to the number of reservations = 4, and further, in each group, the final display mode of blue, green, red and rainbow colors A production scenario group for each color is set corresponding to . A lottery random number value of 0 to 99 is assigned to a set of production scenarios for one color. For example, when the number of reservations is 0 and the final display mode is the blue display mode HMb, production scenario 0 blue (1) and production scenario 0 blue (2) are selected as production scenarios. A corresponding random value is selected.

Each effect scenario defines at what timing and in what display mode the suspension image is to be displayed in the suspension notice effect for which the final display mode has been determined. When the reservation information corresponding to the first special figure is read ahead, the number of reservations of the first special figure at that time is 4, and the red display mode HMd is selected as the final display mode. Taking production scenario 4 red (1) as an example, this scenario displays a suspension image in a blue display mode HMb in the fourth unit suspension display area Ga4 of the first suspension display area Ga (FIG. 9(b)). After that, when the suspension image is moved and displayed in the second unit suspension display area Ga2, it is changed to the green display mode HMc, and thereafter, the period during which the suspension image is displayed in the execution display area D (the suspension (during execution of the game round corresponding to the image), the display mode is changed to the red display mode HMd.

Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 37, in the production scenario that determines that the display mode of the holding image is changed in the execution display area D, at which timing (which holding change point) in the game round the display mode is changed It also stipulates whether There is also an effect scenario in which the display mode is changed multiple times during the execution of the game round. After changing from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb, it is defined that the display mode is further changed to the green display mode HMc at a subsequent hold change point.

In addition, "G4 (holding 4)" to "G1 (holding 1)" in the "remarks (effect mode)" in FIG. It shows the mode. In addition, "D (during game play)" is a display mode when the holding image is shifted from the first unit holding display area to the execution display area D, and the holding image is displayed in the execution display area D. It shows a display mode in terms of period. Incidentally, the items in the "remarks (effect mode)" column are added for convenience and are not set in the effect scenario lottery table.

Also, as the production scenario lottery tables, a production scenario lottery table for big wins and a production scenario lottery table for losses are set. In the present embodiment, a common table is used for the performance mode A and the performance mode B as the performance scenario lottery table for the big win and the performance scenario lottery table for the loss. good too. It should be noted that FIG. 37 shows an example of an effect scenario lottery table for a big win.

Returning to the setting process for pending notice (FIG. 34), in step S1511, based on the fluctuation pattern or the like grasped in step S1501, an effect scenario lottery table corresponding to the presence or absence of a big hit in the pending information is acquired. In step S1512, the number of reservations grasped in step S1508, the final display mode determined in step S1510, the effect scenario lottery table acquired in step S1511, and the lottery counter (random value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344 ), a production scenario for this pending notice production is drawn.

At step S1513, the effect scenario data is set so that the effect scenario selected at step S1512 is executed. In step S1514, a hold notice flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344, and then the hold notice setting process is terminated. The suspension notice flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp that the suspension notice effect should be executed.

Also, if the affirmative determination is made in step S1503 (if the variation pattern of the hold information is the variation pattern 1H (completely out)) or if the negative determination is made in step S1507 (if it is lost in the execution lottery of the hold notice effect) , the process advances to step S1515 to set the display mode of the holding image to the normal display mode HMa. After that, the holding notice setting process is terminated.

<Processing for first execution of pending notice>
The first execution processing of the suspension notice in step S1404 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38(a).

First, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not a suspension notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. FIG. If the suspension notice flag is not stored, that is, if the situation is not such that the suspension notice effect should be executed, the first execution process of the suspension notice is terminated.

On the other hand, if the pending notice flag is stored and the situation is such that the pending notice effect should be executed, the process proceeds to step S1602, and the holding notice image corresponding to the hold information that triggered the pending notice effect is displayed in the display mode. It is determined whether or not it is time to change. That is, it is determined whether or not the holding image should be displayed in the specific display mode from the beginning. In this step, the above determination is made with reference to the setting result of the effect scenario of the pending advance notice effect set in step S1513 (FIG. 34). If it is not the time to change the display mode, the first execution process of the pending notice is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is time to change the display mode, an execution lottery is performed in step S1603 to determine whether or not to execute the change suggesting effect. The change-suggesting effect is a effect suggesting that the display mode of the holding image changes (ranks up). Although the mode of the change suggesting effect is not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the change suggesting effect is performed in the mode shown in FIG. First, as shown in FIG. 39A, a predetermined character image 402 is displayed near the suspension display section 200 at a predetermined timing before the suspension image changes. When the change suggesting effect is performed in accordance with the generation timing of the suspension information, the suspension image is first displayed in the normal display mode, and the character image 402 is displayed immediately after or at the same time. Thereafter, an image of the character performing a predetermined action is displayed, and as shown in FIG. Note that the character image 402 is erased after the display mode of the holding image is changed.

In step S1603, the execution lottery of the change suggestion effect is executed based on the lottery counter (random number) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344 and the execution lottery table stored in the table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. . In step S1604, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S1603 is a winning result. When the lottery result is a winning result, in step S1605, the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 is set to execute a change suggesting effect. Specifically, a command to execute a change suggesting effect is set as an output target to the display control device 350 .

In the present embodiment, the change suggestion effect can be executed only when the display mode of the holding image is changed, but the change suggestion effect is also executed when the display mode of the holding image is not changed. It is good also as a structure which can be carried out. That is, even when the display mode of the holding image is not changed, the lottery for execution of the change suggesting effect may be performed.

In such a case, the change-suggestion effect may be, for example, after a predetermined character image 402 is displayed as shown in FIG. After that, the character image 402 may be erased without changing the display mode of the holding image, and the display mode before displaying the character image 402 may be maintained. However, if such a false effect occurs frequently, the player may lose his sense of expectation for the change suggestive effect, so the execution frequency should be kept low. Specifically, the execution winning probability of the change suggestion effect when the display mode is not changed is lower than when the display mode is changed, in other words, when the character image 402 is displayed, the display mode of the holding image. It is preferable that the frequency of no change in is lower than the frequency of change.

After the execution of step S1605 or when a negative determination is made in step S1604 (when the execution lottery of the change suggestion effect is not won), the process proceeds to step S1606, and the change destination in the current change process based on the setting result of the effect scenario. Understand the display mode of Specifically, it is determined in which specific display mode the holding image is to be displayed, out of the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, the red display mode HMd, and the rainbow display mode HMe.

In step S1607, the display mode of the holding image is set to be changed to the display mode grasped in step S1606. If this process is performed when a hold command is received (when a hold image is additionally displayed), the initial display form of the hold image to be additionally displayed is set to the display form grasped in step S1606.

At that time, if the change-suggesting effect is not executed, the holding image is set to be displayed in one of the specific display modes indicated by the effect scenario from the beginning. On the other hand, when the change-suggesting effect is executed, the normal display mode HMa is displayed, and then the display mode is changed to the specific display mode indicated by the effect scenario. When the setting process in step S1607 is executed, in step S1405 of the pending command handling process (FIG. 31), the command is sent to the display control device 350 so that the display mode information set in step S1607 is included in the pending display command. set.

In step S1608, information indicating the display mode of the image for holding this time is stored in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344. FIG. As shown in FIG. 38(b), in the display mode storage area 344e, an area is provided corresponding to each hold information (holding image) of each special figure and the hold information during execution of the game round, It is possible to store the display mode of the holding image in each area. For example, when displaying the blue display mode HMb in the second unit reserved display area Ga2 of the first reserved display area Ga, the second area for the first special figure in the display mode storage area 344e (corresponding to the second reserved information area) to be displayed in the blue display mode HMb. By the way, when executing the change suggesting effect, information indicating the display mode (display color) after the change is stored. It should be noted that the display mode information may be stored in the corresponding area of the reservation storage area 344c without providing the display mode storage area 344e. After step S1608 is executed, the first execution process of the pending notice is terminated.

<Processing for command during shift>
The shift command handling process in step S1304 (FIG. 30) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40(a).

First, in step S1701, the first execution process of the suspension notice is executed. This process is for changing the display mode of the holding image of the holding information that triggered the holding notice effect when the holding image is shifted. The processing of this step is basically the same as the first execution processing (FIG. 38A) of the suspension notice in step S1404 (FIG. 31).

Referring to FIG. 38(a), in the first execution process of the suspension notice in step S1701, the suspension notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344, and the situation in which the suspension notice effect should be executed. , in step S1602, the current shift timing for the holding image (holding image displayed in each holding display area Ga, Gb) corresponding to the holding information that triggered the holding notice effect It is determined whether or not it is time to change the display mode (display color). This determination is made based on the setting result of the effect scenario of the pending advance notice effect set in step S1513 (FIG. 34).

When it is time to change the display mode, an execution lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to execute the change suggesting effect in step S1603, and when the lottery is won, the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 is entered in step S1605. Set so that the change suggesting effect is executed at . After the execution of step S1605 or when a negative determination is made in step S1604 (when the execution lottery of the change suggestion effect is not won), the process proceeds to step S1606, and the change destination in the current change process based on the setting result of the effect scenario. Understand the display mode of

In step S1607, the display mode of the holding image is set to be changed to the display mode grasped in step S1606. Specifically, the output command to the display control device 350 includes information indicating which display mode of the holding image is to be changed and information indicating which display mode (display color) is to be changed. In this way, a command is set to change the display mode of the holding image at the current shift timing. As a result, at the current shift timing, the display mode of the holding image is changed to the display mode determined by the setting result of the production scenario.

In step S1608, information on the display mode after the change is stored in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344 with respect to the holding image whose display mode is to be changed. For example, when changing the holding image of the blue display mode HMb displayed in the second unit reserved display area Ga2 of the first reserved display area Ga to the green display mode HMc when shifting to the first unit reserved display area Ga1 , After erasing the blue display information stored in the second area for the first special figure (area corresponding to the second hold information) in the display mode storage area 344e, store the green display information in the same area do.

Returning to the description of the shift time command handling process (FIG. 40), after the process of step S1701 is executed, the process for execution of the second suspension notice is executed in step S1702. Since this processing is related to the effect mode switching processing in step S1307 (FIG. 30), it will be described in detail after the switching processing is described.

In step S1703, the value of the suspension number counter (start suspension storage number SN) provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344 is decremented by one. The various counter areas 344b are provided with a reservation number counter for the first special figure and a reservation number counter for the second special figure, and in this step, the start reservation storage number SN on the corresponding side is updated.

In step S1704, shift processing for moving and displaying the hold image is executed, and then this shift command handling processing ends. In the shift process, the pending information stored in the first area of the pending storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is moved to the execution area SAE, and the pending information stored in the second to fourth areas is sequentially shifted to the lower area side. shift. At this time, the display mode information stored in each area of the display mode storage area 344e is also sequentially shifted to the lower area side.

Further, in the shift process, the display control device 350 is controlled to change the display position of the suspension image in the suspension display portion 200 of the display screen G to the unit suspension display area on the lower side. As the state before the control, for example, as shown in FIG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 40(b2), the display positions of the suspension images are changed to the execution display area D and the first unit suspension display area Ga1 by the control. It should be noted that if the display mode of the suspension image is changed in the first execution process of the suspension notice in step S1701, the display position and the display mode are changed together.

<Special figure fluctuation display processing>
The processing for special figure variation display in step S1305 (FIG. 30) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not a game round is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the game cycle of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being executed. If none of the game rounds are being executed, the process proceeds to step S1802 to determine whether or not a variation start command transmitted from the main controller 162 has been received. The variation start command includes information on the variation pattern drawn in the variation display time setting process (FIG. 24) in main controller 162 .

By referring to the information of this variation pattern, it is possible to grasp at which variation display time the special figure game round in the special figure display unit 43 whose display is controlled by the main controller 162 is performed. In addition, as already explained, since the variation pattern for the big win and the variation pattern for the loss are set separately, it is possible to determine the result of the win/loss determination from the variation pattern.

When the fluctuation start command is not received, the processing for special figure fluctuation display is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the fluctuation start command is received, the process proceeds to step S1803, the fluctuation start processing for starting the effect for the game round is executed, and then the special figure fluctuation display processing is ended.

In the fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command from the main controller 162 is analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern regarding the special figure game round of this time is specified. Furthermore, based on the specified variation pattern, the variation display time in the special figure game round of this time is grasped. Various table storage area 343a of ROM 343 stores an effect pattern table in which a variable display time is set in association with each variation pattern. The variable display time determined by the effect pattern table corresponds to the variable display time corresponding to each variable pattern (FIG. 14) in the main control device 162, and the effect control device 143 and the main control device 162 have one variation. A common variable display time is assigned to the patterns. For example, when the variation pattern is the variation pattern 1A, the corresponding variation display time is 15 sec for both the effect control device 143 and the main control device 162 . In the process for starting fluctuation, the performance pattern table is referred to, and the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern analyzed from the fluctuation start command is specified, and this is set as the fluctuation display time of the current special figure game round.

Also, in the effect pattern table, effect patterns for game cycle effects are associated with each variation pattern. As each of these effect patterns, the normal reach hit described in the explanation of the variable display time table, the SP reach A hit, the SP reach B hit, the SPSP reach A hit, the SPSP reach B hit, the complete miss, the normal reach miss, and the SP reach A. Out, SP reach B out, SPSP reach A out, and SPSP reach B out are set. Since the correspondence relationship between the variation pattern and the effect pattern has already been described with reference to FIG. 14, the description thereof will be omitted. In the start processing for variation, the performance pattern table is referred to to specify the performance pattern corresponding to the current variation pattern, and this is set as the performance pattern of the special figure game round of this time.

In addition, in the fluctuation start processing, when the result of the success/failure determination regarding the special game round of this time is a jackpot, the jackpot type is specified based on the type command from the main controller 162 . When the jackpot type is the variable probability jackpot, the stop result for the variable probability jackpot is set as the stop result of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75. FIG. Conversely, when the jackpot type is the normal jackpot, the stop result for the normal jackpot is set as the stop result of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In these cases, the effective lines L1 to L5 on which the stop result for the big win is stop-displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In addition, when the result of the success/failure determination regarding this special figure game round is out, each stop symbol of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is determined at random. However, when the effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is to perform the ready-to-win effect, each stop pattern is determined so that the ready-to-win is formed on the effective lines L1 to L5 determined by lottery. That is, a stop result in which a combination of outlier reach symbols is established on one of the effective lines L1 to L5 is set as the current stop result.

In the fluctuation start process, after executing each of the above processes, a command including information on the current stop symbol and information on the effect pattern is set as an output target to the display control device 350 . In the display control device 350, according to the received command, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped by the stop result determined by the effect control device 143, or the game is repeated in the effect pattern determined by the effect control device 143. The pattern display device 75 is controlled so that an effect is performed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1801 (when the game round is being executed), the process advances to step S1804 to determine whether or not a fluctuation end command has been received from the main controller 162 . If the fluctuation end command is not received, it means that the fluctuation display time has not yet elapsed in this special figure game round. In this case, in step S1805, processing for mid-variation is executed. In the mid-variation processing, the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 started by the variation start processing is continued, the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are temporarily stopped in order, and each ready-to-win effect is executed. Execute processing for

In step S1806, it is determined whether or not the special game round of this time is the game round of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect. If it is not the game round of the reservation information that triggered the reservation notice performance, the processing for special figure fluctuation display is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is the game turn of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect, the first execution process of the hold notice is executed in step S1807. This processing is for changing the display mode of the holding image of the holding information that triggered the holding notice effect during the execution of the game round of the holding information. The processing of this step is basically the same as the first execution processing (FIG. 38A) of the suspension notice in step S1404 (FIG. 31).

Referring to FIG. 38(a), in the process for first execution of the suspension notice in step S1807, the suspension notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344, and the situation in which the suspension notice effect should be executed. In the case of , in step S1602, regarding the holding image (holding image displayed in the execution display area D) corresponding to the holding information that triggered the holding notice effect, whether it is the change timing of the display mode determine whether or not This determination is made based on the setting result of the effect scenario of the pending advance notice effect set in step S1513 (FIG. 34).

When it is time to change the display mode, an execution lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to execute the change suggesting effect in step S1603, and when the lottery is won, the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 is entered in step S1605. Set so that the change suggesting effect is executed at . After the execution of step S1605 or when a negative determination is made in step S1604 (when the execution lottery of the change suggestion effect is not won), the process proceeds to step S1606, and the change destination in the current change process based on the setting result of the effect scenario. Understand the display mode of

In step S1607, the display mode of the holding image is set to be changed to the display mode grasped in step S1606. As a result, the display mode of the suspension image is changed to the display mode determined by the setting result of the production scenario at a predetermined suspension change point during the game. In the subsequent step S1608, information on the display mode after the change is stored in the area corresponding to the execution display area D in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344. FIG.

Returning to the description of the special figure fluctuation display processing (FIG. 41), after executing the processing of step S1807, the processing for the third execution of the pending notice is executed in step S1808. Since this processing is related to the effect mode switching processing in step S1307 (FIG. 30), it will be described in detail after the switching processing is described. After the execution of step S1808, the processing for special figure fluctuation display ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1804 (if the variable end command has been received), it means that the variable display time has elapsed. In this case, the process advances to step S1809 to execute a change end process. In the process for ending the fluctuation, the fluctuation display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the effect being executed are terminated (the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are fixed and stopped).

In step S1810, it is determined whether or not the special game round of this time is the game round of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect. If it is not the game round of the reservation information that triggered the reservation notice performance, the processing for special figure fluctuation display is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is the game round of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect, in step S1811, it is determined whether or not the hold notice flag or return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. The details of the standby flag for return will be described later.

If either the hold notice flag or the standby flag for return is stored, the stored flag is erased in step S1812. After execution of step S1812 or when a negative determination is made in step S1811 (when neither the holding notice flag nor the waiting flag for return is stored), the special figure fluctuation display processing is terminated.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to determine whether or not the fluctuation display time has elapsed based on whether or not the fluctuation end command is received from the main control device 162, but in the effect control device 143 at the start of fluctuation Since the variation display time can be grasped from the transmitted variation start command, it may be determined whether or not the variation display time related to the game round being executed has elapsed based on the grasped variation display time. In this case, the main controller 162 may not transmit the fluctuation end command.

<Production mode switching process>
The effect mode switching process of step S1307 (FIG. 30) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The production mode switching process is for switching between the production mode A and the production mode B already described.

First, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not it is during the effective period of effect mode switching. In this embodiment, the period during which the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed in the special game round, or the period during which the opening/closing execution mode is executed is set as an invalid period in which the effect mode cannot be switched. The period is an effective period of effect mode switching, including during execution of the special game round. In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the current timing belongs to the effective period. If it is not during the effective period of the effect mode switching, the process for effect mode switching is terminated as it is.

If it is during the effect mode switching effective period, the process proceeds to step S1902, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined operation for switching the effect mode has been performed in the effect operation unit 36. If the predetermined operation has not been performed, the effect mode switching process is terminated.

If the predetermined operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S1903, and a switching process for switching the effect mode is executed. For example, if the current performance mode is the performance mode A, the performance data is set so as to switch to the performance mode B. In addition, the switching of the production mode may be performed in accordance with the timing at which the predetermined operation is performed, or may be performed in accordance with the timing at which the next special figure game round is started.

In step S1904, the production mode flag corresponding to the production mode after switching is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM344. In this embodiment, a mode A flag and a mode B flag are provided as flags corresponding to the production mode A and the production mode B, respectively. For example, when switching the production mode from the production mode A to the production mode B, the above various The mode A flag stored in the flag storage area 344d is erased, and the mode B flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d.

In step S1905, it is determined whether or not a return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. The standby flag for return will be described later.

If the standby flag for return is not stored, the process advances to step S1906 to determine whether or not the suspension notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. When the reservation notice flag is not stored, the effect mode switching process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the suspension notice flag is stored, that is, if the suspension notice effect is being executed or is in a standby state, the process proceeds to step S1907, and the suspension notice flag is erased. As a result, when the suspension notice effect has been executed before the mode switching, the continuation of the suspension notice effect is cancelled. Further, in the case of the standby state of the pending notice effect, the execution of the pending notice effect is canceled.

In step S1908, it is determined whether or not a suspension notice effect is being executed, that is, whether or not there is a suspension image displayed in a specific display mode. Specifically, among the holding images displayed in the holding display areas Ga and Gb, the Determines whether the displayed item exists. This determination is made by referring to the information of each area stored in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344. FIG. If there is no holding image displayed in the specific display mode, the effect mode switching process is terminated.

On the other hand, if there is an image for suspension displayed in the specific display mode (when the suspension notice effect is being executed), the process proceeds to step S1909, and any mode for the image for suspension that is displayed in the specific display mode is stored in the return area 344 f of the RAM 344 . In the return area 344f, areas are set corresponding to the holding display areas Ga1 to Ga4, Gb1 to Gb4 and the execution display area D of each special figure, and the display mode of the holding image can be stored in each area. It is possible.

In step S1909, the display mode information stored in the display mode storage area 344e at that time is also stored in the return area 344f. Therefore, at the time of processing in step S1909, the same information is stored in the display mode storage area 344e and the return area 344f.

The information on the display mode may be identification information indicating the display mode, or may be identification information indicating the display color. In short, it is sufficient if the display mode of the holding image can be specified from the information stored in the return area 344f, and it is sufficient if it corresponds to the display mode of the holding image.

With the above processing, by referring to the return area 344f after switching the production mode, it is possible to grasp which holding image was displayed in which display mode before switching the production mode. Note that when the shift processing in step S1704 in the shift-time command handling process (FIG. 40) is executed in a state in which display mode information is stored in the return area 344f, not only the display mode storage area 344e but also the return The display mode information stored in each area of the area 344f is also sequentially shifted to the lower area side.

In step S1910, processing for canceling the display in the specific display mode is executed for the holding image displayed in the specific display mode. That is, setting is made such that the holding image displayed in the specific display mode is switched to the normal display mode HMa as the effect mode is switched. The switching to the normal display mode HMa is performed in accordance with the switching timing of the presentation mode. For example, if the production mode is switched at the timing when the predetermined operation is performed, the holding image is switched to the normal display mode HMa at that timing, and if the production mode is switched at the start timing of the next special figure game round, that Setting is made so that the holding image is switched to the normal display mode HMa at the timing.

Further, in the canceling process of step S1910, the process of clearing the display mode information stored in the display mode storage area 344e is executed. Therefore, at the time of processing in step S1910, the display mode information is stored only in the return area 344f. Furthermore, in the canceling process of step S1910, a process of deleting the effect scenario data set in step S1513 of the setting process for pending notice (FIG. 34) is also executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the effect mode is switched, the acquired suspension information, in other words, the execution lottery of the suspension notice effect (the setting process for the suspension notice of FIG. 34) has already been performed. Regarding the pending information, it is configured to restrict the execution lottery for the second time. Specifically, the execution lottery for the pending notice effect is not performed again, and the execution lottery is not performed redundantly before and after switching the effect mode for the same pending information (holding image). there is

In step S1911, a return standby flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d. In the present embodiment, after switching the effect mode, when the original effect mode is switched again, the display mode of the holding image is configured to return to the specific display mode. The return standby flag is a flag indicating that the return processing is in a waiting state. After execution of step S1911, the production mode switching process is terminated.

If the determination in step S1905 is affirmative (if the standby flag for recovery is stored), the process advances to step S1912 to execute processing for erasing the standby flag for recovery. Here, the situation where the affirmative determination is made in step S1905 means that the first production mode switching is performed in the situation where the pending notice production is being executed, and then the mode switching operation is performed again, resulting in the original production mode. It means that the situation has returned to For example, the production mode is switched from the production mode A to the production mode B in a situation where any one of the holding images is displayed in the specific display mode, and then switched to the production mode A again. At that time, in the previous mode switching (switching from the production mode A to the production mode B), the display mode of the holding image is set to the normal display mode HMa and the holding notice production is canceled, so the production mode A The suspension image displayed in the specific display mode in 2 continues to be displayed in the normal display mode HMa during the stay in the effect mode B.

After switching to the production mode B and before switching to the production mode A, the game round of the holding image (holding information) may end. In this case, since the standby flag for return is erased in step S1811 and step S1812 of the special figure fluctuation display process (FIG. 41), a negative determination is made in step S1905.

After step S1912 is executed, in step S1913, setting processing for advance notice return is executed for returning the display mode of the holding image to the specific display mode. After that, the production mode switching process is terminated.

<About changing the display mode of the hold image by switching the production mode>
As already described, in the present embodiment, in a situation where the image for suspension is displayed in the specific display mode, when the effect mode is switched, the display mode of the image for suspension is changed to the normal display mode HMa. , the suspension notice effect is canceled. In this case, by switching the display state of not only the background image 401 but also the pending display portion 200, it is possible for the player to easily understand the change of the presentation mode.

In addition, if the switching of the production mode is limited to a simple change of the display image, it is difficult to impress the player with the difference between the modes. , the difference in production mode can be emphasized. However, in a configuration in which the execution frequency of the pending notice effect differs between modes, even if the display mode of the holding image in which the pending notice effect is performed is the same, the degree of expectation for the big win suggested by the display mode is the effect mode. may differ depending on the type of For this reason, if the display mode before mode switching is maintained even after mode switching, the expectation degree corresponding to the performance mode after switching will appear even though the actual expectation level of the pending information corresponds to the performance mode before switching. is displayed as if to suggest, there is a concern that the degree of expectation suggested by the pending advance notice effect and the actual degree of expectation may be inconsistent. In this respect, by changing the display mode of the holding image to the normal display mode HMa in accordance with the switching of the presentation mode, such inconsistency in expectations can be preferably avoided.

In this way, by canceling the execution of the pending notice effect according to the switching of the effect mode, it is possible to make the change of the effect mode easy to understand and to avoid the inconsistency of expectations suggested by the pending notice effect. However, on the other hand, some players may misunderstand that the cancellation of the pending notice effect has caused the chance suggested by the pending notice effect to disappear, leading to disappointment.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, setting processing for the return of notice in step S1913, processing for second execution of pending notice in step S1702, and processing for third execution of pending notice in step S1808 are provided, and after switching the production mode, It is configured to restore the display mode of the holding image when the original effect mode is restored by switching again. The processing of each of the above steps will be described in detail below.

<Setting processing for advance notice return>
The setting processing for advance notice return in step S1913 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2101, the display status of the suspension images displayed in the suspension display areas Ga and Gb and the execution display area D is grasped before the specific display mode is canceled and the normal display mode HMa is displayed. For example, the fourth holding image for the first special figure (holding image of the fourth unit holding display area Ga4) is displayed in the blue display mode HMb production mode from production mode A to production mode B When the mode is switched and then switched to the effect mode A again, it is understood that the holding image was displayed in the blue display mode HMb.

At that time, after switching from the production mode A to the production mode B, when the digestion of the game round progresses and the holding image is shifted to the lower area side, it is displayed in the fourth unit holding display area Ga4 at the time of mode switching. It is understood that the on-hold image corresponding to the on-hold image was displayed in the blue display mode HMb before the cancellation process. For example, if two game rounds have been completed after switching to the production mode B, the holding image displayed in the second unit holding display area Ga2 is displayed in a blue display mode HMb at the time of mode switching. I understand that. This understanding is performed by referring to the recovery area 344f of the RAM 344. FIG.

In step S2102, it is determined whether or not the game round of the holding image (target holding image) displayed in the specific display mode is being executed. That is, after switching from the production mode A to the production mode B, it is determined whether or not the game round has been completed and the game has progressed to the game round of the target holding image. If the game round is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S2103, and the number of pending information (holding number) before the target holding image is grasped. For example, when the target suspension image is the third suspension information, two are grasped as the number of suspensions before that. It should be noted that the reservation information during execution of the game cycle is not included in the number of reservations. In addition, grasping the number of pending is performed separately for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In step S2104, it is determined whether or not the number of pending items ascertained in step S2103 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, one). If the number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the process advances to step S2105 to execute a recovery scenario lottery process. The return scenario determines at which shift timing the target hold image is returned to the original specific display mode.

Various table storage area 343a of ROM 343 stores a recovery scenario table that defines at what timing the display mode of the image for suspension is to be restored in correspondence with the number of suspensions and the original specific display mode. there is In the return scenario table, for example, corresponding to the case where the number of pending items is 2, as the return timing of the display mode, the first shift (shift to the second unit pending display area Ga2) and the second shift ( When shifting to the first unit reserved display area Ga1) and when shifting to the third time (when shifting to the execution display area D) can be selected.

Further, in the return scenario table, when the original display mode is a specific display mode higher than the blue display mode HMb, whether to directly return from the normal display mode HMa to the original specific display mode or to return to the original specific display mode in stages. It is also possible to select whether to return to Therefore, in some cases, the specific display mode before cancellation is restored by one reserved change display, and in other cases, the specific display form before cancellation is restored after several times of reserved change displays.

In step S2105, based on the return scenario table and lottery counters (random numbers) acquired from the respective counter areas 344b of the RAM 344, the return timing and return mode of the display mode of the hold image are selected.

After execution of step S2105 or when a negative determination is made in step S2104 (when the number of pending items is less than 1), a return scenario setting process is performed in step S2106. If the recovery scenario lottery process is performed in step S2105, the display mode of the holding image is set to be restored in the lottery recovery scenario. It is set so that the display mode of the holding image is restored when shifting to the area D.

After execution of step S2106 or when an affirmative determination is made in step S2102 (when the game round of the target holding image is being executed), the notice return flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344 in step S2107. The notice return flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp that the process for restoring the display mode of the holding image should be executed. After execution of step S2107, the setting process for the advance notice return is ended.

<Processing for second execution of pending notice>
The second execution processing of the suspension notice in step S1702 (FIG. 40(a)) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is performed as a part of the shift-time command handling process, in other words, the process is performed at the shift timing of the hold image.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the advance notice return flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. FIG. If the advance notice return flag is not stored, the processing for the second execution of the pending notice is terminated.

If the advance notice return flag is stored, the process advances to step S2202 to grasp the return scenario set in step S2106 in the setting process for advance notice return. In step S2203, it is determined whether or not the current shift timing is the return timing of the display mode of the target hold image, based on the setting result of the return scenario grasped in step S2202. If it is not the return timing, the process for the second execution of the suspension notice is terminated.

If it is time to return, the process advances to step S2204 to grasp the display mode after the change based on the setting result of the return scenario. For example, when the display mode before the cancellation of the target holding image is the green display mode HMc, when the display mode determined by the return scenario is the green display mode HMc, the green display mode HMc as the display mode after the change Grasp. Further, when the display mode determined by the return scenario is the blue display mode HMb, which is the previous stage to the green display mode HMc, the blue display mode HMb is grasped as the display mode after the change.

In step S2205, the display mode of the target holding image is set to be changed to the display mode grasped in step S2204. Specifically, as an output command to the display control device 350, include information indicating a holding image whose display mode is to be changed and information indicating which display mode (display color) to change to, A command is set to indicate that the display mode of the holding image should be changed at this shift timing. After step S2205 is executed, the second execution process of the pending notice is terminated.

<Process for third execution of pending notice>
The third execution process of the suspension notice in step S1808 (FIG. 41) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is performed as part of the special figure fluctuation display process, in other words, it is a process performed during execution of the game round.

First, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the advance notice return flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344 or not. If the advance notice return flag is not stored, the processing for the third execution of the pending notice is terminated.

If the advance notice return flag is stored, the process advances to step S2302 to determine whether or not the promotion flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. The promotion flag will be described later.

If the promotion flag is not stored, the process advances to step S2303 to determine whether or not the current display mode in the target holding image is the normal display mode HMa. It should be noted that the case where the current display mode of the target suspension image is the normal display mode HMa is when the switching operation to the original effect mode is performed during execution of the game round of the target suspension image.

If the current display mode is the normal display mode HMa, the process advances to step S2304 to determine whether or not pending change points remain in the ongoing game round. For example, if the effect mode is changed at the end of the game round of the target hold image, in the case where the hold change point does not remain, the process proceeds to step S2314 and is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. Clear the advance notice return flag. As a result, the return processing of the suspension notice effect is canceled, and the target suspension image (the suspension image displayed in the execution display area D) continues to be displayed in the normal display mode HMa in the game cycle.

If the hold change point remains, in step S2305, the return area 344f of the RAM 344 is referred to grasp the specific display mode before release in the target hold image, and this is grasped as the change destination display mode. do. In step S2306, the display mode of the holding image is set to be changed to the display mode grasped in step S2305. Specifically, as an output command to the display control device 350, a command is set to change the display mode of the holding image so as to include information indicating which display mode (display color) is to be changed. do. As a result, the display mode of the suspension image displayed in the execution display area D is changed (restored) to the specific display mode before cancellation at the latest suspension change point.

After execution of step S2306 or when a negative determination is made in step S2303 (when the current display mode in the target holding image is not the normal display mode HMa), the determined flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d in step S2307. Determine whether or not In addition, when the current display mode in the target suspension image (the suspension image displayed in the execution display area D) is not the normal display mode HMa, the display mode of the suspension image is already the specific display mode before the cancellation. is being changed to

If it is determined in step S2307 that the determination completion flag is stored, the processing for execution of the third execution of the pending notice is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination completion flag is not stored, processing for promotion of pending notice is executed in step S2308.

Here, the processing for promotion of pending notice in step S2308 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the promotion process, first, in step S2401, the variation pattern of the target holding image is grasped. This grasping is performed based on the change start command (step S712 in FIG. 23) transmitted from the main controller 162 at the start of the game round (the game round being executed) of the target holding image.

In step S2402, based on the variation pattern grasped in step S2401 and the table for promotion determination stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343, the promotion determination of the pending notice effect is performed. In the promotion determination, the display mode of the target suspension image (the suspension image displayed in the execution display area D) can be changed to a higher specific display mode (a higher display mode than the display mode before cancellation). It determines whether it is possible or not.

As shown in FIG. 47, in the table for promotion determination, the upper limit of the display mode is defined corresponding to each variation pattern. Changes up to HMd are allowed. By the way, in the case of each variation pattern corresponding to the big win, any of the variation patterns 1A to 5A is allowed to change up to the rainbow color display mode HMe.

Note that the promotion determination table is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 47, and may have other configurations such as, for example, different upper limit display modes for each variation pattern corresponding to the big win. In short, it is sufficient that the upper limit display mode is determined so as to correspond to the degree of expectation for jackpot of the game round (fluctuation pattern) (in other words, to match the degree of expectation for jackpot).

In step S2402, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S2401 is specified with reference to the promotion determination table, and the current display mode of the target holding image is lower than the specified upper limit display mode. It is determined whether or not it is in the display mode. As a result, if the current display mode is a display mode lower than the upper limit display mode, promotion of the display mode is permitted, and if not, promotion is prohibited. If the display mode has been set to be changed in step S2306, it is determined whether or not the display mode after the change is lower than the specified upper limit display mode. Determine whether promotion is possible based on

After execution of step S2402, in step S2403, a determination completion flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. FIG. The determination completion flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp that the promotion determination has been executed, in other words, it is for avoiding redundant implementation of the promotion determination.

In step S2404, it is determined whether or not the result of the upgrade determination in step S2402 permits the upgrade of the display mode. If the promotion is not permitted, the processing for promotion of the pending notice is exited and the process advances to step S2314 (FIG. 45) to clear the notice return flag and terminate the third execution processing of the pending notice.

If promotion is allowed, the process advances to step S2405 to execute promotion scenario lottery processing. The promotion scenario defines at what timing (holding change point) and to which display mode the target holding image displayed in the execution display area D is to be changed. A promotion scenario lottery table for lottery for a promotion scenario is stored in a table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. In this promotion scenario lottery table, an execution lottery table for lottery for whether or not to execute a promotion effect is stored. In addition to the information, a plurality of types of promotion scenarios are set corresponding to each upper limit display mode of the pending notice effect. In step S2405, based on the promotion scenario lottery table and lottery counters (random numbers) obtained from the respective counter areas 344b of the RAM 344, an execution lottery to determine whether the display mode should be promoted and a scenario to be promoted. Make a lottery.

In step S2406, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in step S2405 is to promote the display mode. If it is not to be promoted, the process for promotion of pending notice is exited and the process advances to step S2314 (FIG. 45) to clear the notice return flag and terminate the third execution process of pending notice.

If promoted, the process advances to step S2407 to set promotion scenario data so that the promotion scenario selected in step S2405 is executed. After execution of step S2407, in steps S2408 to S2410, processing relating to the change suggestive effect is executed. These processes are the same as steps S1603 to S1605 in the first execution process of the suspension notice (FIG. 38(a)), so description thereof will be omitted.

After execution of step S2410 or when a negative determination is made in step S2409, a promotion flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d in step S2411, and then the pending notice promotion processing is terminated. The promotion flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp that the display mode of the target holding image should be promoted.

Returning to the description of the third execution process of the pending notice (FIG. 45), after executing the process for promotion of the pending notice in step S2308, the third execution process of the pending notice is terminated.

If the determination in step S2302 is affirmative (if the promotion flag is stored), the process advances to step S2309 to determine whether or not it is time to promote the display mode. This determination is made based on the promotion scenario setting result in step S2407. If it is not the promotion timing, the process for the third execution of the pending notice is terminated.

If it is the promotion timing, the process proceeds to step S2310, and the display mode (higher-level display mode) to be changed in the current change processing is grasped based on the setting result of the promotion scenario. In subsequent step S2311, the display mode of the holding image displayed in the execution display area D is set to be changed to the display mode grasped in step S2310. Specifically, as an output command to the display control device 350, the display mode of the holding image displayed in the execution display area D is changed by including information indicating which display mode to change to. Set the command to do so.

In step S2312, it is determined whether or not the display mode grasped in step S2310 or the display mode set as the change destination in step S2311 is the final display mode in the promotion effect. For example, if the promotion scenario is set so that the display mode is promoted in multiple stages through multiple change processes, if the current change process is an intermediate process, it will not be the final display mode. A negative determination is made for the step, and the third execution process of the suspension notice is terminated.

If it is the final display mode, the promotion flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is deleted in step S2313. In the following step S2314, the advance notice return flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is erased, and then the pending notice third execution process is terminated.

<Regarding the flow of the display mode of the holding image when the production mode is switched>
48 to 50, the flow of the display mode of the holding image when the effect mode is switched will be described.

Winning to the first operation port 62 occurs in a state in which three pieces of the reservation information for the first special figure are acquired, and when the fourth piece of reservation information (image HW for reservation) is acquired, the main control device In 162, a hold prefetch process (step S305) is executed for the acquired hold information. Here, as a result, it is assumed that the result of the judgment is out and the variation pattern is the variation pattern 6H (out of SPSP reach B).

In addition, the effect control device 143, based on the result of pre-reading in the main control device 162, executes the setting process (step S1403) for the suspension notice effect, the execution lottery of the suspension notice effect for the image HW for suspension, the final display mode A lottery, a lottery for a production scenario, etc. are performed. As a result of the lottery, the red display mode HMd is selected as the final display mode, and the scenario in which the green display mode HMc is displayed at the beginning of the display and is changed to the red display mode HMd at a later shift timing is selected as the production scenario. and In this case, as shown in FIG. 48A, the holding image HW in the green display mode HMc is displayed in the fourth unit holding display area Ga4 of the first holding display area Ga.

After that, when the player performs a mode switching operation using the operation section 36 for presentation, the presentation mode is switched from the presentation mode A to the presentation mode B. At this time, as shown in FIG. 48(b), the display mode of the holding image HW, which was set to the green display mode HMc in the presentation mode A, is changed to the normal display mode HMa. In this case, the effect control device 143 stores information indicating the display mode (green display mode HMc) of the holding image HW before mode switching in the return area 344f of the RAM 344 . In addition, FIG. 48(b) shows a case where the effect mode is switched in the middle of the game cycle in which the suspension information of the suspension image HW is acquired.

When the mode switching operation is performed again in the next game round, and the production mode is switched from the production mode B to the production mode A, the production control device 143, based on the information stored in the return area 344f, returns the notice. A setting process (step S1913) is executed, the original display mode (green display mode HMc) is grasped, and a recovery scenario lottery is performed. It is assumed that, as a result of the scenario lottery, a scenario is selected in which the normal display mode HMa is displayed at first, and then changed to the original display mode, ie, the green display mode HMc, at a subsequent change timing.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 49(a), at the time of switching to the effect mode A, the holding image HW is displayed with the display mode set to the normal display mode HMa. Then, if the selected return scenario is to change the display mode of the holding image HW to the blue display mode HMb at the next shift timing, and further change it to the green display mode HMc at the next shift timing. As shown in 49(b), at the timing when the suspension image HW is shifted to the second unit suspension display area Ga2, the display mode of the suspension image HW is returned to the original green display mode HMc. As a result, the display mode of the holding image HW, which has been set to the normal display mode HMa when switching to the effect mode B, is returned to the display mode before switching to the effect mode B.

After switching from the production mode B to the production mode A, until the game round of the holding image HW is started, a change suggesting production (FIG. 39) suggesting a change in the display mode of the holding image (rank up) is performed. Execution lottery will not be held. Therefore, when changing to the blue display mode HMb and changing to the green display mode HMc, no change suggesting effect is performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 50(a), when the game round of the holding image HW is started, the effect control device 143 executes the holding notice third execution process (step S1808), and the holding image Grasping of HW fluctuation pattern, grasping of upper limit display mode corresponding to the grasped fluctuation pattern, determination of promotion to higher display mode, etc. are performed.

Since the variation pattern of the holding image HW is the variation pattern 6H, and the upper limit display mode in this case is the red display mode HMd (FIG. 47), the current display mode (green display mode HMc) is the upper limit display in the promotion determination. Display mode promotion is allowed based on being a mode that is lower than the mode. As a result, as shown in FIG. 50(b), the display mode of the suspension image HW displayed in the execution display area D changes to the red display mode HMd at a predetermined suspension change point in the game cycle of the suspension image HW. That is, the original display mode is changed to a higher mode. At that time, when the execution lottery for the change suggesting effect is won, the change suggesting effect is performed and then the change to the red display mode HMd is performed.

The red display mode HMd suggests that the SPSP ready-to-win effect will be performed in the game round of the holding image. Here, since the variation pattern of the holding image HW is the variation pattern 6H corresponding to the SPSP ready-to-win B-off effect, the SPSP ready-to-reach B effect is performed in the game round of the holding image HW, and the holding image HW. The suggestion by and the actual game round production are consistent.

In addition, after switching from the production mode A to the production mode B, the game round of the holding image HW may end without switching to the production mode A again. In this case, the display mode of the holding image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa without returning to the specific display mode.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

When the execution of the suspension notice effect is canceled by switching the effect mode, and the display mode of the image HW for target suspension is changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa, then by shifting to the original effect mode, the target suspension is performed. The configuration is such that the display mode of the image HW is returned to the original specific display mode.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the holding image is set to the specific display mode based on the result of the holding prefetch process, so that the player's expectation for the big win result is aroused before the start of the game cycle. be able to. Furthermore, since a plurality of types of modes are set as the specific display mode so that the degree of expectation for the big win is different, it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation by giving it a magnitude, which is advantageous in arousing the player's sense of expectation. can be configured. In addition, since the mode is switched between the performance mode A and the performance mode B, the player can change his/her mood during the game and can suppress boredom with the game. In such a configuration, when the execution of the suspension notice effect is canceled by switching the effect mode during execution of the suspension notice effect (effect in which the suspension image is a specific display mode), the effect is notified or suggested. There is a concern that the player may be misunderstood and uneasy that the expected level of expectation has disappeared. In this case, it is conceivable to limit the switching of the production mode during the execution of the pending notice production, but there is a risk that the frequency of switching the production mode will be reduced and the significance of providing multiple types of production modes will be lost. .

In this regard, in this configuration, when the execution of the pending notice effect is canceled by switching the effect mode, and when the re-switching to the original effect mode is performed in that state, the target holding image changed to the normal display mode HMa Since the HW is returned to the original specific display mode, the degree of expectation can be notified again. As a result, the player can be notified that the degree of expectation has not disappeared, and the pending advance notice effect can be executed without restricting the switching of the effect mode. In other words, it is possible to favorably achieve both the execution of the pending advance notice effect and the switching of the effect mode.

Information corresponding to the notification mode of the image for suspension when the suspension notice effect is performed can be stored in the return area 344f of the RAM 344, and when the original effect mode is shifted, the object is displayed based on the return area 344f of the RAM 344. It is configured to set the notification mode of the holding image HW. As a result, when shifting to the original presentation mode, it is possible to preferably return the display mode of the holding image, which has been set to the normal display mode HMa, to the original specific display mode.

In the above setting, regardless of the result of the pending prefetch process performed on the target pending image, the display mode of the target pending image HW is set based on the information stored in the return area 344f.

For example, in the case of shifting from production mode A to production mode B and then to production mode A, the display mode of the target holding image HW is set based on the result of the holding prefetch performed in the previous production mode A. If it is configured to do so, it is assumed that the display mode will be set to a mode different from the display mode in the previous effect mode A. In this case, since the display mode of the target suspension image HW in the subsequent performance mode A does not match the display mode in the previous performance mode A, the player can understand that the canceled suspension notice performance has been restored. Hateful. In particular, in a configuration in which the display mode of the holding image can be changed in stages, even with the same prefetch result, the display mode of the holding image (holding notice effect) at the time of switching varies depending on the switching timing of the production mode. Therefore, if the display mode in the subsequent effect mode A is set based on the result of the pending prefetching process, a mode different from the display mode in the previous effect mode A is likely to be set.

In this regard, in this configuration, the display mode is set based on the information stored in the return area 344f instead of the result of the pending prefetching process. can be set to the same mode as the display mode actually displayed in . As a result, the display mode in the previous performance mode A and the display mode in the subsequent performance mode B can be suitably matched, and the player is made to recognize that the display mode (suspended notice performance) has returned. can be made easier.

When the display mode of the target suspension image HW is returned to the original specific display mode by shifting to the production mode A later, the display mode of the target suspension image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the original specific display mode. It was configured to reset the production scenario (return scenario) to do.

In the case of returning the target holding image HW to the original specific display mode in the subsequent production mode A, depending on the length of the staying period in the production mode B immediately before that, after switching to the subsequent production mode A, the object holding image HW is returned to the original specific display mode. It is assumed that the period until the game round of the image HW ends, that is, the remaining period in which the target holding image HW continues to be displayed varies. In this regard, in this configuration, since the production scenario is reset when the target holding image HW is returned to the original specific display mode, the target holding image HW can be displayed in the original specific display mode even if the remaining period changes. can be suitably changed to

In the above case, the configuration is such that the number of suspensions before the target suspension image HW is grasped, and the effect scenario is reset based on the result.

In this case, the production scenario can be reset after appropriately grasping the remaining period, and regardless of the stay period in the production mode B, the target holding image HW is suitably changed to the original specific display mode. be able to.

After setting the object holding image HW to the original specific display mode in the subsequent production mode A, it is configured to be promoted to a higher specific display mode.

In this case, the range of the display mode (suggested degree of expectation) in the later production mode A is limited to the display mode in the previous production mode A, and it is possible to suppress the narrowing of the range of the degree of expectation that can be suggested. . At that time, if the specific display mode of the higher rank is suddenly set, the correspondence with the pending notice effect performed in the previous effect mode A may be difficult to understand, and the effect may become difficult to understand. In this regard, in this configuration, since it is possible to change from the original specific display mode to a higher display mode, the display mode of the target suspension image HW is restored (the canceled suspension notice effect is restored ), and it is possible to suppress the player's confusion.

In the above case, instead of unnecessarily promoting the display mode of the target holding image HW, it is determined whether or not to promote to a higher display mode based on the variation pattern of the target holding image HW, and the result Based on this, it is configured to distribute whether or not to be a higher mode. As a result, it is possible to improve the display mode of the target holding image HW while matching it with the game round effect (such as ready-to-win effect) that is actually performed in the game round of the target holding image HW.

By making it possible to execute a change-suggesting effect suggesting that the display mode of the holding image changes to a higher mode, and by shifting to the original production mode, the display mode of the target holding image HW can be changed to the original specific display. In the case of returning to the mode, the configuration is such that the execution of the change suggesting effect is restricted.

Since the change-suggesting performance suggests a change to a higher-ranking display mode, expectations for the change to a higher-ranking mode are aroused, and the player's attention to the holding image can be increased. In such a configuration, for example, in the previous production mode A, the target holding image HW is set to the green display mode HMc, and in the subsequent production mode A, when changing from the normal display mode HMa to the green display mode HMc, a change suggesting production will return to the original specific display mode, but the specific display mode (green display mode HMc) in the previous production mode A that the player memorizes is a higher display mode as a reference. (the red display mode HMd and the rainbow color display mode HMe). In this case, since the actual display mode (green display mode HMc) in the target holding image HW becomes a display mode lower than the mode associated with the player, there is a risk of giving the player an unpleasant impression. In this regard, in this configuration, even if it corresponds to a change to a higher display mode, if it is only to return to the display mode in the previous production mode A, the change suggestion production is not executed. It is possible to suppress the player's association with a mode higher than the display mode of (1), and it is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

The performance mode A and the performance mode B have different easiness of execution of the pending notice performance.

In the case of such a configuration, by switching the production mode, the production characteristics related to the suggestion of the degree of expectation of the big win change, so compared to the case where only the appearance is changed by changing the background image or the character image, etc. It can make a strong impression on people. However, on the other hand, when the effect mode is switched while the display mode of the target suspension image HW is set to the specific display mode (the state in which the suspension notice effect being executed is continued), the degree of expectation suggested by the target suspension image HW increases. There is a possibility that a different situation may occur before and after switching the production mode. In this case, by canceling the execution of the pending notice effect along with the switching of the effect mode, it is possible to suppress such an inconsistency in the degree of expectation. There is a concern that the player will be misunderstood and uneasy that the has disappeared. By applying the present embodiment (such as a configuration for returning the display mode of the target holding image HW to the original specific display mode by shifting to the original production mode) to such a configuration, each of them The features can be effectively functioned, and the above effects can be favorably exhibited.

<Second Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, in a state where there is an image for holding in a specific display mode, for example, when switching from one of the production mode A and the production mode B to the other is performed, before the switching The display mode of the image for suspension is stored, and the display mode of the image for suspension is changed to the normal display mode. After that, if the switching to the original production mode (one production mode) is performed again before the game round of the holding image is completed, the display memorized at the time of the previous switching (switching to the other production mode) is performed. Based on the information of the mode, restoration processing of the display mode of the holding image is performed, and the display mode is changed to the original specific display mode or changed to a higher specific display mode.

During the period after the previous switching is performed until the subsequent switching (re-switching to the original production mode) is performed, that is, during the period in which the display mode return processing is waiting, the game is performed by the player. Therefore, new pending information may occur. In the present embodiment, handling of the suspension notice effect for the new suspension information is different from that in the first embodiment. The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55. FIG. In these figures, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Processing for pending command>
The pending command handling process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This processing is executed when a pending command is received in the effect control device 143 (when pending information is generated), and is executed in place of the pending command corresponding processing of FIG. In FIG. 51, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 31, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In step S1402, when the value of the pending number counter (starting pending storage number SN) provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344 is incremented by 1, in step S2601, the wait flag for return is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344. Determine whether or not it is stored. The standby flag for return is for the MPU 342 to grasp that it is in a state of waiting for return processing (processing for returning the display mode of the image for suspension to the original specific display mode). Stored in the various flag storage area 344d during the standby period. In the waiting period of the return process, the period from switching from one of the production mode A and the production mode B to the other to the original production mode (duration of stay in the other production mode). In addition, after switching to the other production mode, the game round of the target holding image (holding image to be subjected to display mode return processing) ends without switching back to the original production mode. There is a period of time before

If a negative determination is made in step S2601 (if the standby flag for return is not stored), the process advances to step S1403 to execute setting processing for holding notice (FIG. 34). In the setting process for the pending notice, setting for executing the pending notice effect is performed for the generated pending information.

If the determination in step S2601 is affirmative (if the standby flag for return is stored), the process advances to step S2602 without executing the setting process for advance notice of hold in step S1403, and The image display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa. That is, in the present embodiment, when new hold information is generated during the waiting period of the return process, the execution of the hold advance notice effect for the hold information is restricted.

Note that the pending prefetch processing for the pending information is performed by the pending prefetch processing (FIG. 26) of the main controller 162 in the same manner as other pending information. Therefore, in the production control device 143, although the display mode of the suspension image is forcibly set to the normal display mode HMa as described above, the prefetch results such as the fluctuation pattern are acquired by the suspension command from the main control device 162. ing.

In step S2603, the occurrence information during restriction is stored in association with the pending information that has occurred. The occurrence information during restriction indicates that the information is pending information that occurred during the restriction period. The processing of step S2603 is performed, for example, by storing the occurrence information during restriction together with suspension information such as variation patterns in the first to fourth areas (FIG. 32) provided in the storage area for suspension 344c of the RAM 344. . Therefore, when the shift processing of step S1704 in the shift command handling processing (FIG. 40) is executed, the occurrence information during restriction is shifted to the lower area along with the hold information. Thereby, even when the shift processing is performed and the display area of the images for suspension is shifted, it is possible to grasp which images for suspension occurred during the restricted period. It should be noted that the restricted occurrence information may be stored in a storage area other than the suspension storage area 344c after making it possible to recognize which suspension information it is.

After execution of step S2603, processing for displaying a hold image on the hold display portion 200 of the display screen G is executed in step S1405. As described above, since the display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa in step S2602, the hold image of the hold information generated during the restricted period is displayed in the normal display mode HMa.

If a negative determination is made in step S2601 (if the restriction period is not in effect) and the process reaches step S1405 via the setting process for the hold notice in step S1403 and the first execution process for the hold notice in step S1404, The holding image is displayed in the display mode set by those processes.

<Production mode switching process>
The effect mode switching process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in step S1307 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30) in the effect control device 143, and is executed instead of the effect mode switching process of FIG. In FIG. 52, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 42, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After executing the switching process of the production mode in step S1903, the production mode flag corresponding to the production mode after switching is set in step S1904. In the subsequent step S1905, it is determined whether or not the standby flag for return is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344 or not. It should be noted that the situation where the standby flag for return is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d in the situation where the switching process of step S1903 is executed means that the original production is performed after the production mode is switched (previous switching). It means that the mode has been switched again. Conversely, the situation in which the standby flag for return is not stored means that the above-mentioned switching has been performed (the switching back to the original production mode has not yet been performed).

If it is determined in step S1905 that the standby flag for return is not stored (if the previous switching has been performed), the process proceeds to step S1906, and the processing of steps S1906 to S1911 is performed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. to run.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1905 that the standby flag for return is stored (when switching has been performed again), the flow advances to step S1912 to erase the standby flag for return from the various flag storage area 344d. As a result, the restricted state of the pending advance notice effect is released. Therefore, for the hold information generated after the release, the setting process of the hold advance notice effect (step S1403) and the like are executed when the hold information is generated (when the hold command is received).

In step S1913, setting processing for advance notice return is executed, and in subsequent step S2701, it is determined whether or not there is hold information that occurred during the restricted period. This determination is made based on the restriction occurrence information stored in step S2603 of the pending command processing (FIG. 51).

If there is no hold information generated during the restricted period, the effect mode switching process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if there is hold information generated during the restricted period, the second setting process for holding notice is executed in step S2702, and then the effect mode switching process is terminated.

<Second setting process for hold notice>
The second setting process for holding notice in step S2702 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2801, hold information occurring during the restricted period is grasped. That is, based on the information occurring during restriction, it is specified which of the pending information existing at that time is the pending information that occurred during the restricted period.

After executing the process of step S2801, the process of step S2802 and subsequent steps is executed for the hold of occurrence during the comprehended restricted period. Note that most of the processing after step S2802 is the same as each processing in the processing for setting advance notice (FIG. 34) in step S1403 (FIG. 51). The different processing will be explained in detail.

In steps S2802 to S2804, referring to the storage area 344c for suspension of the RAM 344, the fluctuation pattern of the occurrence suspension during the limited period is grasped, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won. In step S2805, the effect mode after switching is grasped. For example, when re-switching is switching from production mode B to production mode A, production mode A is grasped as production mode after switching.

In steps S2806 to S2808, a holding notice execution lottery table corresponding to the effect mode after switching grasped in step S2805 is acquired, and a holding notice effect execution lottery is performed. If the execution lottery is won, in steps S2809 to S2814, the final display mode of the holding image in the holding notice effect is determined, and the process (effect scenario) until the final display mode is displayed is determined. or

At that time, if the final display mode lottery table for lottery for the final display mode and the production scenario lottery table for lottery for the production scenario are different in each production mode, the production mode after switching ascertained in step S2805 is selected. Acquire the corresponding table and draw a lottery. Although the suspension of occurrence during the restricted period occurred during the production mode before switching, the conditions set for the production mode after switching regarding the execution lottery of the suspension notice production and the lottery of the final display mode etc. It is applied and performed corresponding to the production mode after switching.

In step S2815, a hold notice flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344, and then the second setting process for the hold notice is terminated. After the hold notice flag is set in this manner, the first execution processing of the hold notice of step S1701 in the shift time command corresponding processing (FIG. 38(a)) and the special figure fluctuation display processing (FIG. 41) In step S1807 in step S1807, processing for changing the display mode of the suspension image to the specific display mode is executed. That is, the suspension notice effect for the suspension information generated before mode switching is performed in the effect mode after switching.

<Special figure fluctuation display processing>
The processing for special figure variation display according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in step S1305 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30) in the effect control device 143, and is executed instead of the special figure fluctuation display process of FIG. In FIG. 54, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 41, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

This processing is provided as a countermeasure to the case where the game round of the target suspension image (the suspension image to be subjected to the return processing of the display mode) ends without switching back to the original effect mode. It is.

After executing the fluctuation end processing in step S1809, in step S1810, the holding information (holding image to be the target of the return processing of the display mode) that triggered the holding notice effect of the special figure game round this time It is determined whether or not it is a game round. If it is the game turn of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect, in step S1811, it is determined whether or not the hold notice flag or return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. If either the hold notice flag or the standby flag for return is stored, the stored flag is erased in step S1812. As a result, the return processing is canceled, and the restricted state of the pending advance notice effect is released.

In step S2901, it is determined whether or not there is hold information that occurred during the restricted period. If there is any pending information that occurred during the restricted period, the process advances to step S2902 to ascertain which pending information is the pending information that occurred during the restricted period. Each process of steps S2901 and S2902 is performed based on the occurrence information during restriction stored in step S2603 of the pending command process (FIG. 51).

In step S2903, setting processing for suspension notice is executed for the generation suspension during the restricted period ascertained in step S2902. This process is the same as the setting process (FIG. 34) for the pending notice in step S1403 (FIG. 51), and the setting process for executing the pending notice effect corresponding to the current effect mode is performed. Become.

That is, if the restricted state is canceled without switching back to the original production mode, the execution lottery of the pending notice production and the lottery of the final display mode, etc. will be in the production mode that is staying at that time. Apply the conditions set for For example, when the performance mode A is switched to the performance mode B as the previous switching, the condition set for the performance mode B is applied to execute a lottery for execution of the pending notice performance. After execution of step S2903 or when a negative determination is made in step S2902 (when there is no pending information generated during the restriction period), the special figure fluctuation display processing is terminated.

<Regarding the display mode flow of the hold image corresponding to the occurrence hold during the restriction period>
Referring to FIG. 55, the flow of the display mode of the suspension image corresponding to the occurrence suspension during the restriction period will be described.

When the fourth reservation information of the first special figure occurs in the situation of the production mode A, the reservation prefetching process (step S305) by the main control device 162 is performed, and the reservation notice for the production control device 143 is performed. Setting processing (step S1403) is performed. As a result, when the suspension notice effect in which the display mode is the green display mode HMc is to be executed, as shown in FIG. is displayed in the fourth unit reserved display area Ga4 of the first reserved display area Ga.

When the player performs the mode switching operation in the game round in which the suspension information corresponding to the suspension image HA is acquired, the performance mode is switched from the performance mode A to the performance mode B. At this time, as shown in FIG. 55(b), the display mode of the holding image HA is changed from the green display mode HMc to the normal display mode HMa.

Then, while the production mode is maintained in the production mode B, it is assumed that two new pieces of suspension information are generated during the period until the suspension image HA is shifted to the second unit suspension display area Ga2. For these newly generated suspension information, setting processing for suspension notice by the effect control device 143 is not performed, and the display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa. That is, since the execution of the pending notice effect is restricted, as shown in FIG. HMa is displayed in the third unit reserved display area Ga3 and the fourth unit reserved display area Ga4.

The pending prefetch processing in the main controller 162 for the pending information of the pending images HB1 and HB2 is performed at the acquisition timing of the pending information, similarly to the other pending information. Since the prefetching result is notified to the effect control device 143 through the pending command, the effecting control device 143 is in a state of not performing the setting process for the pending notice, but the prefetching result related to the pending information is acquired. It is in.

When the mode switching operation is performed again in the next game round and the production mode is switched from the production mode B to the production mode A, the production control device 143 changes the holding images HB1 and HB2 displayed in the normal display mode HMa. The second setting process (step S2702) for holding notice is executed as a target. In the second setting process for the pending advance notice, a lottery for execution of the pending advance notice effect, a lottery for the final display mode, a lottery for the effect scenario, etc., is performed based on the result of pre-reading notified from the main controller 162 at the acquisition timing of the pending information. It is. When these lotteries are drawn, a lottery table corresponding to the performance mode A, which is the performance mode after switching, is used. In other words, although the suspension information of the suspension images HB1 and HB2 is acquired in the situation of the performance mode B, the lottery for the suspension notice performance for them is performed in the mode of execution of the suspension notice performance. Lottery conditions set for Mode A are applied.

As a result of the lottery, for example, if the holding notice effect is not executed for the holding image HB1 and the holding notice effect is executed with the display mode as the blue display mode HMb for the holding image HB2. 55(d), the display mode of the holding image HB1 is maintained in the normal display mode HMa, and the display mode of the holding image HB2 is changed to the blue display mode HMb.

In addition, regarding the holding image HA corresponding to the holding information acquired in the production mode A before shifting to the production mode B, the setting processing for the return of the notice by the production control device 143 (step S1913), the second holding notice By performing the processing for execution (step S1702), the display mode is changed to the green display mode HMc, which is the original display mode.

Also, unlike the case where the switching to the production mode A is performed as described above, after the state of FIG. When the game round of the last pending information acquired in the previous presentation mode A ends, the restricted state ends with the end of the game round. In this case, at the end timing of the game round, the second setting process for holding notice targeting the holding images HB1 and HB2 is executed. At this time, the lottery table corresponding to the effect mode B is used for various lotteries such as the execution lottery for the pending advance notice effect, the lottery for the final display mode, the lottery for the effect scenario, and the like. That is, a lottery condition different from the case of FIG. 55(d) is applied.

As a result of the lottery, for example, if the holding notice effect is executed with the display mode of the holding image HB1 as the blue display mode HMb, and the holding notice effect is not executed for the holding image HB2, As shown in 55(e), the display mode of the holding image HB1 is changed to the blue display mode HMb, and the display mode of the holding image HB1 is maintained in the normal display mode HMa.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

Regarding the images HB1 and HB2 for suspension corresponding to the suspension information acquired during the restricted state in which the execution of the suspension notice effect is restricted, the display mode after the end of the restricted state is the suspension prefetch processing executed during the restricted state. It was configured to be set based on the results.

In the present embodiment, when the effect mode is switched during execution of the pending notice effect, the execution of the pending notice effect is restricted until the re-switching to the original effect mode is performed. When new pending information is acquired in the restricted state, if such pending information is not changed to a specific display mode, the player's expectations for the pending information acquired during the restricted state There is a concern that it will not be possible to evoke

In this respect, according to this configuration, the display mode of the holding images HB1 and HB2 corresponding to the holding information acquired during the restricted state can be changed to the specific display mode after the restricted state ends. It is possible to arouse the player's sense of expectation for the pending information acquired at the time. At that time, since the change to the specific display mode (execution of the pending notice effect) after the restricted state is performed based on the result of the pending prefetching process executed during the restricted state, the pending prefetching is performed in the same manner as in the non-restricted state. can be processed. That is, since it is not necessary to change the configuration of the pending prefetch processing, it is possible to execute the pending notice effect triggered by the pending information acquired during the restricted state while suppressing the complication of the configuration after the restricted state. be possible.

The configuration is such that the pending prefetching process for the acquired pending information is performed in accordance with the acquisition timing of the pending information regardless of whether it is in the restricted state or not.

In this case, pending read-ahead processing can be performed in accordance with the timing of acquiring hold information regardless of whether the state is restricted or not. you don't have to. Therefore, it is possible to execute the suspension notice effect triggered by the suspension information acquired during the restriction state after the restriction state, while suppressing the complication of the configuration.

The setting of the display mode of the holding images HB1 and HB2 after the restricted state (the setting of the holding notice effect) is executed at the end of the restricted state.

For example, when setting the display mode after the restricted state based on the result of the pending prefetch processing executed during the restricted state, it is possible that the setting cannot be executed during the restricted state. However, if the game round of the holding images HB1 and HB2 for which the display mode is set is executed during the restricted state, the display period of the holding image ends without reflecting the setting of the display mode. It may be wasted. In this regard, in this configuration, since the setting of the display mode is performed at the end of the restricted state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such wastefulness and perform efficient processing.

When the suspension information is acquired during the restricted state, the suspension information is stored in the suspension storage area 344c of the RAM 344, indicating that the suspension information was acquired during the restricted state.

According to the above configuration, based on the information generated during restriction stored in the suspension storage area 344c of the RAM 344, it is possible to grasp that the suspension information was obtained during the restriction status after the restriction status. Therefore, even if the hold information acquired before the restriction state and the hold information acquired during the restriction state coexist after the restriction state ends, the hold information acquired during the restriction state can be easily retrieved. can be specified. As a result, when setting the display mode of each hold image after the restricted state, the hold information acquired during the restricted state is distinguished from the other held information, and only the held information acquired during the restricted state can be processed.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the case of switching from the production mode (production mode A) with a high frequency of occurrence of the pending notice production to the low production mode (production mode B) and the case of switching from the low production mode to the high production mode are distinguished. Separately, it is configured to restore the display mode of the holding image. The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58. FIG. In these figures, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the above-described first embodiment, the production mode is switched in a situation in which there is a specific display mode suspension image, and after the suspension image is set to the normal display mode HMa, the original presentation mode is restored. When switching is performed, it is configured to perform restoration processing of the display mode for the holding image. It is configured to perform restoration processing of the display mode for the holding image. Incidentally, the frequency of occurrence of the pending notice effect in production mode A (the execution probability of the pending notice effect when the result of the prefetch is wrong) is higher than that in production mode B. In other words, the specific display mode with the same display color On the other hand, the degree of expectation for a big hit in the production mode A is lower than that in the production mode B, which is the same as in the first embodiment.

<Production mode switching process>
The effect mode switching process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in step S1307 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30) in the effect control device 143, and is executed in place of the effect mode switching process of FIG. In FIG. 56, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 42, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After executing the switching process of the production mode in step S1903, the production mode flag corresponding to the production mode after switching is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM344 in step S1904. The effect mode flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp the effect mode after switching before switching the effect mode, and the current effect mode after switching the effect mode.

In step S3101, it is determined whether or not a hold notice flag is stored in the various flag storage areas. The pending notice flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp that the pending notice effect should be executed or that the pending notice effect is being executed.

When the reservation notice flag is not stored, the effect mode switching process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a pending notice flag is stored, the process advances to step S3102 to erase the pending notice flag. As a result, if the pending notice effect was executed before the mode switch, the continuation of the pending notice effect being executed is canceled, and if it was in the standby state of the pending notice effect, the pending notice effect standby ( execution reservation) is canceled.

In step S3103, it is determined whether or not there is a holding image displayed in a specific display mode. Specifically, among the holding images displayed in the holding display areas Ga and Gb, the Determines whether the displayed item exists. This determination is made by referring to the information of each area stored in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344. FIG. If there is no holding image displayed in the specific display mode, the effect mode switching process is terminated.

When there is a holding image displayed in the specific display mode, the process proceeds to step S3104, and it is determined whether or not the current mode switching is switching from the production mode A to the production mode B. That is, whether it is switching from the production mode on the side where the occurrence frequency of the pending notice production is high to the production mode on the low side (in other words, the production mode on the side where the jackpot expectation of the holding notice production is low to the high side (whether or not it is switching to the production mode). In the case of switching to the effect mode B, in step S3105, the holding storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the holding image displayed in the specific display mode is grasped.

In step S3106, determination for recovery is performed based on the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S3105 and the table for recovery determination stored in various table storage area 343a of ROM343. The determination for return determines whether or not it is possible to restore the image for suspension displayed in the specific display mode to the specific display mode after switching the effect mode.

As shown in FIG. 57, in the recovery determination table, the upper limit of the display mode is defined corresponding to each variation pattern. A return (change) up to HMc is allowed. When the suspension notice effect is executed while staying in the effect mode B, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the variation pattern 5H is the red display mode HMd, but the upper limit display mode in the return determination table is higher than that. It is restricted to the lower green representation HMc. The same applies to other deviation corresponding variation patterns such as variation pattern 3H and variation pattern 4H. By the way, in the case of each variation pattern corresponding to the big win, any of the variation patterns 1A to 5A is allowed to change up to the rainbow color display mode HMe. The return determination table is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 57, and may have other configurations such as different upper limit display modes for each variation pattern corresponding to a big win.

In step S3106, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S3105 with reference to the return determination table is specified, and the current display mode of the target hold image is the specified upper limit display mode or less display mode It is determined whether or not. As a result, if the current display mode is equal to or less than the upper limit display mode, the return of the display mode is allowed, and if not, the return is prohibited.

In step S3107, it is determined whether or not the return determination result in step S3106 permits the return of the display mode. If the return is not permitted, the process advances to step S3108 to execute processing for canceling display in the specific display mode for the holding image displayed in the specific display mode. That is, setting is made such that the holding image displayed in the specific display mode is switched to the normal display mode HMa as the effect mode is switched. In addition, in the canceling process of step S3108, the information of the display mode stored in the display mode storage area 344e and the production scenario data set in step S1513 of the setting process for pending notice (FIG. 34) are also deleted. to run. After execution of step S3108, the production mode switching process is terminated.

If the determination in step S3107 is affirmative (if the return of the display mode is permitted), then in step S3109, information on the display mode of each holding image stored in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344 is returned to the RAM 344. stored in the use area 344f. In step S3110, similarly to step S3108, processing for canceling display in the specific display mode is executed for the holding image displayed in the specific display mode.

In step S3111, a setting process for return of advance notice is executed, and then the effect mode switching process is terminated. The setting process for advance notice return in step S3111 is the same as the setting process for advance notice return in step S1913 (FIG. 43) of the effect mode switching process (FIG. 42) according to the first embodiment. In the setting process for the advance notice return, after switching to the production mode B, at what timing the display mode of the holding image is to be returned (changed), and how to return (whether to return with one change, or Do you want to restore by changing step by step?).

When the setting process for the notice return is performed as described above, the second execution process (FIG. 44) of the hold notice in step S1702 of the shift time command correspondence process (FIG. 40 (a)) and the special figure fluctuation In the third execution process (FIG. 45) of the suspension notice in step S1808 of the display process (FIG. 41), the display mode of the target suspension image is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode. At this time, in the second execution processing of the suspension notice, the processing is executed so as to restore the display mode of the target suspension image to the original specific display mode (the specific display mode before switching to the effect mode B).

Further, in the third execution process of the hold notice, the current display mode of the target hold image in the game round of the target hold image (display mode restored by the return process) and the change pattern of the target hold image is compared with the corresponding upper limit display mode, and it is determined whether or not change (promotion) to a higher display mode is possible. Then, when such a change is possible, promotion processing of the display mode is performed through promotion determination and promotion lottery.

At this time, the upper limit display mode referred to is set for the effect mode B (conforms to the condition of the pending advance notice effect in the effect mode B). For this reason, at the time of restoration of the display mode by switching to the production mode B, even if the display form that can be restored is limited to a lower upper limit display form determined by the return determination table, the production mode is finally The display mode of the target holding image can be changed within the range of the upper limit display mode suitable for B.

Also, if the negative determination is made in step S3104 (in the case of switching from the production mode B to the production mode A), the processing of steps S3105 to S3107 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to step S3109. That is, in the case of switching from the performance mode B on the side where the occurrence frequency of the pending notice performance is low to the performance mode A on the high side, the display mode in the performance mode B is reflected as it is in the performance mode A after the mode switching. It is configured.

<Regarding the flow of the display mode of the holding image when the production mode is switched>
The flow of the display mode of the holding image when the effect mode is switched will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the case where the production mode A is switched to the production mode B will be described. As already explained, the effect mode A is a mode in which the frequency of occurrence of the pending notice effect is relatively high, and the effect mode B is a mode in which the frequency of occurrence of the pending notice effect is relatively low.

When the third hold information (holding image HW) of the first special figure occurs in the situation of the production mode A, the main controller 162 performs the hold prefetching process (step S305) for the generated hold information. Execute. Here, as a result, it is assumed that the result of the judgment is out and the result that the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern 4H (SP reach B out) is read ahead.

In addition, the effect control device 143, based on the result of pre-reading in the main control device 162, executes the setting process (step S1403) for the suspension notice effect, the execution lottery of the suspension notice effect for the image HW for suspension, the final display mode A lottery, a lottery for a production scenario, etc. are performed. As a result of the lottery, the green display mode HMc is selected as the final display mode, and the scenario in which the blue display mode HMb is displayed at the beginning of the display and is changed to the green display mode HMc at the first shift timing is selected as the production scenario. and In this case, as shown in FIG. 58(a1), the suspension image HW in the blue display mode HMb is displayed in the third unit suspension display area Ga3 of the first suspension display area Ga.

After that, when the mode switching operation is performed by the player using the effect operation unit 36 in a state where the display mode of the holding image HW is set to the blue display mode HMb, as shown in FIG. The mode is switched from the production mode A to the production mode B, and the display mode of the holding image HW is changed to the normal display mode HMa.

In addition, when switching to the effect mode B, the effect control device 143 determines whether or not to return the display mode of the holding image HW to the specific display mode (step S3106). In the determination for return, the variation pattern of the hold image HW is specified, and the upper limit display mode corresponding to the variation pattern is grasped based on the return determination table (FIG. 57), and the hold before switching to the production mode B is performed. It is determined whether or not the display mode of the image for use HW is equal to or less than the comprehended upper limit display mode.

Here, the upper limit display mode of the variation pattern 4H, which is the variation pattern of the holding image HW, is the blue display mode HMb, and the display mode of the holding image HW before switching to the effect mode B is the blue display mode HMb. , the display mode of the holding image HW before switching to the effect mode B becomes a mode below the upper limit display mode corresponding to the variation pattern. In this case, a return to the specific display mode is permitted, and a return scenario is set in setting processing for advance notice return (step S3111).

As a result, if a scenario is set to return to the blue display mode HMb at the next shift timing, as shown in FIG. When shifting to the unit reserved display area Ga2, the display mode of the reserved image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb.

After that, when the display position of the holding image HW in the blue display mode HMb is shifted to the execution display area D, and the game round of the holding image HW is started, the effect control device 143 performs the third execution of the holding notice. processing (step S1808) to determine promotion to a higher display mode. Promotion determination in this case is performed by applying the determination conditions of the production mode B. - 特許庁

For example, when the upper limit display mode of the variation pattern 4H in the production mode B is set to the lower blue display mode HMb than in the production mode A, promotion of the holding image HW is not permitted, The display mode of the image HW is maintained in the blue display mode HMb. Further, when the upper limit display mode of the variation pattern 4H in the production mode B is set to the green display mode HMc as in the case of the production mode A, the promotion is permitted, and the predetermined number in the game round of the holding image HW At the hold change point, the display mode of the hold image HW is promoted to the green display mode HMc.

Next, a case where the presentation mode is switched in the situation where the display mode of the holding image HW is set to the green display mode HMc in the presentation mode A will be described.

As shown in FIG. 58(a1), the holding image HW in the blue display mode HMb is displayed in the third unit holding display area Ga3, and the display position of the holding image HW is changed to the third unit without switching the effect mode. Assume that the display mode of the holding image HW is changed from the blue display mode HMb to the green display mode HMc by shifting to the 2-unit pending display area Ga2 and as shown in FIG. 58(b1).

In that state, when the player performs a mode switching operation using the effect operation unit 36, as shown in FIG. The display mode of HW is changed to the normal display mode HMa.

At this time, the determination for return is performed by the effect control device 143, but the display mode of the holding image HW before switching to the effect mode B becomes a higher display mode than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the variation pattern. In this case, returning to the specific display mode is not permitted. As a result, the display mode of the holding image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa until it is shifted to the execution display area D. FIG.

After that, when the display position of the holding image HW in the normal display mode HMa is shifted to the execution display area D, and the game round of the holding image HW is started, the effect control device 143 performs the third execution of the holding notice. Execution processing is performed, and a promotion determination to a higher display mode is performed. For example, when the upper limit display mode of the variation pattern 4H in the production mode B is set to the blue display mode HMb, promotion to the blue display mode HMb is allowed, and when it is set to the green display mode HMc , green display mode HMc is allowed. Note that FIG. 58(b3) shows a case where the display mode of the holding image HW is upgraded to the blue display mode HMb.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

When the production mode is switched in a situation where the holding image is in a specific display mode (a situation where the holding notice effect is being executed), the display mode of the target holding image HW in the production mode after switching is changed to the display mode before switching. It is configured to determine whether or not the display mode is the same as the display mode in the production mode.

In the present embodiment, since the mode is switched between the production mode A and the production mode B, the player can change his/her mood during the game and can suppress the boredom of the game. At that time, the performance mode B is set as a performance mode in which the pending notice performance is less likely to be executed than the performance mode A. In the case of such a configuration, by switching the production mode, the production characteristics related to the suggestion of the degree of expectation of the big win change, so compared to the case where only the appearance is changed by changing the background image or the character image, etc. It can make a strong impression on people.

However, on the other hand, when the condition for switching from the production mode A to the production mode B is satisfied in a situation where the holding image is in the specific display mode, the production mode is changed while the display form of the target holding image HW is maintained. When switching is performed, there is a concern that only the corresponding degree of expectation will change even though the display mode does not change. For example, even if it is a specific display mode of the same green display mode HMc, the degree of expectation in the production mode B is higher than that in the production mode A, so the display mode of the target holding image HW is set to the green display mode HMc. When the effect mode A is switched to the effect mode B until the player understands the degree of expectation of the green display mode HMc based on the degree of expectation in the effect mode B after the mode switching, the game actually performed in the game round There is a possibility that a higher degree of expectation may be associated with the performance (such as the ready-to-reach performance).

In this regard, in this configuration, when the production mode is switched in a situation where the holding image is in the specific display form, the display form of the target holding image HW is the same as the display form in the production mode before switching. determine whether or not to For this reason, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconsistency in the degree of expectation, and it is possible to preferably display the image for holding after the transition to the effect mode B is performed.

The display mode of the target holding image HW at the time of transition to the production mode B is compared with the upper limit display mode set corresponding to the production mode B, and based on the result, the display form of the target holding image HW is changed to the mode. It is configured to determine whether or not the display mode is the same as the display mode before switching.

In the above configuration, by comparing the display mode at the time of transition to the production mode B and the upper limit display mode set corresponding to the production mode B, it is determined whether or not the display mode can be the same as the display mode in the production mode A. be done. As a result, it is possible to sort whether or not each aspect (blue display aspect HMb, etc.) in the production mode B is the same aspect based on the corresponding expectation level, and display the holding image after the transition to the production mode B can be preferably performed.

In the above case, a plurality of upper limit display modes in the production mode B are set corresponding to each variation pattern, and among them, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the variation pattern read ahead for the target holding image HW is applied. It is configured to perform judgment. As a result, based on the result of the pre-reading of the target holding image HW, that is, the winning result actually notified in the game round of the target holding image HW and the game round production (ready production etc.) performed in the game round It can be sorted whether or not to use the same mode.

When the display mode of the target holding image HW in the production mode B is the same as the display mode in the production mode A before mode switching, the normal display form HMa of the target holding image HW is changed to the same form. and

In the above configuration, when the display mode of the target holding image HW is to be the same as before mode switching, it is possible to change the display mode from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode. By adopting such a configuration, the display mode of the target holding image HW is switched from the production mode A to the production mode B in both the case of making the same form as before the mode switching and the case of not making the same form. Accordingly, the display mode can be switched to the normal display mode HMa. This makes it possible to reduce unnaturalness when the specific display mode is changed to the normal display mode HMa due to the determination that the same mode should not be used. In addition, by adopting a configuration in which the normal display mode HMa is changed to the specific display mode, even when it is determined that the same mode is not used, the normal display mode HMa is maintained after the transition to the production mode B, even if it is determined not to be the same mode. It is possible to arouse the expectation that the reserved image will be changed to the specific display mode, and to maintain the expectation for the reserved image (holding information).

In the case of switching from production mode B to production mode A, the display mode of the target holding image in production mode A after mode switching is the same as the display form in production mode A before mode switching without performing the above determination. It was configured as a mode.

In the above configuration, in the case of mode switching from a side with a high expectation level to a low side with respect to the suspension notice effect, it is not determined whether or not the same mode is to be used. As a result, the continuation of the suspension notice effect (maintenance of the specific display mode of the suspension image) can be prevented from being excessively restricted, and the processing load can be reduced.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, the display mode of the holding image before and after the effect mode switching is targeted, but in the present embodiment, the display mode of the holding image before and after the opening/closing execution mode is targeted. The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 59 to 67. FIG. In these figures, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as in the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this embodiment, the variable display time table in the case of high probability mode and high frequency support mode (high certainty gaming state), and the variable display time in the case of low probability mode and high frequency support mode (time reduction gaming state) The table is set separately from the variable display time table (FIG. 14) for the low probability mode and low frequency support mode (normal game state).

As shown in FIGS. 59(a) and 59(b), the variable display time table for the high-probability gaming state is set for big hits and for misses, respectively. In the variation display time table for the big win, a variation pattern 11A corresponding to the SPSP reach A hit and a variation pattern 12A corresponding to the SPSP reach B hit are set in association with the value of the variation type counter CS.

In addition, in the fluctuation display time table for failure, the fluctuation pattern 11H corresponding to complete failure, the fluctuation pattern 12H corresponding to SPSP reach A failure, and the SPSP reach B failure correspond to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. A variation pattern 13H is set. When the value of the variation type counter CS is within the range of 0 to 79, in the normal game state, either complete out (variation pattern 1H) or normal reach out (variation pattern 2H) corresponds (Fig. 14 (b) ), in the high-probability gaming state, only complete deviation (fluctuation pattern 11H) corresponds (FIG. 59(b)). In other words, even if the fluctuation type counter CS has the same value, different game spin effects can be performed in the normal game state and the high certainty game state.

As shown in FIGS. 59(c) and 59(d), the variable display time table for the time-saving gaming state is set for a big hit and for a loss. In the variation display time table for big hits, the variation pattern 21A corresponding to the SP reach A hit, the variation pattern 22A corresponding to the SP reach B hit, and the SP SP reach A hit are corresponded to the value of the variation type counter CS. and a variation pattern 24A corresponding to the SPSP reach B hit are set.

In addition, in the fluctuation display time table for loss, the fluctuation pattern 21H corresponding to complete loss, the fluctuation pattern 22H corresponding to SP reach A loss, and the SP reach B loss correspond to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. A variation pattern 23H corresponding to SPSP reach A deviation, a variation pattern 24H corresponding to SPSP reach A deviation, and a variation pattern 25H corresponding to SPSP reach B deviation are set. Also in the variable display time table for the time-saving game state, when the variable type counter CS is set to the same value and compared, different game round effects can be performed in the normal game state and the high-certainty game state. In the variable display time table for loss corresponding to the time-saving game state, the percentage of complete loss is less than in other game states, but this is because the reach effect occurs by increasing the frequency of occurrence of the reach effect. This is to prevent the time saving game state from ending without doing so.

It should be noted that the correspondence relationship between the number of types of variation patterns and the value of the variation type counter CS in each variation display time table shown in FIG. Other modes may be used as long as they are set.

<Setting processing for hold notice>
Setting processing for holding notice according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This processing is executed when the performance control device 143 receives a hold command from the main control device 162 . This process is executed in step S1403 of the pending command handling process (FIG. 31), and is executed in place of the pending notice setting process in FIG. In FIG. 60, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 34, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, at step S1501, based on the hold information stored at step S1401 of the hold command handling process (FIG. 31), the change pattern information and the like for the hold information of this time is grasped. In step S1502, it is determined whether or not the current pending information corresponds to a big hit based on the variation pattern information and the like grasped in step S1501.

If it does not correspond to a big hit, that is, if it is the reservation information corresponding to the loss, the process proceeds to step S3301, and the change pattern of the reservation information is the change pattern 1H (variation pattern corresponding to the complete loss in the normal game state) , variation pattern 11H (variation pattern corresponding to complete loss in high certainty game state), variation pattern 21H (variation pattern corresponding to complete loss in time saving game state). If a negative determination is made in step S3301 (if neither variation pattern 1H, variation pattern 11H, or variation pattern 21H) or if affirmative determination is made in step S1502 (if it is reservation information corresponding to the jackpot), in step S3302 To grasp the current game state. Concretely, it grasps whether the current game state is a normal game state, a high certainty game state, or a time-saving game state.

In step S3303, the corresponding pending notice execution lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 343a of the ROM343. A plurality of pending notice execution lottery tables are set corresponding to the presence or absence of a big win and the game state. For example, the reservation notice execution lottery table corresponding to the case where the reservation information of this time is a jackpot is set to have a higher winning probability than the reservation notice execution lottery table corresponding to the case of being out. In addition, in the holding notice execution lottery table that corresponds to the high certainty gaming state and corresponds to the case where the holding information of this time is out, normal gaming state and time saving game The probability of winning is set lower than that of the holding notice execution lottery table corresponding to the state and corresponding to the case where the holding information of this time is out.

It should be noted that it is not always necessary to make the execution probabilities of the pending notice effect different corresponding to the game state, and the execution probability of the pending notice effect may be made common in the above three states or two states among them.

In step S1506, based on the holding notice execution lottery table acquired in step S3303 and the lottery counter (random value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344, the execution lottery for whether or not to execute the holding notice effect. I do. In step S1507, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S1506 is a winning result. If the result of this lottery is execution winning, the process advances to step S1508 to grasp the corresponding pending number.

In step S3304, the final display mode lottery table corresponding to the current gaming state is acquired from the various table storage area 343a of the ROM343. In the final display mode lottery table, the range of selectable final display modes and the selection probability of each display mode are set in association with each variation pattern. In this embodiment, since different variation patterns are set according to the game state, the final display mode lottery table is also set individually corresponding to each game state.

FIG. 61 shows a big win table and a losing table as examples of final display mode lottery tables in the high-probability gaming state. In addition, FIG. 62 shows a table for big hits and a table for wins as an example of final display mode lottery tables in the time-saving gaming state.

In step S1510, based on the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S1501, the final display mode lottery table acquired in step S3304, and the lottery counter (random value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344, the current hold A lottery is drawn for the final display mode in the advance notice performance. At step S1511, the effect scenario lottery table is obtained from the table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. FIG. In step S1512, the number of reservations grasped in step S1508, the final display mode determined in step S1510, the effect scenario lottery table acquired in step S1511, and the lottery counter (random value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344 ), a production scenario for this pending notice production is drawn.

At step S1513, the effect scenario data is set so that the effect scenario selected at step S1512 is executed. In step S1514, a hold notice flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344, and then the hold notice setting process is terminated. The suspension notice flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp that the suspension notice effect should be executed.

When the holding notice setting process is performed as described above, step S1404 of the holding command handling process (FIG. 31) and step S1701 of the shift time command handling process (FIG. 40) are performed based on the setting result of step S1513. , The display mode of the target holding image is changed in the first execution process (FIG. 38) of the holding notice in step S1807 of the special figure fluctuation display process (FIG. 41).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3301 (if the change pattern of the hold information is the change pattern of the completely outlier pair), the process advances to step S1515 to set the display mode of the hold image to the normal display mode HMa. After that, the holding notice setting process is terminated.

<Processing for open/close execution mode>
The opening/closing execution mode processing according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This process is executed in step S1306 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30).

First, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is being executed. If the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, it is determined in step S3402 whether an opening command (step S909 in FIG. 25) has been received from the main controller 162, that is, whether it is time to start the opening/closing execution mode. judge. If the opening command has not been received, the opening/closing execution mode processing is terminated.

If an opening command has been received, the flow advances to step S3403 to execute opening processing. In the opening processing, a transmission command to the display control device 350 is set so that a predetermined opening effect is executed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 or the like.

In step S3404, it is determined whether or not the number of reservations (total number of special 1 reservations and special 2 reservations) is 0, that is, whether or not reservations exist. If the pending number is 0 (no pending), the opening/closing execution mode processing is terminated.

If the number of reservations is not 0 and there is a reservation, the process advances to step S3405 to determine whether or not a reservation notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. If the suspension notice flag is stored, the suspension notice flag is erased in step S3406. As a result, if the pending notice effect is being executed before the start of the open/close execution mode, the continuation of the pending notice effect being executed is canceled, and if it is in the standby state of the pending notice effect, the pending notice effect waiting (execution reservation) is canceled.

In step S3407, it is determined whether or not there is a holding image displayed in a specific display mode. Specifically, among the holding images displayed in the holding display areas Ga and Gb, the Determines whether the displayed item exists. This determination is made by referring to the information of each area stored in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344. FIG.

If there is an on-hold image displayed in the specific display mode, the process advances to step S3408 to store information indicating in which mode the on-hold image displayed in the specific display mode is displayed in the RAM 344 for recovery. Store in area 344f. In the subsequent step S3409, information indicating the game state before the open/close execution mode is stored in the RAM344. For example, when the game state before the opening/closing execution mode is the normal game state, information corresponding to the normal game state is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 344 . This information is stored in a storage area separate from the flag in order to distinguish it from the status flag indicating the current gaming status.

In step S3410, a return standby flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d. The standby flag for return is for the MPU 342 to recognize that it is in a state of waiting for return processing for returning the display mode of the image for suspension to the original specific display mode. In the subsequent step S3411, a process of erasing the holding image from the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, the suspending image displayed on the suspending display section 200 is erased when the opening/closing execution mode is started. After execution of step S3411, the open/close execution mode process is terminated.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step S3405 (if the suspension notice flag is not stored) or if a negative determination is made in step S3407 (if there is no suspension image in the specific display mode), the process proceeds to step S3411. Execute image erasure processing. That is, even when the suspension notice effect is not being executed, the suspension image of the suspension display section 200 is erased with the start of the opening/closing execution mode.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3401 (if the opening/closing execution mode is in progress), the process advances to step S3412 to determine whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the ending effect. If it has not passed, the processing for the open/close execution mode is executed in step S3413, and then the processing for the open/close execution mode is terminated. In the open/close execution mode intermediate processing, a transmission command to the display control device 350 is set so that a predetermined round effect, winning effect, ending effect, etc. are executed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 or the like.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3412 (if a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the ending effect), the process proceeds to step S3414 to determine whether or not a return standby flag is stored in the flag storage area 344d. If the standby flag for return is not stored, the opening/closing execution mode processing is terminated.

If the standby flag for return is stored, the process advances to step S3415 to execute processing for erasing the standby flag for return. Here, a situation in which an affirmative determination is made in step S3414 means a situation in which the opening/closing execution mode is performed while the suspension notice effect is being executed, and the display of the suspension image is erased. In this case, the process advances to step S3416 to execute setting processing for advance notice return for returning the display mode of the image for suspension to the specific display mode. Details of the processing will be described later.

After execution of step S3416, setting for displaying the holding image in the normal display mode HMa is performed in step S3417. That is, when the display mode of the holding image is returned to the specific display mode, immediately after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the display mode of the holding image is resumed in the normal display mode HMa. After execution of step S3417, the open/close execution mode process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S3414 (if the standby flag for return is not stored), the process proceeds to step S3418 to determine whether the number of pending items (total number of special 1 and special 2 pending) is 0 do. If the pending number is 0 and there is no pending, the opening/closing execution mode processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the pending number is not 0 and there is pending, the pending images for those pending are displayed in the normal display mode HMa in step S3417.

<Setting processing for advance notice return>
The setting processing for advance notice return in step S3416 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S3501, the game state before the opening/closing execution mode is grasped. This understanding is performed based on the information stored in step S3409 (FIG. 63). In step S3502, the jackpot type of the jackpot that triggered the opening/closing execution mode of this time is grasped. This grasping is performed based on the hold information obtained by analyzing the fluctuation start command.

In step S3503, the display mode is restored based on the game state before the open/close execution mode grasped in step S3501, the jackpot type grasped in step S3502, and the return determination table stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. make judgments for use. The determination for return determines whether or not the holding image, which was set to the specific display mode in the game state before the opening/closing execution mode, is returned to the original display mode in the game state after the opening/closing execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 65, in the return determination table, the game state before the opening/closing execution mode and the jackpot type that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time are made to correspond to each other, and whether the return of the display mode is allowed or not. It is determined whether or not Specifically, if the game state before the opening/closing execution mode is a time-saving game state and the jackpot type is a normal jackpot, or if the game state before the opening/closing execution mode is a high-probability game state and the jackpot type is a variable jackpot As in some cases, when the game state is common before and after the opening/closing execution mode, restoration of the display mode of the holding image is permitted. On the other hand, if the game state before the opening/closing execution mode is a time-saving game state and the jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot, or if the game state before the opening/closing execution mode is a high-probability game state and the jackpot type is a normal jackpot, When the game state before and after the opening/closing execution mode is different, such as when the game state before the opening/closing execution mode is the normal game state and the jackpot type is the time-saving game state, the restoration of the display mode is regulated.

However, if the game state before the opening/closing execution mode is the normal game state and the jackpot type is the variable probability jackpot, the read-ahead result of the target holding image is referred to determine whether or not the return is possible. Specifically, when the look-ahead result of the target holding image is a result other than a normal jackpot, the return of the display mode is regulated, and when the look-ahead result of the target holding image is a normal jackpot, the display mode allow the return of This is to prevent the high-probability game state from ending before the player can fully enjoy the game in the high-probability game state.

That is, if the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is the normal game state and the jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot, the game of the first special figure (left-handed game state) to the second special figure across the opening and closing execution mode The game mode is switched to the game (right-handed game state), but at that time, there is usually a jackpot in the hold of the first special figure, and when the hold is digested, it is possible to shift to the high-accuracy game state. Even if it could, the state would end prematurely. Therefore, if there is such a possibility, the display mode of the first special holding image is returned to the specific display mode to alert the player, and the second operation port 63 (the start port for the second special ) to encourage prompt prize-winning.

In the present embodiment, the return of the display mode is restricted when the result of the prefetch of the target hold image is a variable probability jackpot, but this may be allowed.

Returning to the description of the setting process for advance notice return (FIG. 64), after execution of step S3503, in step S3504, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination process in step S3503 permits the return of the display mode. If the return is not permitted, the process for setting the advance notice return is terminated. In other words, the display mode of the target holding image after the opening/closing execution mode remains the normal display mode HMa.

If return is permitted, the return area 344f of the RAM 344 is referred to in step S3505 to grasp the display mode of the target holding image before the opening/closing execution mode. After executing step S3505, the processing of steps S3506 to S3510 is executed.

These processes are the same as steps S2103 to S2107 in FIG. 43, and the display mode of the target suspension image is changed to the original display at any timing in correspondence with the number of suspensions before the target suspension image. It sets whether to return to the mode. That is, in step S3506, grasp the pending number before the target holding image, if the grasped pending number is 1 or more, in step S3508, return scenario when the display mode grasped in step S3505 lottery. In step S3509, return scenario data is set so that the selected return scenario is executed. The notice return flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp that the process for restoring the display mode of the holding image should be executed.

When the setting process for the notice return is performed as described above, the second execution process (FIG. 44) of the hold notice in step S1702 of the shift time command correspondence process (FIG. 40 (a)) and the special figure fluctuation In the third execution process (FIG. 45) of the suspension notice in step S1808 of the display process (FIG. 41), the display mode of the target suspension image is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode. At this time, in the second execution process of the suspension notice, the process is executed so as to restore the display mode of the target suspension image to the original specific display mode (the specific display mode before the open/close execution mode).

Further, in the third execution process of the hold notice, the current display mode of the target hold image in the game round of the target hold image (display mode restored by the return process) and the change pattern of the target hold image is compared with the corresponding upper limit display mode, and it is determined whether or not change (promotion) to a higher display mode is possible. Then, when such a change is possible, promotion processing of the display mode is performed through promotion determination and promotion lottery.

<Regarding the display mode of the holding image before and after the open/close execution mode>
The display mode of the holding image before and after the opening/closing execution mode will be described. Here, when the game state before the opening/closing execution mode is the time-saving game state, the normal jackpot is achieved, and after the opening/closing execution mode, the game state shifts to the time-saving game state, and when the game state before the opening/closing execution mode is the time-saving game state. A probability variable jackpot will be described as an example, and the case of shifting to a probability variable gaming state after the opening and closing execution mode will be described.

First, a case in which the game state before the opening/closing execution mode is the time-saving game state is normally a jackpot, and the game state shifts to the time-saving game state after the opening/closing execution mode will be described with reference to FIG.

When the third hold information of the second special figure occurs in the situation of the time-saving game state, the hold prefetching process (step S305) by the main control device 162 is performed, and the reservation notice for the production control device 143 is performed. Setting processing (step S1403) is performed. As a result, when the suspension notice effect with the display mode in the green display mode HMc is to be executed, as shown in FIG. 66(a), the suspension image HW with the display mode in the green display mode HMc is displayed in the third unit reserved display area Gb3 of the second reserved display area Gb.

In the game cycle in which the holding image HW is obtained, the result is a normal jackpot, and when the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the display of all the holding images including the holding image HW is erased, as shown in FIG. 66(b). . This state is maintained until a predetermined period elapses from the start of the ending effect.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the ending effect, the effect control device 143 executes setting processing for return of notice (step S3416), and changes the display mode of the holding image HW to the specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode. A decision for return is made as to whether or not to return. In the determination for return, the game state before the opening/closing execution mode and the game state after the opening/closing execution mode are compared to determine whether or not they match. When the normal jackpot result is obtained in the time-saving game state, the game state after the opening/closing execution mode becomes the time-saving game state, so that the game state before the opening/closing execution mode matches the game state after the opening/closing execution mode. In this case, returning to the specific display mode is allowed, and a lottery for the return scenario is performed.

As a result, if a scenario for returning to the green display mode HMc at the second shift timing after the opening/closing execution mode is selected, as shown in FIG. is changed to the normal display mode HMa, the display of each holding image is resumed.

After that, at the timing of the first shift from the third unit reserved display area Gb3 to the second unit reserved display area Gb2, as shown in FIG. be done. Then, at the second shift timing from the second unit reserved display area Gb2 to the first unit reserved display area Gb1, the display mode of the reservation image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the green display mode HMc.

Next, the game state before the opening/closing execution mode becomes a probability variable jackpot in the situation where the game state is the time saving game state, and the case where the probability variable game state is shifted after the opening/closing execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. 67 .

When the third hold information of the second special figure occurs in the situation of the time-saving game state, the hold prefetching process (step S305) by the main control device 162 is performed, and the reservation notice for the production control device 143 is performed. Setting processing (step S1403) is performed. As a result, when the suspension notice effect with the display mode as the green display mode HMc is to be executed, as shown in FIG. 67(a), the suspension image HW with the display mode as the green display mode HMc is displayed in the third unit reserved display area Gb3 of the second reserved display area Gb.

When the probability variable jackpot result is obtained in the game round in which the holding image HW is acquired, and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the display of all the holding images including the holding image HW is erased, as shown in FIG. 67(b). .

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the ending effect, the effect control device 143 executes setting processing for return of notice (step S3416) to determine for return. When the probability variable jackpot results in the time-saving game state, the game state after the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high-probability game state, so the game state before the opening/closing execution mode and the game state after the opening/closing execution mode do not match. In this case, returning to the specific display mode is not permitted, and the returning process is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 67(c), at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the display of each holding image is resumed in a state where the display mode of the holding image HW is changed to the normal display mode HMa. After that, the display mode of the suspension image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa during the period until the suspension image HW is shifted to the execution display area D. In other words, if the game state before the opening/closing execution mode and the game state after the opening/closing execution mode are different, basically the pending notice effect performed before the opening/closing execution mode is canceled, and the same hold after the opening/closing execution mode. The suspension notice effect for the image HW is not executed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67(d), the display position of the holding image HW in the normal display mode HMa is shifted to the execution display area D, and when the game round of the holding image HW is started, effect control is performed. The device 143 executes the third execution process (step S1808) of the suspension notice, and determines the promotion to a higher display mode. As a result, when a lottery is drawn for promotion to a higher display mode, the display mode of the holding image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode, as shown in FIG. 67(e). FIG. 67(e) shows a case where the display mode of the holding image HW is upgraded to the green display mode HMc.

Next, a description will be given of a case where the game state before the opening/closing execution mode is the normal game state, and the probability variable jackpot occurs, and the game state shifts to the high-accuracy game state after the opening/closing execution mode.

In this case, since the game state before the opening/closing execution mode and the game state after the opening/closing execution mode do not match, if the above example is applied, the display mode of the holding image HW will not be restored after the opening/closing execution mode. . However, when switching from a low-probability game state (left-handed game) aiming to win a prize to the first operation port 62 to a high-probability game state (right-handed game) to aim to win a prize to the second operation port 63, an image for holding It is switched whether to restore the display mode based on the prefetch result of the hold information corresponding to HW.

Specifically, when the prefetch result of the hold information corresponding to the hold image HW is the normal jackpot result, the display mode of the hold image HW is restored after the opening/closing execution mode. That is, when the first special figure has the reservation information that usually results in a big hit, when the game round of the reservation information is executed, it is possible to move to the high-accuracy game state. Since the state ends early, the display mode is changed to a specific display mode in order to encourage the winning of the second operation opening 63 .

In this case, instead of changing from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode, the holding image HW may be displayed in the specific display mode from the beginning. It is expected that the player's awareness will be promoted by using a display form different from the case where the display form is restored when the game state before the opening/closing execution mode and the game state after the opening/closing execution mode match. be. In addition, by displaying in the specific display mode from the beginning, there is an advantage that the player can quickly and easily perceive that the first special figure has hold information that usually results in a big hit, and can easily respond.

On the other hand, if the prefetch result of the hold information corresponding to the hold image HW is a result other than the normal jackpot result, the display mode of the hold image HW is not restored after the open/close execution mode in principle.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

When the opening/closing execution mode is entered in a situation where the target holding image HW is in a specific display mode (a situation in which the holding notice effect is being executed), the game state before the opening/closing execution mode and the game state after the opening/closing execution mode are changed. is different, the display mode of the object holding image HW after the opening/closing execution mode is made different from the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the holding image is set to the specific display mode based on the result of the holding prefetch process, so that the player's expectation for the big win result is aroused before the start of the game cycle. be able to. Further, a plurality of types of game states are set as the game state, and when the opening/closing execution mode is executed as a result of a big win, the game state is shifted to one of the plurality of types of game states. In this way, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of game states are provided, even if the hold information used for winning/failure determination is the same, there are differences in the winning/failing results and game round effects (ready-to-win effects, etc.) depending on the game state. may occur.

In this regard, in this configuration, if the game state before and after execution of the opening/closing execution mode is different for the object holding image HW that has been set to the specific display mode before execution of the opening/closing execution mode, the display after the opening/closing execution mode is performed. Since the mode is different from the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode, even if the award determination result, the game round performance, etc. due to the difference in the game state change, the image for holding the object HW misleads the player. is suppressed, and it becomes possible to suitably display the holding image in the game state after the opening/closing execution mode.

When the opening/closing execution mode is entered in a situation where the target holding image HW is in a specific display mode (a situation in which the holding notice effect is being executed), the game state before the opening/closing execution mode and the game state after the opening/closing execution mode are changed. The display mode of the object holding image HW after the opening/closing execution mode is made different depending on whether it is the same or not.

As described above, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of game states are provided, even if the hold information used for winning or failing determination is the same, the result of winning or losing depending on the game state and the game round effect (ready-to-win effect etc.) differences may occur. In this regard, in this configuration, the display mode in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is changed to the display mode in the game state after the opening/closing execution mode for the target holding image HW that has been set to the specific display mode before execution of the opening/closing execution mode. Since the game state is made different depending on whether the game state is the same or not, the display mode can be set based on the result of win/fail determination caused by the difference in the game state and the change in the game round production, and the game state after the open/close execution mode. It is possible to suitably display the holding image in .

When the game state before the opening/closing execution mode and the game state after the opening/closing execution mode are different, the display mode of the target holding image HW in the game state after the opening/closing execution mode is set to the normal display mode HMa.

With the above configuration, it is possible to preferably prevent misunderstanding by the player caused by displaying a holding image that does not match the actual degree of expectation after the opening/closing execution mode. Further, by uniformly setting the normal display mode HMa, it is possible to eliminate the need for fine adjustment of the display mode in accordance with changes in the degree of expectation, and it is possible to simplify the processing configuration.

When the display mode of the target holding image HW is set to the normal display mode HMa based on the difference between the game state before the opening/closing execution mode and the game state after the opening/closing execution mode, after that, the target holding image HW is displayed. It is determined whether or not the display mode of is promoted to a higher display mode (specific display mode), and based on the result, the display mode of the target holding image HW is changed.

When the game state before the opening/closing execution mode and the game state after the opening/closing execution mode are different, by changing the display mode of the target holding image HW in the game state after the opening/closing execution mode to the normal display mode HMa, the game state is changed. Although it is possible to absorb the change in the result of the success/failure determination and the effect of the game cycle due to the change, there is a concern that the expectation level of the hold information corresponding to the target hold image HW cannot be notified or suggested. In this regard, in the present configuration, since the target holding image HW set to the normal display mode HMa is given an opportunity to change to the specific display mode after that, when the specific display mode is changed to the normal display mode HMa Even if it is, it can be promoted to the specific display mode after the fact, and it becomes possible to notify the degree of expectation.

In the above case, when the game progresses to the game round of the target holding image HW set to the normal display mode HMa, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the target holding image HW is promoted to the specific display mode, The configuration is such that the promotion is executed based on the results.

By elevating the display mode of the target holding image HW after the game round of the target holding image HW is started, the information on the success/failure determination acquired and transmitted at the start of the game round and the information on the game round production are utilized. promotion can be determined by Since these pieces of information correspond to the game state after the opening/closing execution mode, the above-mentioned promotion can be performed in a manner suitable for the game state after the opening/closing execution mode. Instead, it is possible to change the display mode of the target holding image HW set to the normal display mode HMa after the opening/closing execution mode to the specific display mode.

In particular, by determining whether or not the target holding image HW is promoted to the specific display mode, based on the variation pattern specified by the execution of the success/failure determination (start of the game cycle) in the main controller 162, The propriety of promotion can be determined using the same information as that used for selecting the game round effect in the game round of the target holding image HW. As a result, when the game state before the opening/closing execution mode and the game state after the opening/closing execution mode are different, the target holding image HW is adapted to the game-turn performance actually performed in the game turn after the opening/closing execution mode. can be changed to a specific display mode.

In addition, by adopting the above configuration, after the opening/closing execution mode is finished, the game state after the opening/closing execution mode can be handled solely for the purpose of determining whether or not to promote the target holding image HW to the specific display mode. It is possible to avoid adding a dedicated process for transmitting a variation pattern (information on the result of success or failure determination and game round production). That is, when executing the game round of the target holding image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, the special figure display unit 43 changes the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. In order to execute in synchronization with the special game round, it is necessary to transmit a fluctuation start command from the main control device 162 to the production control device 143, and a configuration that executes promotion determination by utilizing this fluctuation start command By doing so, it is not necessary to notify the effect control device 143 from the main control device 162 of the variation pattern corresponding to the game state after the opening/closing execution mode by a dedicated command different from the variation start command. Therefore, it is not only possible to perform promotion determination using the existing processing configuration in the main control device 162, but also in the production control device 143, it is not necessary to install a processing configuration when receiving such a dedicated command. , the complication of the processing configuration can be suppressed.

Information corresponding to the notification mode of the image for holding when the holding notice effect is performed can be stored in the return area 344f of the RAM 344, and the game state before the opening/closing execution mode and the game state after the opening/closing execution mode are the same. In some cases, the display mode of the target holding image HW in the game state after the opening/closing execution mode is set based on the information stored in the return area 344f.

For example, if the display mode of the target holding image HW in the game state after the opening/closing execution mode is set based on the result of the holding prefetch process performed before the opening/closing execution mode, the display form before the opening/closing execution mode is set. is set to a different display mode. In this regard, in this configuration, when the opening/closing execution mode is executed in a situation where there is a holding image in a specific display mode, information on the display mode at that time is stored, and opening/closing is performed based on the stored information. Since the information display form after the execution mode is set, the display form after the opening/closing execution mode can be preferably returned to the original form before the opening/closing execution mode.

By returning to the original form before the opening/closing execution mode in this way, the target holding image HW (holding information) that aroused the player's expectation by changing to the specific display form before the opening/closing execution mode can be opened/closed. Even after the mode, it is possible to arouse expectations in the same way.

When the game state before the opening/closing execution mode and the game state after the opening/closing execution mode are the same, the display mode of the target holding image HW in the game state after the opening/closing execution mode is the same as the specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode. In the case of using the mode, the configuration is such that once the normal display mode HMa can be changed to the specific display mode.

In this case, regardless of whether or not the game state after the opening/closing execution mode and the game state before the opening/closing execution mode are the same, the display mode of the target holding image HW changes as the opening/closing execution mode is executed. The specific display mode can be changed to the normal display mode HMa. As a result, it is possible to reduce the unnaturalness when the display mode is changed to the normal display mode HMa due to the difference in the game state. Further, by causing an event to change from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode, even if the game state is different, in the game state after the opening/closing execution mode, the holding mode is changed to the normal display mode HMa. The expectation that the image will be changed to the specific display mode can be aroused, and the expectation for the suspension image (suspension information) can be maintained.

At the end of the opening/closing execution mode, it is determined whether or not the game state before the opening/closing execution mode is the same as the game state after the opening/closing execution mode.

In this case, after the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to promptly respond to the display form of the target holding image HW after the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, after the opening/closing execution mode, even in a situation where the number of holds before the target holding image HW is small, the display mode of the target holding image HW can be preferably adjusted.

The holding image is hidden during execution of the opening/closing execution mode.

When changing the display mode of the object holding image HW with the end of the opening and closing execution mode, if the object holding image HW that has been performed so far is suddenly changed to another display form at the end of the opening and closing execution mode, the game There is concern that people may get an unnatural impression. In particular, when downgrading to the normal display mode HMa, it is assumed that it is likely to be noticeable to the player and likely to give an unnatural impression. In this regard, in this configuration, since the holding image is not displayed in the open/close execution mode, when changing the display mode of the target holding image HW, the display of the holding image itself including other holding images is changed. It is possible to interpose a period during which it is not performed. As a result, conspicuousness of the change in the display mode is suppressed, and the unnaturalness can be alleviated. In addition, there is also the advantage that it is easier to draw the player's attention to the effect for the opening/closing execution mode (jackpot game effect) by hiding the holding image.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the above-described fourth embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode for the holding image in the specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode is determined according to the relationship between the game state before the opening/closing execution mode and the game state after the opening/closing execution mode. In this embodiment, after the opening/closing execution mode, pre-reading processing is executed again for the hold image that has been set to the specific display manner before the opening/closing execution mode, and based on the result of the pre-reading process. It is configured to determine the display mode of the holding image. The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 68 to 76. FIG. In these figures, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as in the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Processing performed by the MPU 312 of the main controller 162 will be described.

<Information Acquisition Processing>
Information acquisition processing according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This process is executed when a prize has been won in the operation openings 62 and 63 (executed in step S205 of the operation opening winning process (FIG. 17)). It is executed instead. In FIG. 68(a), the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 18, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

At step S304, after each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding reservation area for the special figure display section, the setting process of the reserve command is executed at step S4101. . After executing step S4101, the information acquisition process ends. The pending command setting process in step S4101 will now be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 68(b).

First, in step S4201, the start holding storage numbers RaN and RbN stored in the holding areas Ra and Rb of the holding ball storage area 314b and the common holding number CRN stored in the total holding number storage area of the holding ball storage area 314b. and stored in the registers of the MPU 312 . In steps S4202 to S4204, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the hold information acquired in step S304 (FIG. 68(a)) based on the current winning to the first operation port 62 or the second operation port 63 ( Random number for success/failure determination), value of jackpot type counter C2 (random number for lottery of jackpot type), value of fluctuation type counter CS (random number for lottery of fluctuation pattern) are grasped respectively. The processing of steps S4201 to S4204 is the same as the processing of steps S1202, S1205, and S1208 of the pending prefetch processing (FIG. 28) according to the first embodiment.

In continuing step S4205, a pending|holding command is set as an output object to the production|presentation control apparatus 143, and the setting process of a pending|holding command is complete|finished after that. In the hold command, in addition to information indicating whether the hold information of this time corresponds to the first special figure or the second special figure, the values of various counters C1, C2, and CS grasped in the above steps S4202 to S4204 It contains information that indicates

That is, in the above-described first embodiment, in the pending look-ahead process (FIG. 28), based on the values of the various counters C1, C2, and CS grasped, the success/failure determination process and the fluctuation pattern lottery process are performed, and the result is Although it was configured to be included in the pending command and transmitted to the effect control device 143, in the present embodiment, instead of the result of the winning determination process and the variation pattern lottery process, the information of various counters C1, C2, and CS grasped ( It is configured to transmit to the production control device 143 by including the random number information) in the hold command.

Processing performed by the MPU 342 of the effect control device 143 will be described.

<Processing for pending command>
A pending command handling process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This process is executed when a hold command is received from the main control device 162 (executed in step S1302 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30)), instead of the hold command handling process of FIG. It is executed. In FIG. 69, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 31, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In step S1402, after incrementing the value of the pending number counter (starting pending storage number SN) provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344 by 1, the flow advances to step S4301 to execute the first pending prefetch process. The first pending prefetching process is a pending prefetching process performed by the effect control device 143, and based on the information of various counters C1, C2, and CS included in the pending command from the main control device 162, is acquired by the occurrence of the start winning. It pre-reads the result of the judgment of whether or not the hold information has been received. Here, the first pending prefetch processing in step S4301 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S4401, the current game state is grasped. Concretely, it grasps whether the current game state is a normal game state, a high certainty game state, or a time-saving game state. In step S4402, the pending command from the main controller 162 is analyzed, and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the pending information of this time is grasped. In step S4403, the right/wrong determination table is acquired from the various table storage area 343a of the ROM343.

In this embodiment, as the success/failure determination table for the effect control device 143, the same table data as the success/failure determination table stored in the ROM 313 (success/failure table storage area 313a) of the main controller 162 is stored. In addition, the jackpot type table (FIG. 13) and the fluctuation display time stored in the ROM 313 of the main controller 162 are stored in the ROM 313 of the main controller 162 as well as the jackpot type table for lottery of the jackpot type and the fluctuation display time table for lottery of the fluctuation pattern. The same table data as the table (FIGS. 14 and 59) are stored. Therefore, even if these lottery processes are performed by the production control device 143 separately from the win/fail lottery and the variation pattern lottery by the main control device 162, the same lottery result can be obtained if the random number used for the lottery is the same value. It is designed to be

In the success/failure determination table, the success/failure determination table for the low probability mode (normal game state, time-saving game state) and the success/failure table for the high probability mode (high probability game state) are set separately, so step S4403. Then, a table corresponding to the game state ascertained in step S4401 is acquired.

In step S4404, as a pre-reading process of whether or not it is a big hit, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 grasped in step S4402 and the success/failure determination table acquired in step S4403 are used to determine the success or failure, and the success result is grasped. . In step S4405, it is determined whether or not the winning result ascertained in step S4404 is a jackpot winning. If the jackpot is won, in step S4406, the hold command from the main controller 162 is analyzed, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the hold information of this time is grasped.

In step S4407, as a jackpot type pre-reading process, a jackpot type lottery is performed based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped in step S4406 and the type table stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343, and the type lottery. to understand the results of At this time, if the reservation information is based on the winning of the first operation opening 62, the type table for the first special figure is referred to, and if the reservation information is based on the winning of the second operation opening 63, the second 2 Refer to the type table for special figures.

In step S4408, the jackpot information as information indicating the jackpot result grasped in step S4404 and the type information as information indicating the jackpot type result grasped in step S4407 are stored. These pieces of information are stored in corresponding areas in the reserved storage area 344c of the RAM 344 (FIG. 32).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the processing of steps S4406 and S4407 may be omitted because the prediction result of the big hit type is not reflected in the suspension notice effect.

After execution of step S4408 or if a negative determination is made in step S4405 (if not jackpot winning), in step S4409, the hold command from the main controller 162 is analyzed, and the value of the variation type counter CS in this hold information is changed grasp. In step S4410, based on the gaming state grasped in step S4401 and the result of the winning lottery grasped in step S4404, the corresponding variable display time table is acquired from the various table storage area 343a of the ROM343. For example, when the current gaming state is the time-saving game state and the result of grasping in step S4404 is the result of the loss, the change display time table for loss for the time-saving game state (FIG. 59(d)) is obtained.

In step S4411, as a fluctuation pattern prefetching process, a fluctuation pattern lottery process is performed based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS grasped in step S4409 and the fluctuation display time table obtained in step S4410, and the result is grasped. . In step S4412, the information indicating the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S4411 is stored in the corresponding area of the storage area for reservation 344c. After execution of step S4412, the first pending prefetch process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the pending command handling process (FIG. 69), after the first pending prefetch process is executed in step S4301, the pending notice setting process is performed in step S1403 using the process result of step S4301. The pending notice setting process is a setting process for executing the pending notice effect.

<Processing for open/close execution mode>
The opening/closing execution mode processing according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in step S1306 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30), and is executed in place of the open/close execution mode process of FIG. In FIG. 71, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 63, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After clearing the suspension notice flag in step S3406, it is determined in step S3407 whether or not there is a suspension image displayed in the specific display mode. That is, at the start timing of the opening/closing execution mode, among the holding images displayed in the holding display areas Ga and Gb, the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, the red display mode HMd, or the rainbow display mode HMe It is determined whether or not there is anything displayed in any manner.

If there is an on-hold image displayed in the specific display mode, the process advances to step S3408 to store information indicating in which mode the on-hold image displayed in the specific display mode is displayed in the RAM 344 for recovery. Store in area 344f. After execution of step S3408, the process of step S3409 (FIG. 63) is not performed, and the standby flag for return is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344 in step S3410. That is, in the fifth embodiment, the processing of storing the game state before the open/close execution mode is executed in step S3409, but in the present embodiment, the processing is not executed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3414 (if it is determined that the standby flag for recovery is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344), processing for erasing the standby flag for recovery is executed in step S3415.

Here, a situation in which an affirmative determination is made in step S3414 means a situation in which the opening/closing execution mode is performed while the suspension notice effect is being executed, and the display of the suspension image is erased. In this case, in step S4501, the second pending prefetching process is executed to perform the pending prefetching again. In subsequent step S4502, setting processing for advance notice return is executed for returning the display mode of the image for suspension to the specific display mode. The details of the second pending prefetch processing in step S4501 and the setting processing for advance notice return in step S4502 will be described later.

After step S4502 is executed, processing for displaying the holding image in the normal display mode HMa is executed in step S3417, and then the open/close execution mode processing is terminated. That is, also in this embodiment, immediately after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the holding image is displayed in the normal display mode HMa.

<Second hold prefetch processing>
The second pending prefetch processing in step S4501 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S4601, the game state after the opening/closing execution mode is grasped. This determination is made by referring to the big win type of the current big win that triggered the opening/closing execution mode. For example, if the current jackpot is the result of the variable probability jackpot, grasp the variable probability game state as the game state after the open/close execution mode, and if it is the normal jackpot result, grasp the time-saving game state as the game state after the opening/closing execution mode. do.

In step S4602, referring to the pending storage area 344c of the RAM 344, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 for each piece of pending information stored in the storage area 344c is grasped. Note that this processing may be performed on all the pending information stored in the pending storage area 344c, or the pending information to be restored (displayed in a specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode). This may be done only for the hold information of the hold image).

At step S4603, a winning/failure determination table corresponding to the game state grasped at step S4601 is acquired. In step S4604, as a pre-reading process of whether or not it is a big hit, a lottery is performed based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 grasped in step S4602 and the success/failure determination table acquired in step S4603, and the success result is grasped. . It should be noted that the process of step S4604 is performed targeting the reservation information grasped jackpot random number counter C1 in step S4602. This also applies to the processing after step S4605.

Here, the processes of steps S4603 and S4604 are the same as steps S4403 and S4404 of the first pending prefetch process (FIG. 70) performed at the time of starting winning (at the time of acquisition of pending information). However, when the lottery mode changes before and after the opening/closing execution mode, for example, when the game state before the opening/closing execution mode is the normal game state and the game state after the opening/closing execution mode is the high-accuracy game state, step S4603. Since the success/failure determination table acquired in 1 is different, a lottery result different from that of the first pending prefetch process may be obtained. For example, in the case of winning the probability variable jackpot result under the normal game state, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 for the pending reservation information is "17", opening and closing corresponding to the probability variable jackpot result is executed. In the first pending prefetching process before the mode is performed, the losing result is prefetched, but in the second pending prefetching process assuming the game state after the open/close execution mode, the winning result is prefetched (FIG. 12).

In step S4605, it is determined whether or not the winning result ascertained in step S4604 is a jackpot winning. In the case of winning the jackpot, in step S4606, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped by referring to the reservation storage area 344c. In step S4607, as a jackpot type pre-reading process, a jackpot type lottery is performed based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped in step S4606 and the type table stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343, and the type lottery. to understand the results of

In step S4608, the jackpot information as information indicating the jackpot result ascertained in step S4604 and the type information as information indicating the jackpot type result ascertained in step S4607 are stored in the corresponding storage areas of the storage area for reservation 344c. do.

In step S4609, the holding storage area 344c is referred to and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is grasped. In step S4610, based on the gaming state grasped in step S4601 and the result of the win/fail lottery grasped in step S4604, the corresponding variable display time table is acquired from the table storage area 343a of the ROM343. For example, if the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is a high-precision game state, and the result of grasping in step S4604 is a result of loss, the fluctuation display time table for loss for the high-precision game state (FIG. 59(b)) to get

In step S4611, as a fluctuation pattern prefetching process, a fluctuation pattern lottery process is performed based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS grasped in step S4609 and the fluctuation display time table obtained in step S4610, and the result is grasped. . The processing of step S4611 is the same as step S4411 of the first reservation prefetch processing performed at the time of starting winning (at the time of acquisition of reservation information), but if the game state changes before and after the opening and closing execution mode, step S4610 Since the variable display time table acquired in 1 is different, a lottery result different from that of the first pending prefetch process may be obtained.

In step S4612, the information indicating the variation pattern grasped in step S4611 is stored in the corresponding area of the suspension storage area 344c, and then the second suspension prefetch process is terminated.

<Setting processing for advance notice return>
The setting processing for advance notice return in step S4502 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S4701, the holding storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is referenced to grasp the change pattern of the holding information corresponding to the target holding image (the holding image displayed in the specific display mode before the open/close execution mode). The variation pattern grasped in this case is the variation pattern grasped in the second pending prefetch process.

In step S4702, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern grasped in step S4701 is one of variation pattern 1H, variation pattern 11H, or variation pattern 21H. These fluctuation patterns correspond to complete failure (FIGS. 14 and 59), and if any of these patterns are met, the advance notice return setting process is terminated.

If the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S4701 is neither the fluctuation pattern 1H, the fluctuation pattern 11H, or the fluctuation pattern 21H, proceed to step S4703, and the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S4701 (the fluctuation pattern prefetched in the second pending prefetch process) to grasp the upper limit display mode corresponding to . Various table storage area 343a of ROM 343 stores an upper limit display mode table. As shown in FIG. 74, in the upper limit display mode table, the upper limit of the display mode is defined corresponding to each variation pattern. , the red display mode HMd is set as the upper limit of the specific display mode. In step S4703, the upper limit display mode table is referred to, and the upper limit display mode corresponding to the variation pattern in the game state after the opening/closing execution mode is specified.

In step S4704, the return area 344f of the RAM 344 is referred to, and the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode is grasped for the target holding image. In step S4705, return determination processing is performed to determine whether or not the display mode of the target hold image is to be returned to the specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode in the game after the opening/closing execution mode. In this process, the upper limit display mode ascertained in step S4703 is compared with the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode ascertained in step S4704. If there is, the return is allowed, and if the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode is higher than the upper limit display mode, the return is not allowed.

In step S4706, it is determined whether or not the result of the return determination in step S4705 permits return. If the determination result is that the return is not permitted, the setting process for the advance notice return is terminated.

If the determination result is that return is permitted, the processing of steps S4707 to S4711 is executed. These processes are the same as steps S2103 to S2107 in FIG. 43, and the display mode of the target suspension image is changed to the original display at any timing in correspondence with the number of suspensions before the target suspension image. It sets whether to return to the mode. That is, in step S4707, the number of pending images before the image for target holding is grasped, and when the grasped number of pending images is 1 or more, the return scenario lottery process is executed in step S4709. In step S4710, return scenario data is set so that the selected return scenario is executed.

Since the second pending prefetch process (step S4501) is executed when the opening/closing execution mode ends, it is possible to start displaying the holding image in the specific display mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In the present embodiment, immediately after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the normal display mode HMa is uniformly set (step S3417). That is, even when the object holding image is set to the specific display mode after the opening/closing execution mode, it is displayed in the normal display mode HMa once and then changed to the specific display mode afterwards. The reason for this configuration is that at the timing immediately after the opening/closing execution mode ends, there is a high possibility that the game balls will continue to be dispensed, and the player can respond by, for example, discharging the game balls from the lower tray 34 or the like. This is based on the fact that in such cases, it is assumed that attention to the holding image will decrease. By avoiding the display of the specific display mode at such timing, it is possible to prevent the specific display mode from being displayed without the player's knowledge.

After execution of step S4710, the advance notice return flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344 in step S4711. The notice return flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp that the process for restoring the display mode of the holding image should be executed.

After execution of step S4711, the setting process for the advance notice return is terminated. After that, as shown in FIG. 71, in step S3417, setting is made to display the holding images in the normal display mode HMa for all holdings existing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, including the target holding image. . That is, even when the return process is performed, the target holding image is displayed in the normal display mode HMa immediately after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Then, the second execution process (FIG. 44) of the pending notice in step S1702 of the shift time command corresponding process (FIG. 40(a)), and the second holding notice in step S1808 of the special figure fluctuation display process (FIG. 41) In the process for execution 3 (FIG. 45), the display mode of the target holding image is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode. At this time, in the second execution process of the suspension notice, the process is executed so as to restore the display mode of the target suspension image to the original specific display mode (the specific display mode before the open/close execution mode).

Further, in the third execution process of the hold notice, the current display mode of the target hold image in the game round of the target hold image (display mode restored by the return process) and the change pattern of the target hold image is compared with the corresponding upper limit display mode, and it is determined whether or not change (promotion) to a higher display mode is possible. Then, when such a change is possible, promotion processing of the display mode is performed through promotion determination and promotion lottery.

<Regarding the flow of the display mode of the holding image before and after the open/close execution mode>
The flow of the display mode of the holding image before and after the opening/closing execution mode will be described. First, referring to FIG. 75, a case where the look-ahead result of the suitability determination does not change before and after the opening/closing execution mode but the look-ahead result of the variation pattern changes will be described.

As shown in FIG. 75(a), when the third holding information (holding image HW) of the second special figure is generated in the high certainty gaming state, the main controller 162 performs information acquisition processing ( FIG. 68(a)) is executed. As a result, assume that 25 is obtained as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and 80 is obtained as the value of the variation type counter CS.

Also, in the effect control device 143, based on the result of the information acquisition processing of the main control device 162, the first pending prefetching process (step S4301) is executed. In the first pending prefetching process, the prefetching process is executed using the game state at that point in time, that is, the success/failure determination table and the variable display time table for the high probability game state. The hit/fail result corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 = 25 is an outlier result (Fig. 12), and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation type counter CS = 80 is the fluctuation pattern 12H (Fig. 59 (b)), so the first reservation The result of the look-ahead processing is a deviation and a variation pattern 12H. The variation pattern 12H is a variation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach A deviation.

Furthermore, in the effect control device 143, setting processing (step S1403) for holding notice is executed based on the result of the first holding prefetching process, and execution lottery of holding notice production for holding image HW and lottery of final display mode , Lottery etc. of the production scenario. The selection range of the final display mode corresponding to the variation pattern 12H is the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, and the red display mode HMd (FIG. 61(b)). It is assumed that the red display mode HMd is selected as the mode, and the effect scenario in which the initial display mode is the blue display mode HMb is selected. In this case, the suspension image HW whose display mode is the blue display mode HMb is displayed in the third unit suspension display area Gb3 of the second suspension display area Gb.

In the game round in which the holding image HW is acquired, the result is a normal jackpot, and when the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the display of all the holding images including the holding image HW is erased in the same manner as in the fifth embodiment. be. This state is maintained until a predetermined period elapses from the start of the ending effect.

Then, when a predetermined period has passed since the start of the ending effect, the effect control device 143 executes the second suspension prefetching process (step S4501) based on the suspension information stored in the suspension storage area 344c. In the case of a normal jackpot result, the game state after the opening and closing execution mode becomes a time-saving game state. do. The hit/fail result corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 = 25 is an outlier result (Fig. 12), and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation type counter CS = 80 is the fluctuation pattern 23H (Fig. 59 (d)), so the second reservation The result of the look-ahead processing is a deviation and a variation pattern 23H. The variation pattern 23H is a variation pattern corresponding to the SP reach B loss, which is lower than the reach effect, rather than the SP SP reach loss A.

In addition, in the effect control device 143, the setting process (step S4502) for the notice return is executed based on the result of the second reservation prefetching process, and the display form of the holding image HW is returned to the specific display form before the opening/closing execution mode. It is determined whether or not to restore. In the determination for return, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the variation pattern prefetched by the second pending prefetch process is grasped based on the upper limit display mode table (FIG. 74), and the display mode of the pending image HW before the opening/closing execution mode is determined. , it is determined whether or not the mode is equal to or less than the comprehended upper limit display mode.

Here, since the upper limit display mode of the variation pattern 23H prefetched by the second pending prefetch process is the green display mode HMc (FIG. 74), the blue display mode HMb, which is the display mode before the open/close execution mode, corresponds to the variation pattern. It becomes a mode below the upper limit display mode. In this case, return to the specific display mode is permitted, and a return scenario is set.

As a result, if a scenario is set to return to the blue display mode HMb at the next shift timing, as shown in FIG. When it is shifted to the unit reserved display area Ga2, its display mode is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb.

Even if the display mode of the pending image HW is the green display mode HMc when the opening/closing execution mode is started, the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode corresponds to the variation pattern prefetched by the second pending prefetching process. Therefore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the display mode of the holding image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the green display mode HMc.

On the other hand, if the display mode of the pending image HW is the red display mode HMd when the opening/closing execution mode is started, the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode is a variation pattern that is prefetched by the second pending prefetching process. is higher than the upper limit display mode corresponding to . In this case, returning to the specific display mode is not permitted. That is, whether or not to return to the specific display mode differs depending on the display mode of the holding image HW when the opening/closing execution mode is started.

When the return to the specific display mode is not permitted, the holding image HW is displayed again in the normal display mode HMa at the end of the opening/closing execution mode until it is shifted to the execution display area D. The state is maintained (FIG. 75(c)).

After that, when the display position of the holding image HW in the normal display mode HMa is shifted to the execution display area D, and the game round of the holding image HW is started, the effect control device 143 performs the third execution of the holding notice. processing (step S1808) to determine promotion to a higher display mode. As a result, when a lottery is drawn for promotion to a higher display mode, the display mode of the holding image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode. For example, when the upper limit display mode of the variation pattern 23H in promotion determination is set to the green display mode HMc, the display mode of the holding image HW is promoted in the range up to the green display mode HMc.

Next, referring to FIG. 76, a case where the look-ahead result of the suitability determination changes before and after the open/close execution mode will be described.

As shown in FIG. 76(a), when the third holding information (holding image HW) of the second special figure occurs in the high certainty gaming state, the main controller 162 performs information acquisition processing. Execute. As a result, assume that 17 is obtained as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and 45 is obtained as the value of the variation type counter CS.

Also, the effect control device 143 executes the first pending prefetch processing based on the result of the information acquisition processing of the main control device 162 . The winning result corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 = 17 in the high probability gaming state is the winning result (Fig. 12), and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation type counter CS = 45 is the fluctuation pattern 12A (Fig. 59 (a )), the result of the first pending look-ahead process is a win and a variation pattern 12A. The variation pattern 12A is a variation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach B per.

Furthermore, in the effect control device 143, setting processing for suspension notice is executed based on the result of the first suspension prefetch processing. The selection range of the final display mode corresponding to the variation pattern 12A is the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, the red display mode HMd, and the rainbow display mode HMe (FIG. 61(a)). As a result of the lottery, the rainbow display mode HMe is selected as the final display mode, and the effect scenario in which the initial display mode is the blue display mode HMb is selected. In this case, the suspension image HW whose display mode is the blue display mode HMb is displayed in the third unit suspension display area Gb3 of the second suspension display area Gb.

In the game round in which the holding image HW is acquired, a normal jackpot result is obtained, and when the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the display of all the holding images including the holding image HW is erased. This state is maintained until a predetermined period elapses from the start of the ending effect.

Then, when a predetermined period has passed since the start of the ending effect, the effect control device 143 executes the second pending prefetch process based on the pending information stored in the pending storage area 344c. In the second pending look-ahead process, the look-ahead process is executed using the success/fail determination table for the time-saving gaming state and the variable display time table. The hit/fail result corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 = 17 is an outlier result (Fig. 12), and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation type counter CS = 45 is the fluctuation pattern 22H (Fig. 59 (d)), so the second reservation The result of the look-ahead processing is a deviation and a variation pattern 22H. The variation pattern 22H is not a variation pattern corresponding to reach per, but a variation pattern corresponding to reach out (SP reach A out).

In addition, the effect control device 143, based on the result of the second suspension look-ahead processing, to execute the setting process for advance notice return, whether or not to restore the display mode of the suspension image HW to the specific display mode before the opening and closing execution mode is determined for return. Since the upper limit display mode of the variation pattern 22H prefetched by the second pending prefetch process is the green display mode HMc (FIG. 74), the blue display mode HMb that is the display mode before the open/close execution mode is the upper limit display corresponding to the variation pattern. Aspects The aspects are as follows. In this case, return to the specific display mode is permitted, and a return scenario is set.

As a result, if a scenario is set to return to the blue display mode HMb at the next shift timing, as shown in FIG. When it is shifted to the unit reserved display area Ga2, its display mode is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb.

Even if the display mode of the pending image HW is the green display mode HMc when the opening/closing execution mode is started, the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode corresponds to the variation pattern prefetched by the second pending prefetching process. Therefore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the display mode of the holding image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the green display mode HMc.

On the other hand, if the display mode of the pending image HW is the red display mode HMd or the rainbow display mode HMe when the opening/closing execution mode is started, the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode is the second pending prefetch process. It becomes a mode higher than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern read ahead by. In this case, returning to the specific display mode is not permitted. That is, even when the right or wrong is changed before and after the opening/closing execution mode, whether or not to return to the specific display mode depends on the display form of the holding image HW when the opening/closing execution mode is started.

When the return to the specific display mode is not permitted, the holding image HW is displayed again in the normal display mode HMa at the end of the opening/closing execution mode until it is shifted to the execution display area D. The state is maintained (FIG. 76(c)).

After that, when the display position of the holding image HW in the normal display mode HMa is shifted to the execution display area D, and the game round of the holding image HW is started, the effect control device 143 performs the third execution of the holding notice. Execution processing is performed, and a promotion determination to a higher display mode is performed. As a result, when a lottery is drawn for promotion to a higher display mode, the display mode of the holding image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode.

Depending on the value of the variation type counter CS of the suspension image HW, even if the result of the first suspension look-ahead process in the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a hit and the variation pattern is equal to or higher than the ready-to-win effect, the opening and closing execution mode ends. The result of the second pending look-ahead process at the time may change to a variation pattern corresponding to a deviation and a complete deviation (for example, as described above, a normal jackpot result is obtained in the high-precision gaming state, and after the opening and closing execution mode, the time-saving gaming state , the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the hold information of the hold image HW is 17, and the value of the variation type counter CS is 10). In such a case, the display mode recovery process is not performed in the game state after the opening/closing execution mode, and the display mode of the holding image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

When the opening/closing execution mode is entered in a situation where the target holding image HW is in a specific display mode (a situation in which the holding notice effect is being executed), the holding prefetching process is performed again after the opening/closing execution mode (second holding prefetching process). is executed, and based on the result, the display mode of the target hold image HW in the game state after the open/close execution mode is set.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the holding image is set to the specific display mode based on the result of the holding prefetch process, so that the player's expectation for the big win result is aroused before the start of the game cycle. be able to. Further, a plurality of types of game states are set as the game state, and when the opening/closing execution mode is executed as a result of a big win, the game state is shifted to one of the plurality of types of game states. In this way, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of game states are provided, even if the hold information used for winning/failure determination is the same, there are differences in the winning/failing results and game round effects (ready-to-win effects, etc.) depending on the game state. may occur.

In this regard, in this configuration, when the opening/closing execution mode is entered during execution of the pending notice effect, the hold information that triggered the holding notice effect is subjected to pre-reading processing again after the opening/closing execution mode, and the result is Based on this, the display mode of the target suspension image HW (the suspension image of the suspension information that triggered the suspension notice effect) is set. Therefore, it is possible to adjust the display mode after the opening/closing execution mode of the object holding image HW in which the holding notice effect was performed before the opening/closing execution mode so as to be suitable for the game state after the opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to preferably display the holding image after the open/close execution mode.

In the second pending prefetching process after the opening/closing execution mode, the prefetching is performed by applying win/fail determination conditions and effect selection conditions corresponding to the game state after the opening/closing execution mode. As a result, the display mode of the object holding image HW is matched with the result of winning/failure actually notified in the game round of the object holding image HW performed after the opening/closing execution mode and the game round effect actually carried out in the game round. can be adjusted.

The display mode of the target holding image HW in the game state after the opening/closing execution mode is set based on the result of the second holding prefetch process after the opening/closing execution mode and the display mode of the target holding image HW before the opening/closing execution mode. It was configured to

For example, if the display mode of the holding image frequently changes with the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the player may feel uncomfortable. In this regard, in this configuration, the display mode after the opening/closing execution mode is set in consideration of not only the result of re-reading but also the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode. In light of the look-ahead result, if there is no problem even if the same display mode is used after the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to take over the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode. As a result, it is possible to suppress excessive changes in the display mode of the holding image with the opening/closing execution mode as a boundary, and it is possible to display the holding image after the opening/closing execution mode in a natural manner.

A plurality of upper limit display modes are set corresponding to the variation pattern of each game state, and among them, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the second look-ahead processing after the opening and closing execution mode and the upper limit display mode corresponding to the variation pattern before the opening and closing execution mode , and based on the result, the display mode of the target hold image HW in the game state after the open/close execution mode is set. More specifically, when the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode is a mode equal to or lower than the upper limit display mode derived from the variation pattern, the display mode of the target hold image HW in the game state after the opening/closing execution mode is changed to the opening/closing execution mode. It was configured to be the same display mode as the previous display mode.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of modes are set as the specific display mode of the holding image (informing mode in the holding notice effect) so that the degree of expectation for the big win is different. In such a configuration in which the degree of expectation is set stepwise and a large number of display modes are provided, the range of the degree of expectation corresponding to one display mode becomes narrow. When the hold image is displayed after the execution mode, the degree of expectation suggested before and after the open/close execution mode is likely to differ. In this respect, by adopting this configuration, even in a situation where many display modes are set, it is possible to match the degree of expectation and preferably display the holding image after the opening/closing execution mode.

When the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode is a display mode higher than the upper limit display mode derived from the variation pattern, the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is set to the normal display mode HMa. It was configured to As a result, it is possible to prevent the display mode after the opening/closing execution mode from exceeding the corresponding expectation level in the game state before the opening/closing execution mode, and it is possible to preferably display the holding image after the opening/closing execution mode.

When the display mode of the target holding image HW in the game state after the open/close execution mode is set to the normal display mode HMa, whether or not to promote the display mode to the specific display mode in the game round of the target holding image HW is selected. The configuration is such that the promotion is executed based on the result.

When the game state before the opening/closing execution mode and the game state after the opening/closing execution mode are different, by changing the display mode of the target holding image HW in the game state after the opening/closing execution mode to the normal display mode HMa, the game state is changed. Although it is possible to absorb the change in the result of the success/failure determination and the effect of the game cycle due to the change, there is a concern that the expectation level of the hold information corresponding to the target hold image HW cannot be notified or suggested. In this regard, in the present configuration, the target holding image HW set to the normal display mode HMa is given an opportunity to change to the specific display mode when the game progresses to the game round of the target holding image HW. Therefore, even if the display mode is changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa, it can be upgraded to the specific display mode after the fact, and the degree of expectation can be notified. .

In the above case, the determination of whether or not the target holding image HW is promoted to the specific display mode is performed based on the variation pattern specified by the execution of the success/failure determination (the start of the game cycle) in the main controller 162. and

In this case, since the same information as that used for selecting the game round effect in the game round of the target holding image HW is used to determine whether or not promotion is possible, the game state before the opening/closing execution mode and the game after the opening/closing execution mode are determined. In the case where the state is different, the display mode of the target hold image HW can be changed to the specific display mode while adapting to the game play performance that is actually performed in the game play after the opening/closing execution mode.

In addition, by adopting the above configuration, after the opening/closing execution mode is finished, the game state after the opening/closing execution mode can be handled solely for the purpose of determining whether or not to promote the target holding image HW to the specific display mode. It is possible to avoid adding a dedicated process for transmitting a variation pattern (information on the result of success or failure determination and game round production). That is, when executing the game round of the target holding image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, the special figure display unit 43 changes the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. In order to execute in synchronization with the special game round, it is necessary to transmit a fluctuation start command from the main control device 162 to the production control device 143, and a configuration that executes promotion determination by utilizing this fluctuation start command By doing so, it is not necessary to notify the effect control device 143 from the main control device 162 of the variation pattern corresponding to the game state after the opening/closing execution mode by a dedicated command different from the variation start command. Therefore, it is not only possible to perform promotion determination using the existing processing configuration in the main control device 162, but also in the production control device 143, it is not necessary to install a processing configuration when receiving such a dedicated command. , the complication of the processing configuration can be suppressed.

When the display mode of the target holding image HW in the game state after the opening/closing execution mode is set to the same mode as the specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to change from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode. It was configured.

In this case, regardless of whether or not the display mode of the target holding image HW is restored to the same mode, the display mode of the target holding image HW changes from the specific display mode to the normal display mode as the opening/closing execution mode is executed. The display mode can be changed to HMa. This makes it possible to reduce unnaturalness when the display mode is changed to the normal display mode HMa due to the determination not to return to the same mode. In addition, in the game state after the opening/closing execution mode, the normal display mode HMa and the normal display mode HMa, including the case where it is determined not to return to the same mode by causing an event to change from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode, are included. It is possible to arouse expectation that the reserved image for holding will be changed to a specific display mode, and to maintain the expectation for the holding image (holding information).

The holding image is hidden during execution of the opening/closing execution mode.

When changing the display mode of the object holding image HW with the end of the opening and closing execution mode, if the object holding image HW that has been performed so far is suddenly changed to another display form at the end of the opening and closing execution mode, the game There is concern that people may get an unnatural impression. In particular, when downgrading to the normal display mode HMa, it is assumed that it is likely to be noticeable to the player and likely to give an unnatural impression. In this regard, in this configuration, since the holding image is not displayed in the open/close execution mode, when changing the display mode of the target holding image HW, the display of the holding image itself including other holding images is changed. It is possible to interpose a period during which it is not performed. As a result, conspicuousness of the change in the display mode is suppressed, and the unnaturalness can be alleviated. In addition, there is also the advantage that it is easier to draw the player's attention to the effect for the opening/closing execution mode (jackpot game effect) by hiding the holding image.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the display mode of the suspension image before occurrence of the power failure state and the display mode of the suspension image at the time of recovery from the power failure state are targeted. The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 77 to 86. FIG. In these figures, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In each of the above embodiments, when the power outage monitoring unit 315 of the power supply and launch control device 191 detects the occurrence of a power outage, a power outage flag (power outage state generation information) is set, and the backup power supply unit 316 of the power supply and launch control device 191 supplies power for power failure to the RAM 314 . That is, when a power failure occurs, the game of the special figure and the normal figure on the main display unit 81 that was in progress at the time of the power failure occurred, and the RAM 314 of the main controller 162 when the power failure occurred. Power is supplied to the RAM 314 so that the stored hold information and the like can be held, and the data in the RAM 314 is backed up. In this embodiment, in addition to that, the data stored in the RAM 344 is backed up in the effect control device 143 as well.

However, since the production control device 143 handles more data than the main control device 162, the RAM 344 mounted on the production control device 143 has a larger capacity than the RAM 314 of the main control device 162, and is large-scale. . For this reason, if all the data stored in the RAM 344 of the effect control device 143 are to be backed up as they are, the amount of power consumed in the power failure state will increase. As a result, the power stored in the backup power supply unit 316 is consumed in a short period of time, shortening the data retention period (backup period), or requiring a backup power supply unit 316 with a large amount of stored electricity, resulting in an increase in cost. I have concerns about being invited.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, instead of backing up the entire data stored in the RAM 344, as a part of the backup, the information related to the pending image such as the pending information stored in the pending storage area 344c is backed up. is configured to An electrical configuration for that will be described with reference to FIG.

In addition to the RAM 344, the effect control device 143 is provided with a backup RAM 345 as a storage medium exclusively for backup. The capacity of the backup RAM 345 is smaller than that of the RAM 344, so that it is possible to store information about images for suspension. The backup RAM 345 may be integrated with the MPU 342 into one chip like the RAM 344 , or may be integrated into a chip separately from the MPU 342 and the RAM 344 .

The RAM 344 and the backup RAM 345 are supplied with power for power failure from the backup power supply unit 316 . In the present embodiment, when a power failure occurs, the information about the image for suspension among the data stored in the RAM 344 is stored (copied) in the backup RAM 345, and the power consumption to the RAM 344 during the power failure is reduced. The supply is for supplying the power necessary to read the information about the hold image stored in the RAM 344 . Therefore, after the read process (write process to the backup RAM 345) is completed, the supply of power to the RAM 344 during power failure is stopped.

On the other hand, the backup RAM 345 continues to be supplied with power during a power failure even after the process of writing the information on the hold image is completed. In this way, when a power failure occurs, the information to be backed up is stored in a small storage medium provided separately from the RAM 344, and power is supplied to the storage medium during power failure. , the power consumption for data retention can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the data retention period from being shortened and the need for the backup power supply unit 316 with a large amount of stored electricity.

Although not shown, the power supply and launch control device 191 or the effect control device 143 is provided with a switching unit (switch circuit) for switching the state of power supply to the RAM 344 at the time of power failure. The switching unit supplies the RAM 344 with power during a power failure from the backup power supply unit 316 at least while the information on the holding image is read from the RAM 344 and written to the backup RAM 345, and the writing of the information on the holding image to the backup RAM 345 is completed. After the termination, the power supply to the RAM 344 is stopped.

The effect control device 143 is provided with an NMI terminal like the main control device 162, and a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring unit 315 in the power supply and launch control device 191 is output to the NMI terminal. That is, in the present embodiment, when a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring unit 315, both the main control device 162 and the production control device 143 execute power failure processing.

Next, each control process performed by MPU342 of the production|presentation control apparatus 143 is demonstrated. The processing of the MPU 342 is roughly divided into main processing that is activated upon power-on, normal processing for effect control, and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. Among them, the NMI interrupt processing is almost the same as the NMI interrupt processing (FIG. 15) in the main control unit 162, so it will be explained with reference to FIG.

<NMI interrupt processing>
As shown in FIG. 15, in the NMI interrupt process, first, in step S11, the data in the use register provided in the MPU 342 is saved in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 344 or the backup RAM 345. FIG. In step S<b>12 , a power failure flag is set in the backup RAM 345 . In step S13, the saved data is returned to the use register of the MPU 342, and then the NMI interrupt processing is terminated. If the power failure flag can be set without destroying the data in the use register of the MPU 342, the processing of steps S11 and S13 can be omitted.

<Main processing>
Main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The main process is when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the external power is supplied, or when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on) and external power is supplied).

In step S5101, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on, and access to the RAM 344 and backup RAM 345 is permitted in step S5102. At step S5103, the used area of the RAM 344 is cleared to 0, and at step S5104, the RAM 344 is initialized. After that, the main processing is ended, and the processing shifts to normal processing, which will be described later.

<Normal processing>
The normal processing will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step S5201, power-on notification processing is executed. The power-on notification process performs power-on notification corresponding to the fact that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

If a power failure occurs in the state before the power is turned on, a game cycle is not being executed, and as the power-on notification, a message such as "Power is turned on" is displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 75. done in G. This message display continues for a predetermined period of time, after which a predetermined demonstration image is displayed.

In addition, if a power outage occurs in the middle of a game and the continuation is resumed after the power is turned on (after the power is restored), a message such as "The screen will be restored soon" is displayed as a power-on notification. is performed on the display screen G. At that time, the main display unit 81 is in a state where the next round of games is executed, but the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are not displayed on the display screen G, and the variable display by them is not performed. Such variable display is performed from the start timing of the next game cycle (game cycle started after power is turned on) after the power is turned on (after the power is restored). It should be noted that the display of the message is erased when the subsequent game round ends (when the next game round is started).

In addition, in both the case where the power failure state occurs when the game is not being executed and the power failure state occurs in the middle of the game, sound output from the speaker unit 29 is performed during the power-on notification. is not performed and the silent state is maintained. Sound output is performed from the start timing of the game round (the next game round when the following game round is performed when the power is restored) which is started after the power is turned on. By adopting such a configuration, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up at the same time by turning on the hall power supply to which the plurality of pachinko machines 10 are connected at the time of preparation for business in the game hall, each pachinko machine can be operated. It is possible to prevent the sound from being output from 10 all at once and become noise.

In step S5202, processing for returning the advance notice of suspension for displaying the image for suspension in the display mode before the power interruption is executed. Details of the processing will be described later. It should be noted that the processing of steps S5201 and S5202 is executed only when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

After execution of step S5202, external signal output processing is executed in step S5203. In the external signal output process, a command set in the previous normal process is transmitted to the display control device 350, and control signals for driving and controlling various lamp units 26 to 28 and speaker unit 29 are transmitted. In step S5204, counter update processing for updating the counter values provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344 is executed.

In step S5205, command reception processing for receiving a command from main controller 162 is executed. The command received by the command reception process is stored in the command storage area 344a of the RAM 344 as already described. In step S5206, the effect setting process described with reference to FIG. 30 is executed.

In step S5207, it is determined whether or not a power failure flag is set in the backup RAM 345. FIG. If the power failure flag is not set, that is, if the power failure state has not occurred, the process advances to step S5208 to determine whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has come, that is, if a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the current normal process. It is determined whether or not (2 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed.

If the predetermined time has passed, the process returns to step S5203 to execute the processes after step S5203. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not elapsed, the process waits until the predetermined time has elapsed. In this case, similar to the normal processing (FIG. 20) in the main controller 162, the remaining time may be used to update the values of various counters.

Further, if the determination in step S5207 is affirmative (if the power failure flag is set), it means that a power failure state has occurred. In this case, the process advances to step S5209 to create suspension image information indicating in which display mode each suspension image was displayed before the occurrence of the power failure (immediately before the occurrence). In this step, the effect scenario data for the suspension notice effect stored in the RAM 344 is referred to determine whether or not there is a suspension image displayed in a specific display mode, and if such a suspension image exists. , in which form the image is displayed, and based on the result of the grasp, image information for holding is created.

In step S 5210 , information about the holding image is stored in backup RAM 345 . At that time, in addition to the hold image information created in step S5209, the information stored in the hold storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is also stored in the backup RAM 345, and the hold image is displayed when the power is restored. It is stored as information for The information stored in the holding storage area 344c includes holding information (jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, fluctuation type counter CS values, etc.), and information indicating the number of reservations.

Note that the storage processing of the pending image information created in step S5209 and the storage processing of the information stored in the pending storage area 344c do not necessarily have to be executed in the same step, and one of the storage processing is executed. After that, the other storage process may be executed.

In step S5211, the RAM judgment value is calculated and stored in the backup RAM 345. FIG. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value of information regarding the hold image stored in the backup RAM 345 . In step S5212, access to the RAM 344 and the backup RAM 345 is prohibited, and thereafter the infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

<Restoration process for hold notice>
Referring to the flowchart of FIG. 80, the process for returning the advance notice of suspension in step S5202 will be described.

First, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the backup RAM 345 stores a power failure flag. If the power failure flag is not stored, it means that the power stored in the backup power supply unit 316 has run out and the data stored in the backup RAM 345 has disappeared. In this case, the processing for returning the pending notice is ended.

If the power failure flag is stored, the process advances to step S5302 to calculate the RAM determination value. In the subsequent step S5303, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value is normal. Specifically, the RAM determination value calculated in step S5302 is compared with the RAM determination value (step S5211) saved when the power failure occurred, and it is determined whether or not they match.

If the two do not match, it is determined that the RAM determination value is abnormal, and the data stored in the backup RAM 345 is recognized as invalid. In this case, the processing for returning the pending notice is ended. The validity of the data stored in the backup RAM 345 can also be determined by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the backup RAM 345 is correctly saved.

On the other hand, if both match, the RAM determination value is determined to be normal, and the data stored in the backup RAM 345 is recognized as valid. In this case, the process advances to step S5304 to refer to the data stored in the backup RAM 345 and grasp the number of pending jobs at the time of occurrence of the power failure.

In step S5305, it is determined whether or not the number of pending items ascertained in step S5304 is zero. If the number of pending calls is 0, that is, if the power failure has occurred in a situation where there is no pending, the process for returning the pending notice is terminated.

If the pending number is not 0, the flow advances to step S5306 to execute display mode setting processing. This processing is for setting the display mode of the holding image to be displayed after the power is restored. Here, the display mode setting processing in step S5306 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S5401, the data stored in the backup RAM 345 is referred to, and the display mode of each hold image before (immediately before) the power failure occurs. In step S5402, it is determined whether or not there is a holding image displayed in the specific display mode, based on the result of understanding in step S5401. If there is no on-hold image displayed in the specific display mode, the process advances to step S5403 to set the display mode of all on-hold images to the normal display mode HMa.

If there is a holding image displayed in a specific display mode, the process proceeds to step S5404, the display mode of the holding image (target holding image) is a predetermined display mode (eg, red display mode HMd) or more It is determined whether or not. If the display mode of the target suspension image is a mode lower than the predetermined display mode (for example, the green display mode HMc or the blue display mode HMb), the process proceeds to step S5405, and the display mode of the suspension image is changed to that before the power interruption. Set to a specific display mode. In step S5406, the display mode of the on-hold image other than the target on-hold image is set to the normal display mode HMa.

If the display mode of the target holding image is equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode (for example, the red display mode HMd or the rainbow color display mode HMe), the process proceeds to step S5407, and the display mode of the holding image is set lower than the predetermined display mode. (for example, green display mode HMc). That is, when the display mode of the target holding image is equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode, the display mode of the target holding image at the time of power restoration is limited to a mode lower than the specific display mode before the power failure.

In step S5408, the display mode of the on-hold image other than the target on-hold image is set to the normal display mode HMa. In step S5409, a return notice flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. FIG. The role of the return notice flag will be described later.

Returning to the description of the hold notice return process (FIG. 80), after executing the display mode setting process in step S5306, in step S5307, each hold image is displayed in the display mode set in step S5306. The display control device 350 is controlled as follows. In step S5308, the pending information and the like stored in the backup RAM 345 are stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 344 (restored). In step S5309, the power failure flag stored in the backup RAM 345 is erased, and then the suspension notice recovery process is terminated.

<Special figure fluctuation display processing>
Processing for special figure variation display according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This process is executed in step S1305 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30), and is executed in place of the special figure fluctuation display process of FIG. In FIG. 82, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 41, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified. In addition, in FIG. 82, the description of the first execution process of the suspension notice and the like is omitted for the sake of convenience.

If a negative determination is made in step S1804 and the display is in the process of being changed, processing for during change is executed in step S1805. In step S5501, it is determined whether or not the current special figure game round is the game round of the holding image (target holding image) displayed in the specific display mode before the power cut. If it is not the game turn of the image for target holding, the processing for special figure fluctuation display is terminated as it is.

When it is the game round of the image for object reservation, the process for the 4th execution of the reservation notice is performed in step S5502, and then the special figure fluctuation display process is ended. The fourth execution processing of the suspension notice is for promoting the display mode of the suspension image to a higher mode in the game round of the target suspension image.

<Processing for fourth execution of pending notice>
The fourth execution processing of the suspension notice in step S5502 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S5601, it is determined whether or not the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344 stores a return notice flag. The return notice flag indicates that, when the power is restored, a process of changing the display mode of the holding image, which has been set to a lower display mode than the specific display mode before the power failure, to a higher mode, should be executed. This is for the MPU 342 to grasp. If the return notice flag is not stored, the fourth execution process of the hold notice is terminated.

If the advance notice flag for return is stored, the process advances to step S5602 to determine whether or not the promotion flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. The promotion flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp that the display mode of the target holding image should be promoted, and is the same as the promotion flag according to the first embodiment.

If the promotion flag is not stored, it is determined in step S5603 whether or not the determination completed flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. If the determination completion flag is stored, the fourth execution process of the suspension notice is terminated.

If the determination completion flag is not stored, the process advances to step S5604 to determine whether or not pending change points remain in the ongoing game cycle. If no pending change point remains, the process advances to step S5611 to erase the return notice flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d, and then terminate the fourth execution processing of the hold notice. do.

If the pending change point remains, the process advances to step S5605 to execute the process for promotion of the pending notice, and then terminate the fourth execution process of the pending notice. Here, the process for promotion of pending notice will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the promotion process, first, in step S5701, the current display mode of the target hold image displayed in the execution display area D is grasped. The current display mode is the display mode set in step S5407 of the display mode setting process (FIG. 81).

In step S5702, the variation pattern of the target holding image is grasped. This grasping is performed based on the change start command (step S712 in FIG. 23) transmitted from the main controller 162 at the start of the game round (the game round being executed) of the target holding image.

In step S5703, based on the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S5701, the current display mode grasped in step S5702, and the promotion judgment table stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343, the promotion judgment of the pending notice effect is performed. conduct. The promotion determination is to determine whether or not the display mode of the target holding image displayed in the execution display area D can be changed to a higher specific display mode than the current status.

Similar to the promotion determination table (FIG. 47) according to the first embodiment, the promotion determination table defines the upper limit of the display mode corresponding to each variation pattern. In step S5703, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the variation pattern is specified with reference to the promotion determination table, and it is determined whether or not the current display mode is lower than the specified upper limit display mode. As a result, promotion of the display mode is permitted when the display mode is of a lower order, and promotion is prohibited when it is not.

After execution of step S5703, a determination completion flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d in step S5704. The judged flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp that the promotion judgment has been executed.

In step S5705, it is determined whether or not the result of the upgrade determination in step S5703 permits the upgrade of the display mode. If the promotion is not permitted, the processing for promotion of the pending notice is exited and the process advances to step S5611 (FIG. 83), the return notice flag is erased, and the fourth execution processing of the pending notice is terminated.

If promotion is permitted, the process advances to step S5706 to execute promotion scenario lottery processing. The promotion scenario defines at what timing (holding change point) and to which display mode the target holding image displayed in the execution display area D is to be changed. The promotion scenario lottery is acquired from the promotion scenario lottery table stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343 and each counter area 344b of the RAM 344, as in step S2405 (FIG. 46) according to the first embodiment. It is based on the lottery counter (random value).

In step S5707, promotion scenario data is set so that the promotion scenario drawn in step S5706 is executed. In step S5708, a promotion flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d, and thereafter, the processing for promotion of pending notice is terminated.

Returning to the description of the fourth execution process of the pending notice (FIG. 83), if the determination in step S5602 is affirmative (if the promotion flag is stored), the process proceeds to step S5606 to determine whether it is time to promote the display mode. determine whether This determination is made based on the promotion scenario setting result in step S5707. If it is not the promotion timing, the process for the fourth execution of the pending notice is terminated.

If it is the promotion timing, the process advances to step S5607 to grasp the display mode (higher-level display mode) to be changed in the current change processing based on the setting result of the promotion scenario. In subsequent step S5608, the display mode of the holding image displayed in the execution display area D is set to be changed to the display mode grasped in step S5607. Specifically, as an output command to the display control device 350, the display mode of the holding image displayed in the execution display area D is changed by including information indicating which display mode to change to. Set the command to do so.

In step S5609, it is determined whether or not the display mode grasped in step S5607 or the display mode set as the change destination in step S5608 is the final display mode in the promotion effect. For example, if the promotion scenario is set so that the display mode is promoted in multiple stages through multiple change processes, if the current change process is an intermediate process, it will not be the final display mode. A negative determination is made for the step, and the fourth execution process of the suspension notice is terminated.

If it is the final display mode, the promotion flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is deleted in step S5610. In the following step S5611, the return notice flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is erased, and thereafter the fourth execution processing of the hold notice is terminated.

<Regarding the display mode of the holding image before and after the power is restored>
The display mode of the holding image before power interruption and after power recovery will be described. Here, first, the case where there is a holding image in the green display mode HMc before the occurrence of the power interruption will be described with reference to FIG. 85 .

As shown in FIG. 85(a), in the situation where the game round of the 1st special figure is being executed, there are 3 pending information of the 1st special figure apart from that, and the 3rd unit reserved display area Ga3 is reserved. Assume that the image HW is displayed in the green display mode HMc. When power failure occurs in that state, the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the display on the display screen G disappears. Along with this, all the holding images including the holding image HW are not displayed.

At this time, the effect control device 143 stores information about the holding image in the backup RAM 345 . Since the backup RAM 345 is supplied with power during power failure for data retention from the power supply and launch control device 191, the information related to the hold image stored in the backup RAM 345 is retained even during the power failure state. .

After that, when the power failure state is resolved and the power is restored, the main controller 162 executes power restoration processing (steps S2004 to S2010 in FIG. 19) based on the data stored in the RAM 314 . As a result, the continuation of the game round (the game round of the first special figure) that was interrupted when the power failure occurred is resumed on the special figure display unit 43 .

When power is restored, the effect control device 143 executes power-on notification processing (step S5201) for carrying out power-on notification. As a result, a character display 461 such as "The screen will be restored soon" is displayed on the display screen G, for example.

In addition, in the effect control device 143, processing for restoration of suspension notice for restoring the display of the suspension image (step S5202) is executed. In the hold notice recovery process, the number of holds and the display mode of each hold image before the occurrence of the power failure state are grasped based on the information related to the hold image stored in the backup RAM 345, and the grasped image is displayed. It is determined whether or not there is an image displayed in a specific display mode among the images for holding. When there is a holding image displayed in a specific display mode, it is determined whether or not the display mode is a predetermined display mode (for example, a red display mode HMd) or higher, and restored based on the result. Set the display mode when powering on.

Here, the display mode before the power failure state is the green display mode HMc, which is lower than the predetermined display mode. set to As a result, as shown in FIG. 85(b), each holding image is displayed on the display screen G in the same state as when the power failure occurs.

Since the information about the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is not backed up, the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is not displayed in the above case. For this reason, the character display 461 as a power-on notification and each holding image that is restored based on the information about the holding image stored in the backup RAM 345 are different from those displayed when the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed. It is displayed on a power recovery background 462 different from the background. The power recovery background 462 is, for example, a monochromatic display background in a predetermined display color (for example, black).

After that, when the restarted continuation game round ends, as shown in FIG. 85(c), each suspension image is shifted to the unit suspension display area on the lower side. With the start of the next game round, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed on the display screen G, and the screen returns.

Next, a case where there is a holding image in the red display mode HMd before the power failure occurs will be described with reference to FIG. 86 .

As shown in FIG. 86(a), in the situation where the game round of the 1st special figure is being executed, there are 3 pending information of the 1st special figure separately from it, and it is displayed in the 3rd unit pending display area Ga3. It is assumed that the holding image HW currently displayed is displayed in the red display mode HMd. When power failure occurs in that state, the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the display on the display screen G disappears.

After that, when the power failure state is canceled and the power is restored, the continuation of the game cycle (the game cycle of the first special figure) that was interrupted when the power failure occurred is resumed on the special figure display unit 43.例文帳に追加In addition, the effect control device 143 executes processing for returning to the suspension notice, and determines whether or not the specific display mode of the suspension image HW before the occurrence of the power failure state is equal to or higher than a predetermined display mode.

Here, the display mode of the holding image HW before the power interruption state occurs is the red display mode HMd, which is a mode equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode. is set to the green display mode HMc, which is lower than the display mode of . As a result, as shown in FIG. 86(b), the display of each suspension image is restored in a state where the display mode of the suspension image HW is set to the green display mode HMc.

After that, when it comes to the start timing of the game round of the holding image HW, the effect control device 143 grasps the change pattern of the holding information corresponding to the holding image HW based on the change start command transmitted from the main control device 162. . Based on the variation pattern, it is determined whether or not to upgrade the current display mode (green display mode HMc) to a higher display mode.

That is, when the display mode before the power failure occurs is equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode, the display mode is restored to the display mode lower than the display mode before the power failure, and the variable start command transmitted at the start of the game round is restored. Based on this, the display mode of the holding image HW is set again. As a result, when promotion to the red display mode HMd (higher display mode) is determined, as shown in FIG. The display mode is changed from HMc to red display mode HMd. In addition, since the game round effect (ready effect etc.) performed in the game round of the holding image HW is determined based on the variation pattern analyzed from the variation start command, the promotion is determined on the premise of the variation pattern. The display mode of the holding image HW is consistent with the above-described game round effect.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

When a power failure occurs in a situation where the target suspension image HW is in a specific display mode (a situation in which a suspension notice effect is being executed), and then the power failure is resolved and the power is restored, the power failure occurs. The display mode of the target suspension image HW after power restoration is set based on the display mode of the previous target suspension image HW, and the suspension notice effect is re-executed.

In the present embodiment, the holding notice effect is executed in which the display mode of the holding image is the specific display mode based on the result of the holding prefetching process. can arouse expectations. Furthermore, since a plurality of types of modes are set as the specific display mode so that the degree of expectation for the big win is different, it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation by giving it a magnitude, which is advantageous in arousing the player's sense of expectation. can be configured. Under such a configuration, when power failure occurs during execution of the suspension notice performance and then the power is restored, the suspension notice performance performed before the occurrence of the failure is re-executed. As a result, the suspension notice performance can be restored after the abnormality is resolved, and disappearance of the suspension notice performance due to the occurrence of the abnormality is suppressed. At this time, since the display mode of the target suspension image HW is set based on the display mode before the occurrence of the abnormality, it is possible to suitably restore the suspension notice effect performed before the power failure.

By storing the information about the image for suspension in the backup RAM 345 when the power failure occurs, the information corresponding to the display mode of the image for suspension can be retained even after the power failure occurs.

According to the above configuration, even if the power supply to the game machine is stopped due to the occurrence of a power failure state and the control related to the holding image is stopped, the information held in the backup RAM 345 can be restored after the power is restored. By referring to it, it is possible to grasp the display mode of the target holding image HW before the power interruption. As a result, when re-executing the suspension notice effect after the power is restored, the display mode of the target suspension image HW can be preferably returned to the display mode before the power failure.

Configuration for limiting the display mode of the object holding image HW after the power is restored to a predetermined mode or less when the display mode of the object holding image HW before the power failure is a notification mode higher than the predetermined mode (the green display mode HMc). and

For example, if there is a change in the hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 314b due to the power failure, the result of the hold prefetch performed before the power failure and the success or failure performed in the game round after the power is restored. Inconsistency occurs between the determination result and the selection result of the game round effect. In such a case, before the power outage, the pending notice effect suggests a high degree of expectation. There is a concern that the game-turn effect to be performed does not match the degree of expectation suggested by the pending advance notice effect, and gives an unpleasant impression to the player.

In this regard, in the above configuration, if the type of specific display mode that was performed at the time of the power failure is a mode of a predetermined level or more, and suggests a certain level of expectation, the display mode is limited to a lower level, and the pending notice effect is performed. re-run. As a result, it is possible to suppress the suggestion of the degree of expectation that does not match the notification result or the like of the game cycle by the pending advance notice effect, and it is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

When the display mode of the target holding image HW is restricted to a display mode equal to or lower than a predetermined mode, it is determined whether or not the display mode is promoted to a higher display mode in the game round of the target holding image HW, and the result is determined. It was configured to execute the promotion based on

In the above configuration, even when the display mode of the target holding image HW is limited to a display mode equal to or lower than the predetermined mode, the game round of the target holding image HW is performed to promote promotion to a higher display mode. This avoids keeping the implied expectations low.

In the above case, the determination as to whether or not to promote to a higher display mode is made based on the result of the success/failure determination performed as a trigger of the game cycle and the selection result of the variation pattern.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the target holding image HW is to be promoted, using the result after power restoration for the win/fail determination and the selection of the game round effect as a determination material. As a result, it is possible to carry out the above-mentioned promotion while making it consistent with the result of notification that is actually performed in the game cycle after the power is restored.

In the power recovery process executed when the power is restored from the power failure state, the configuration is such that the setting process (recovery process of the pending notice) for re-executing the pending notice effect is executed.

In this case, when the power failure state is canceled and the power is restored, the suspension notice effect can be quickly re-executed. As a result, when a power failure occurs in the middle of a game and there is a period in which the symbol variation display is not performed on the display screen G after the power is restored, the suspension notice effect is performed prior to the restoration of the symbol variation display. can be re-executed.

<Seventh embodiment>
Although backup RAM345 was provided in the production|presentation control apparatus 143 in said 6th Embodiment, in this embodiment, it is not provided and the production|presentation control apparatus 143 does not have a backup function. The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 87 to 91. FIG. In these figures, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as in the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The effect control device 143 according to this embodiment has the same electrical configuration as the effect control device 143 according to the first embodiment, and the backup RAM 345 is not provided. Also, it does not have a function of backing up the data stored in the RAM 344 . Therefore, when a power failure occurs in a state where a hold exists (a state in which a hold image is displayed on the hold display unit 200), the hold information or the like held by the effect control device 143 is Disappear.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the signal line for transmitting the power failure signal output from the power failure monitoring unit 315 of the launch control device 191 is not connected to the production control device 143, the power failure signal is input to the production control device 143 configured to prevent

In addition, in this embodiment, in the pending prefetching process (FIG. 28) of the main controller 162, the processing result (prefetching result of fluctuation pattern lottery etc.) is stored in the pending ball storage area 314b (FIG. 11) of the RAM314. That is, in each area set in the holding ball storage area 314b, in addition to the holding information (each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS), the holding performed for the holding information The look-ahead result is stored.

The information on the result of the prefetching process stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b continues to be stored in the RAM 314 without being erased even after the information is transmitted to the effect control device 143. The reason for such a configuration is to make it possible to grasp the result of the pending prefetch processing performed before the occurrence of the power failure when the power is restored after the power failure occurs.

That is, in a normal pachinko machine, the main control device 162 executes the pending prefetching process, and after the result is transmitted to the effect control device 143 as a pending command or the like, the prefetching result is sent to the control processing on the main control device 162 side. Therefore, it is not necessary to leave the information on the main controller 162 side. Therefore, after transmission to the effect control device 143, it is common to release the area in which the information related to the prefetching result is stored, and to erase the information by overwriting the prefetching result etc. for the subsequent pending information. is.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, even after transmitting information about the result of prefetching to the effect control device 143, the information is stored in the RAM 314. FIG. When a power failure occurs, power for power failure is supplied from the power supply and launch control device 191 to the RAM 314, and the information in the RAM 314 is retained without being erased. Therefore, by adopting the configuration of this embodiment, it becomes possible to retain information about the result of prefetching when a power failure occurs, and when power is restored after a power failure, the power failure occurs. Allows you to see the results of previous pending lookahead operations.

Note that the information about the prefetch result stored in the RAM 314 is not permanently stored, and is erased when the pending information is erased. That is, the information about the prefetch result in the RAM 314 is erased in accordance with the execution of the game cycle of the reserve information that is the object of the reserve prefetch process.

By the way, the storage area 314b for the information about the result of the prefetching is used as the holding ball storage area 314b so that the information about the result of the prefetching can be grasped to which piece of the holding information the information about the prefetching result corresponds, and other information is stored so as not to be inadvertently overwritten. Convenience is taken into consideration when allocating areas. Therefore, the storage area for the information does not necessarily have to be the reserved ball storage area 314 b , and may be another storage area in the RAM 314 .

Processing performed by the MPU 312 of the main controller 162 will be described.

<Main processing>
The main processing according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 87(a). This process is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and is executed in place of the main process of FIG. In FIG. 87(a), the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 19, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative determination is made in step S2003 (if the RAM erase switch has not been pressed), it is determined in step S2004 whether or not a power failure flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 314 . If the power failure flag is stored, that is, if the power is restored while the data in the RAM 314 is stored after the power failure, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S2005.

In step S2006, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value is normal, and if normal, the stack pointer is restored in step S2007. In step S2008, a power recovery command is output.

In step S6101, based on the information stored and held in the holding ball storage area 314b of the RAM314, the holding command at the time of power recovery is set and output to the effect control device 143. The command for suspension at power recovery includes information indicating the number of suspended jobs when the power failure occurred, information indicating the result of suspension prefetching performed before the power failure occurred, and the like. After execution of step S6101, the processing of step S2009 (clearing the power failure flag) is executed.

Processing performed by the MPU 342 of the effect control device 143 will be described.

<Normal processing>
The normal processing according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 87(b). This process is executed in place of the normal process of FIG. As shown in FIG. 87(b), the normal processing according to the present embodiment does not include backup processing of the pending information when a power failure occurs.

Specifically, in the normal processing of FIG. 79 according to the sixth embodiment, it is checked in step S5207 whether or not a power failure flag is stored in the backup RAM 345 to determine whether or not there is a power failure. When a power failure flag is stored (when a power failure occurs), the processes of steps S5209 to S5212 are executed. is not provided. Further, in the normal processing of FIG. 79 according to the sixth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, in step S5202, the process for returning the hold notice is executed. Such processing is not provided in the normal processing of 87(b), and after the power-on notification processing of step S5201 is executed, the external output processing of step S5203 is executed.

<Production setting processing>
Effect setting processing according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in step S5206 of the normal process (FIG. 87(b)), and is executed in place of the effect setting process of FIG. In FIG. 88, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 30, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step S6201, it is determined whether or not a hold command from the main controller 162 has been received. The power recovery hold command is output when power is restored from a power failure state (step S6101 in FIG. 87(a)). and information indicating the result of pending prefetching performed before the occurrence of the power failure state.

If the power recovery hold command has been received, the process advances to step S6202 to grasp the number of devices held at the time of the power failure based on the power recovery hold command from the main controller 162 . In step S6203, it is determined whether or not the number of pending items ascertained in step S6202 is zero. If the number of pending images is not 0, the flow advances to step S6204 to execute display mode setting processing for setting the display mode of the pending image after the power is restored. Here, the processing for setting the display mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S6301, the change pattern of each hold information is grasped based on the hold command from the main controller 162 at the time of power recovery. This variation pattern is prefetched by the pending prefetch processing (FIG. 28) of the main controller 162 before the occurrence of the power failure. Since the hold command at power recovery includes the information of the change pattern for the number of hold grasped in step S6202, all the change patterns are grasped in this step.

In addition, if the power recovery hold command is sent with the information of the number of fluctuation patterns included in the hold number, it is assumed that the amount of data will be large or the information of the fluctuation pattern will not be able to be stored. Information may be sent in multiple batches. Specifically, a configuration may be adopted in which a hold command upon power recovery is first transmitted in a form that does not include information on the variation pattern, and information on the variation pattern of each hold information is sequentially transmitted following the command.

In step S6302, it is determined whether or not there is big hit pending information based on the grasped result in step S6301. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the variation pattern corresponding to the big hit is included in the variation pattern grasped in step S6301, and whether there is holding information in which the big win is prefetched before the occurrence of the power failure state determine whether or not

When the big hit pending information exists, the process proceeds to step S6303, and the display mode of the pending image corresponding to the pending information is set to the first specific display mode. The first specific display mode is a specific display mode lower than the rainbow color display mode HMe, which is the upper limit of the final display mode selected when a big win is predicted, and is, for example, the green display mode HMc.

In step S6304, a return notice flag is set in correspondence with the suspension image (target suspension image). The notice flag for return is for the MPU 342 to grasp that the process (promoting process) of changing the display mode of the image for suspension should be executed in the game round of the image for target suspension. Note that the return notice flag may be stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344, or may be shifted together with the suspension information of the target suspension image in the corresponding area ( area corresponding to the target hold image).

After execution of step S6304 or when a negative determination is made in step S6302 (when there is no jackpot reservation information), in step S6305, in the variation pattern grasped in step S6301, there is a variation pattern corresponding to SPSP reach production Determine whether or not Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the variation pattern 5H, the variation pattern 6H, the variation pattern 12H, the variation pattern 13H, the variation pattern 24H, and the variation pattern 25H exists. This step is for determining whether or not the holding information, which is the result of the prefetch result before the power cut off, contains information corresponding to the ready-to-win performance in which the degree of expectation for the big win is ranked higher than a predetermined level. .

When there is a variation pattern corresponding to the SPSP ready-to-win effect, the process proceeds to step S6306, and the display mode of the hold image corresponding to the hold information whose variation pattern is prefetched is set to the second specific display mode. The second specific display mode is a display mode lower than the first specific display mode, and is, for example, the blue display mode HMb. In step S6307, a return notice flag is set in correspondence with the holding image.

After execution of step S6307 or if a negative determination is made in step S6305 (if there is no variation pattern corresponding to SPSP reach production), in step S6308, whether or not there is hold information that cannot grasp the variation pattern in step S6301 judge. If the fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped, part of the information indicating the result of prefetching may be corrupted due to a power outage, or part of the data may be corrupted due to the effects of noise, etc., when the hold command at power recovery is sent. It is conceivable that the

If there is pending information for which the variation pattern cannot be grasped, the process advances to step S6309 to set the display mode of the pending image corresponding to the pending information to the normal display mode HMa. In step S6310, a return notice flag is set in association with the holding image.

After execution of step S6310 or if a negative determination is made in step S6308 (if there is no suspension information that cannot grasp the variation pattern), in step S6311, the remaining images for suspension (the display mode is set by steps S6302 to S6310 The display mode of the image for holding that is not displayed) is set to the normal display mode HMa.

Returning to the description of the effect setting process (FIG. 88), after executing the display mode setting process in step S6204, the holding image in the display mode set in the setting process is displayed on the display screen G in step S6205. Control the display controller 350 to be displayed. After executing step S6205, the process advances to step S1301, and thereafter, the processes of steps S1301 to S1308 are executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S6201 (if the power recovery hold command has not been received), the process skips steps S6202 to S6205 and proceeds to step S1301. If a negative determination is made in step S6203 (the number of pending items is 0), the process skips steps S6204 and S6205 and proceeds to step S1301.

With the above processing, when the power is restored after the occurrence of the power failure, the holding image of the holding information in which the result of the big win has been prefetched is displayed in the first specific display mode, resulting in a ready-to-win effect with a high expectation of the big win. The suspension image of the suspension information for which the corresponding deviation result has been prefetched is displayed in the second specific display mode. After that, the display mode of the target suspension image is upgraded by performing the suspension notice fourth execution process of step S5502 in the specific variable display process (FIG. 82). That is, the display mode of the target hold image is reset based on the change start command transmitted after the power is restored. It should be noted that the fourth execution process of the pending notice is the same as that of the sixth embodiment, so the description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the display mode of the holding image before and after the power is restored>
The display mode of the holding image before power interruption and after power recovery will be described. Here, first, the case where the big win result is pre-read before the occurrence of the power failure state will be described with reference to FIG. 90 .

As shown in FIG. 90(a), in the situation where the game round of the first special figure is being executed, there are three pieces of pending information of the first special figure separately from it, and the third unit pending display area Ga3 is held. Assume that the image HW is displayed in the red display mode HMd. The prefetch result of the hold information corresponding to the hold image HW is a jackpot result, and the prefetch results of the hold information corresponding to the other hold images are all lose results (complete miss).

When power failure occurs in that state, the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the display on the display screen G disappears. Along with this, all the holding images including the holding image HW are not displayed.

At this time, the RAM 314 of the main controller 162 is supplied with power during power failure for data retention from the power supply and launch control device 191, so the data stored in the RAM 314 is retained even during the power failure. be done. The data stored in the RAM 314 includes the processing result of the hold prefetch processing (step S305) performed on the hold information of each hold image before the power failure occurs.

After that, when the power failure state is resolved and the power is restored, the main controller 162 executes power restoration processing (steps S2004 to S2010) based on the data stored in the RAM 314 . As a result, the continuation of the game round (the game round of the first special figure) that was interrupted when the power failure occurred is resumed on the special figure display unit 43 .

Further, at the time of power restoration, in the main controller 162, among the data stored in the RAM 314, information indicating the number of reservations, information indicating whether each piece of reservation information corresponds to the first special figure or the second special figure, Result information (fluctuation pattern) of the pending prefetch processing for each pending information, etc. are read, and transmitted to the effect control device 143 as a pending command when power is restored (step S6101).

In the effect control device 143, based on the various information transmitted from the main control device 162, processing for restoring the display of the holding image is executed (steps S6202 to S6205). In this processing, the display mode of the holding image HW for which the jackpot result has been prefetched is set to the first specific display mode (green display mode HMc), and the display mode of the other holding images is set to the normal display mode HMa. . At this time, if there is pending information for which the variation pattern cannot be grasped, the display mode of the pending image corresponding to the pending information is set to the normal display mode HMa.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 90(b), the display mode of the holding image HW is set to the green display mode HMc, and the display mode of the other holding images is set to the normal display mode HMa. Image display is restored. When power is restored, the effect control device 143 executes a power-on notification process (step S5201) for performing power-on notification, so that the display screen G displays characters such as "The screen will be restored soon." Display 461 is displayed. Therefore, each holding image whose display has been restored is displayed together with the character display 461 .

After that, when it comes to the start timing of the game round of the holding image HW, the effect control device 143 grasps the change pattern of the holding information corresponding to the holding image HW based on the change start command transmitted from the main control device 162. . Based on the variation pattern, it is determined whether or not to upgrade the current display mode (green display mode HMc) to a higher display mode.

That is, the holding image HW of the holding information in which the jackpot result is prefetched before the occurrence of the power failure state is temporarily displayed in a restricted display mode (first specific display mode) of a predetermined value or less, and the game round is started. The display mode of the holding image HW is set again based on the fluctuation start command transmitted at this time. As a result, when it is determined to be promoted to a higher display mode (red display mode HMd or iridescent display mode HMe), as shown in FIG. The display mode is changed to a higher-level mode (for example, red display mode HMd).

In addition, when the variation pattern grasped from the variation start command transmitted at the start of the game round of the holding image HW does not correspond to the big win, that is, when the big win is not notified in the game round. is prohibited from being promoted to a higher display mode, and the display mode of the holding image HW in the execution display area D is maintained in the first specific display mode.

Next, the case where the SP out-of-reach result and the SPSP out-of-reach result are pre-read before the occurrence of the power interruption will be described with reference to FIG. 91 .

As shown in FIG. 91(a), in the situation where the game round of the first special figure is being executed, there are three pieces of the reservation information of the first special figure separately from it, and the first unit reservation display area Ga1 is reserved. It is assumed that the reserved image HW1 is displayed in the blue display mode HMb, and the reserved image HW of the third unit reserved display area Ga3 is displayed in the green display mode HMc.

The prefetch result of the hold information corresponding to the hold image HW1 is the variation pattern 3H (SP reach A out), and the preread result of the hold information corresponding to the hold image HW2 is the change pattern 6H (SPSP reach B out). It should be noted that the prefetch result of the hold information corresponding to the hold image in the second unit hold display area Ga2 is the variation pattern 1H (completely out of line).

When power failure occurs in that state, the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the display on the display screen G disappears. After that, when the power failure state is canceled and the power is restored, the continuation of the game cycle (the game cycle of the first special figure) that was interrupted when the power failure occurred is resumed on the special figure display unit 43.例文帳に追加

In addition, the effect control device 143, based on the hold command at the time of power recovery transmitted from the main control device 162, executes processing for restoring the display of the hold image (steps S6202 to S6205). At this time, for the holding image HW1 in which the variation pattern (variation pattern 3H) corresponding to the SP reach out is prefetched, the display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa, and corresponds to the higher SPSP reach out. The display mode of the holding image HW2 for which the variation pattern (variation pattern 6H) has been prefetched is set to the second specific display mode (blue display mode HMb).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 91(b), the display mode of the holding image HW1 is set to the normal display mode HMa, and the display mode of the holding image HW2 is set to the blue display mode HMb. display is restored. That is, the holding image of the holding information corresponding to the unreachable effect lower than the predetermined order is displayed in the normal display mode HMa regardless of whether or not it was displayed in the specific display mode before the occurrence of the power failure state. , the holding image of the holding information corresponding to the ready-to-win effect of the predetermined order or higher is displayed in a limited display mode (second specific display mode) of the predetermined order or lower.

When the game round of the holding image HW2 is executed, the determination of the promotion to the higher display mode is performed in the same manner as in the case where the jackpot result described with reference to FIG. 90 is read in advance. , the description is omitted.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

When a power failure occurs in a situation where the target suspension image HW is in a specific display mode (a situation in which a suspension notice effect is being executed), and then the power failure is resolved and the power is restored, the power failure occurs. A configuration is adopted in which the display mode of the target holding image HW after the restoration of power is set based on the result of the holding prefetch processing previously performed, and the holding notice effect is re-executed.

In the present embodiment, the holding notice effect is executed in which the display mode of the holding image is the specific display mode based on the result of the holding prefetching process. can arouse expectations of Furthermore, since a plurality of types of modes are set as the specific display mode so that the degree of expectation for the big win is different, it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation by giving it a magnitude, which is advantageous in arousing the player's sense of expectation. can be configured. Under such a configuration, when power failure occurs during execution of the suspension notice performance and then the power is restored, the suspension notice performance performed before the occurrence of the failure is re-executed. As a result, the suspension notice performance can be restored after the abnormality is resolved, and disappearance of the suspension notice performance due to the occurrence of the abnormality is suppressed. At that time, since the display mode of the target suspension image HW is set based on the result of the suspension prefetch processing before the occurrence of the abnormality, it is possible to preferably re-execute the suspension notice effect after the power is restored.

By storing the success/failure results and variation patterns prefetched by the reserve prefetch processing in the reserve ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314, the information corresponding to the prefetch results can be retained even after the power failure occurs.

In the above configuration, since the information corresponding to the result of prefetching is retained without being lost when a power failure occurs, after the power is restored, the display mode of the target holding image HW is based on the information retained in the RAM 314. can be determined, and it is possible to preferably re-execute the suspension notice effect after the power is restored.

In the case where the suspension notice effect is executed after the power is restored, the display mode of the target suspension image HW is limited to a predetermined mode (green display mode HMc) or less.

For example, if there is a change in the hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 314b due to the power failure, the result of the hold prefetch performed before the power failure and the success or failure performed in the game round after the power is restored. Inconsistency occurs between the determination result and the selection result of the game round effect. In such a case, before the power outage, the pending notice effect suggests a high degree of expectation. There is a concern that the game-turn effect to be performed does not match the degree of expectation suggested by the pending advance notice effect, and gives an unpleasant impression to the player. In this regard, in the above configuration, if the type of specific display mode that was performed at the time of the power failure is a mode of a predetermined level or more, and suggests a certain level of expectation, the display mode is limited to a lower level, and the pending notice effect is performed. re-run. As a result, it is possible to suppress the suggestion of the degree of expectation that does not match the notification result or the like of the game cycle by the pending advance notice effect, and it is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

When the display mode of the target holding image HW is restricted to a display mode equal to or lower than a predetermined mode, it is determined whether or not the display mode is promoted to a higher display mode in the game round of the target holding image HW, and the result is determined. It was configured to execute the promotion based on

In the above configuration, even when the display mode of the target holding image HW is limited to a display mode equal to or lower than the predetermined mode, the game round of the target holding image HW is performed to promote promotion to a higher display mode. This avoids keeping the implied expectations low.

In the above case, the determination as to whether or not to promote to a higher display mode is made based on the result of the success/failure determination performed as a trigger of the game cycle and the selection result of the variation pattern.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the target holding image HW is to be promoted, using the result after power restoration for the win/fail determination and the selection of the game round effect as a determination material. As a result, it is possible to carry out the above-mentioned promotion while making it consistent with the result of notification that is actually performed in the game cycle after the power is restored.

After the power is restored, when the result of the pending prefetch process performed before the power failure cannot be identified, the display mode of the target pending image HW is set to the normal display mode HMa.

For example, if the results of prefetch processing performed before power interruption cannot be identified for some of the holding images, and the display of the holding images is stopped, the number of holds can be appropriately notified to the player. There is concern that it will disappear. In addition, when re-executing the suspension notice effect with the suspension image for which the result of the suspension prefetch process can be specified (the display mode of the suspension image is the specific display mode), the suspension prefetch process result cannot be specified. Due to the lack of display of the image, the order of the image for holding in the specific display mode and the game round is out of order, and there is a possibility that the degree of expectation may be suggested by corresponding to another game round. . In this regard, in the present configuration, a holding image that can specify the result of the holding prefetch processing performed before the power interruption is distinguished from a holding image that cannot be specified, and the latter is redisplayed in the normal display mode HMa. Since it is configured to do so, it is possible to appropriately perform the suspension notice effect in other images for suspension while appropriately notifying the number of suspensions to the player.

When the power is restored from the power failure state, the main control device 162 outputs a power recovery holding command to the production control device 143, and the production control device 143 receives the power recovery holding command. It is configured to execute setting processing (display mode setting processing) for execution.

In this case, when the power failure state is canceled and the power is restored, the suspension notice effect can be quickly re-executed. As a result, when a power failure occurs in the middle of a game and there is a period in which the symbol variation display is not performed on the display screen G after the power is restored, the suspension notice effect is performed prior to the restoration of the symbol variation display. can be re-executed.

<Eighth embodiment>
This embodiment is configured to limit the switching of the effect mode when the holding image is displayed in the specific display mode. The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. FIG. In these figures, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as in the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the production mode is configured to be switched by manual operation, but in the present embodiment, the production mode is automatically switched without the operation of the production operation unit 36. is configured as Note that the effect mode has effect mode A and effect mode B, and these differ in the occurrence frequency of the pending advance notice effect, as in the first embodiment. Specifically, the production mode A functions as a mode in which the pending advance notice effect is easily executed and the production is easy to enjoy, and the production mode B functions as a mode in which the pending advance notice effect is difficult to execute, but a big hit when it is executed. It is configured to function as a mode with high expectations.

<Production mode switching process>
The effect mode switching process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 92 . This process is executed in step S1307 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30), and is executed in place of the effect mode switching process of FIG.

First, in step S7101, it is determined whether or not it is the lottery timing for switching the effect mode. In the present embodiment, a period in which a predetermined state (for example, a normal game state and a state in which an effect performed across a plurality of game rounds such as a continuous effect is not performed) is set as the effect mode switching effective period. , During the switching valid period, a lottery for switching the production mode is performed at a predetermined timing (for example, the start timing of the game round) in each game round. In this step, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the switching lottery. If it is not the lottery timing for switching the performance mode, the processing for switching the performance mode is terminated as it is so as to maintain the current performance mode.

When it is the lottery timing of the production mode switching, the process proceeds to step S7102, and the first mode switching lottery for performing the production mode switching lottery is executed. In this step, the lottery is performed based on the lottery counter (random number) obtained from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344 and the first mode switching lottery table stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. The first mode switching lottery table is a lottery table for lottery to determine whether or not to switch the production mode. This table may have a common winning probability irrespective of the type of staying effect mode, or may have a winning probability that varies depending on the staying effect mode.

In step S7103, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S7102 is a winning result. If the result of the lottery is a result of loss, the process for switching the effect mode is terminated as it is so as to maintain the current effect mode.

If the lottery result is a winning result, the process advances to step S7104 to execute mode switching determination processing. The mode switching determination process determines whether or not to permit switching of the production mode. Here, the mode switching determination processing in step S7104 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S7201, the current pending number is grasped by referring to the pending storage area 344c of the RAM 344. FIG. In step S7202, it is determined whether or not the number of pending items ascertained in step S7201 is zero. If the pending number is 0, it is determined in step S7203 that the effect mode switching is permitted, and then the mode switching determination process is terminated.

If the number of reserved images is not 0, the current display mode of each reserved image is grasped in step S7204. In subsequent step S7205, a holding display displayed in a specific display mode (one of the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, the red display mode HMd, and the rainbow display mode HMe) based on the grasped result in step S7204 Determine if an image exists. If there is no holding image in the specific display mode, the process advances to step S7203, and it is determined that the effect mode switching is permitted.

If there is an image for holding in the specific display mode, it is determined whether or not the current mode switching is switching from the production mode A to the production mode B in step S7206. That is, whether it is switching from the production mode on the side where the occurrence frequency of the pending notice production is high to the production mode on the low side (in other words, the production mode on the side where the jackpot expectation of the holding notice production is low to the high side (whether or not it is switching to the production mode).

In the case of switching to the effect mode B, the process proceeds to step S7207, and it is determined whether or not the prefetch result for the hold information of the hold image displayed in the specific display mode is the jackpot result. When the look-ahead result is not the jackpot result, it is determined in step S7208 that the effect mode switching is not allowed, and then the mode switching determination process is terminated. In general, the probability of losing is much higher than the probability of winning (big hit probability) in the judgment of success or failure, and most of the results of the pending look-ahead are lost, so most of the judgment results in step S7207 are negative judgments. Production mode switching is not permitted. That is, in the case of switching to the production mode B, basically, the switching of the production mode is not allowed and restricted under the condition that the holding image of the specific display mode exists.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7207 (if the result of the prefetch is a big hit result), the process advances to step S7209 to execute a second mode switching lottery for re-lottery for mode switching. In this step, the lottery is performed based on the lottery counter (random number) obtained from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344 and the second mode switching lottery table stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. Like the first mode switching lottery table, the second mode switching lottery table is a lottery table for lottery to determine whether or not to switch the effect mode. The winning probability in the second mode switching lottery table may be the same as or different from the winning probability in the first mode switching lottery table.

In step S7210, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S7209 is a winning result. When the lottery result is a result of being out, the process proceeds to step S7208, and it is determined that the effect mode switching is not permitted.

If the lottery result is a winning result, the process proceeds to step S7203, and it is determined that the effect mode switching is permitted. That is, in some cases where the look-ahead result is the jackpot result, the effect mode switching is exceptionally allowed even in a situation where the holding image in the specific display mode is displayed.

As already explained, if there is no jackpot prefetch reserve in a situation where the reserve image of the specific display mode exists, the switching of the production mode is not allowed, and even if there is a jackpot prefetch reserve, If the second mode switching lottery is lost, the switching of the performance mode is not permitted. That is, since it is rare that the switching of the production mode is permitted in a situation where the image for holding in the specific display mode exists, the player recognizes that the rule is broken, and the production is such that the big win is confirmed.

If a negative determination is made in step S7206 (if switching from production mode B to production mode A), that is, if it is a switch from the production mode on the side where the occurrence frequency of the pending advance notice production is low to the production mode on the high side (In other words, if it is a switch from the effect mode of the side with a high expectation of the jackpot to the effect mode of the low side), in step S7211, the holding image displayed in the specific display mode It is determined whether or not the display mode is equal to or greater than a predetermined mode (for example, green display mode HMc).

If the display mode is a mode lower than the predetermined mode (for example, the blue display mode HMb), the process proceeds to step S7203, and it is determined that the effect mode switching is permitted. That is, in the case of switching to the production mode A, even in a situation where the holding image of the specific display mode is displayed, if the display mode is lower than the predetermined mode, the switching of the production mode is allowed. . In this case, the effect mode is switched while the specific display mode of the holding image is maintained. In addition, when the form of the holding image changes depending on the production mode, the display color is set to the same display color as before the mode switching while the form is changed.

When the affirmative determination is made in step S7211 (when the display mode is equal to or greater than the predetermined mode), in step S7207, for the hold image whose display mode is equal to or greater than the predetermined mode, the prefetch result of the hold information is the jackpot result. Determine whether or not After that, the process of steps S7208 to S7210 is executed, and the effect mode switching is allowed on the condition that the second mode switching lottery is won.

Returning to the description of the effect mode switching process (FIG. 92), after executing the mode switching determination process in step S7104, in step S7105, whether the result of the determination process in step S7104 allows mode switching. determine whether or not If the result is that the mode switching is not allowed, the production mode switching process is terminated as it is so as to maintain the current production mode.

If the result is that mode switching is permitted, the process proceeds to step S7106, and a switching process for switching the effect mode is executed. For example, if the current performance mode is the performance mode A, the performance data is set so as to switch to the performance mode B. It should be noted that the switching of the presentation mode may be performed at the start timing of the game round, or may be performed in the middle of the game round.

In step S7107, the production mode flag corresponding to the production mode after switching is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344, and then the production mode switching process is terminated.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the processing for the second execution of the pending notice of step S1702 in the shift time command corresponding processing (FIG. 40) and the processing for the third execution of step S1808 in the special figure fluctuation display processing (FIG. 41) , associated processing, etc. are not executed.

<Restrictions on switching production modes>
A mode of limiting the switching of the effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. 94 . First, the case of switching from the production mode A to the production mode B will be described with reference to FIG. 94(a).

When it is time to switch the performance mode, if there is no suspension, or if there is no suspension image in a specific display mode even if there is suspension, the switching of the performance mode is allowed.

When there is an image for suspension in a specific display mode, basically switching of the effect mode is not permitted. That is, from production mode A in which the frequency of occurrence of the pending notice effect is relatively high (production mode in which the degree of expectation for the jackpot of the pending notice effect is relatively low) to production mode B (the degree of expectation for the jackpot in the pending notice effect is relatively low) In the case of switching to a relatively high production mode), the switching of the production mode is restricted on the condition that there is a holding image in a specific display mode.

However, even if there is an image for holding in a specific display mode, if there is one in which the big win result is prefetched, the switching of the production mode is exceptionally allowed. In this case, as already explained, the effect is such that the big win is determined due to the effect contradiction. When there is reservation information in which a big win result is prefetched and the display mode is the normal display mode HMa, the changeover of the performance mode is permitted assuming that there is no image for suspension in the specific display mode.

Next, the case of switching from the production mode B to the production mode A will be described with reference to FIG. 94(b).

When it is time to switch the production mode, if there is no suspension, or if there is no suspension image in a specific display mode even if there is a suspension, similar to the case of switching from the production mode A to the production mode B, Switching of production modes is allowed.

When there is a holding image in a specific display mode, whether or not mode switching is permitted depends on the display mode. Specifically, when the display mode of the holding image displayed in the specific display mode is a display mode (blue display mode HMb) lower than the predetermined display mode, the switching of the effect mode is allowed. That is, from the production mode B (production mode with a relatively high degree of expectation for the jackpot of the reservation notice effect) to the production mode A (the degree of expectation for the jackpot of the reservation notice effect is relatively high), the frequency of occurrence of the reservation notice effect is relatively low. In the case of switching to a relatively low production mode), the switching restriction is relaxed more than in the case of the opposite. In this case, the display mode for the on-hold image is maintained in the specific display mode before the mode switching without being changed to the normal display mode HMa.

On the other hand, when the display mode of the holding image is a display mode equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode, the effect mode switching is not permitted except when there is a case where the big win result is pre-read. In other words, when the player is notified of a certain degree of expectation by the pending notice effect, the switching of the effect mode is restricted.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

A configuration is adopted in which switching of the performance mode is restricted when the suspension notice performance in which the display mode of the suspension image is the specific display mode is being executed.

In the present embodiment, the holding notice effect is executed in which the display mode of the holding image is the specific display mode based on the result of the holding prefetching process. can arouse expectations. In addition, since the mode is switched between the performance mode A and the performance mode B, the player can change his/her mood during the game and can suppress boredom with the game. In such a configuration, for example, if the performance mode is switched during the execution of the pending notice effect, the attention to the pending notice effect is reduced due to the change of the effect mode, or conversely, the pending notice effect As a result of concentrating, there is a concern that the presentation mode is changed without the player's awareness, causing confusion.

In this regard, in this configuration, when the pending advance notice effect is being executed, the switching of the effect mode is restricted, so it is possible to suppress the overlap between the execution of the pending advance notice effect and the switching of the effect mode. As a result, the execution of the pending advance notice effect and the switching of the effect mode can be carried out in such a manner that the player can easily pay attention to each of them, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience. In addition, if the production mode after switching is not suitable for the pending advance notice production being executed, prior adjustment is required to match both when designing production, but according to this configuration, such adjustment is possible. There is also an advantage that it becomes unnecessary and the burden at the time of design can be reduced.

The performance mode A and the performance mode B have different easiness of execution of the pending notice performance.

In the case of such a configuration, by switching the production mode, the production characteristics related to the suggestion of the degree of expectation of the big win change, so compared to the case where only the appearance is changed by changing the background image or the character image, etc. It can make a strong impression on people. On the other hand, however, if the performance mode is switched while the pending advance notice effect is being executed, there is a possibility that the degree of expectation suggested by the pending notice effect is different before and after switching the effect mode. In this case, there is a concern that the degree of expectation indicated by the pending advance notice effect and the result of the success/failure determination that is actually reported in the effect mode after the switching may differ, giving the player an unpleasant impression. By applying the present embodiment (configuration for limiting the switching of the production mode when the suspension notice production is being executed) to such a configuration, the occurrence of the above discrepancy is avoided, and the player is unpleasant. Giving an impression can be suitably suppressed.

The performance mode B is a performance mode in which the suspension advance notice performance is less likely to be executed than the performance mode A, and is configured to restrict switching to the performance mode B when the suspension advance notice performance is executed in the performance mode A.

In a case where the ease of execution of the pending advance notice performance in the performance mode B is lower than that in the performance mode A, if the performance mode A is switched to the performance mode B while the pending advance notice performance is being executed, the apparent degree of expectation increases. There is a concern that the player will be expected to have higher expectations than they actually are. In this regard, in this configuration, the pending notice effect is difficult to execute from the production mode A, in which the pending notice effect is likely to be executed (the expectation level corresponding to the When switching to the performance mode B), the execution of the switching is restricted if the suspension notice performance is being executed, so it is possible to suitably suppress the suggestion of a higher expectation level than the actual one. become.

When the pending notice effect is being executed in the effect mode A, the switching to the effect mode B is basically restricted, and an exception is made when the pending predictive result triggered by the pending notice effect is a jackpot result. It is configured to allow switching to the production mode B.

In this case, even though the switching of the production mode is not normally performed, the occurrence of the switching causes the player to break the law and suggest a big win. In other words, it becomes possible to utilize the switching of the production mode as one of the expectations suggesting productions.

When the condition for switching to the performance mode A is satisfied while the pending advance notice performance is being executed in the performance mode B, whether switching to the performance mode A is restricted depending on the type of the specific display mode when the switching condition is satisfied. It is configured to vary whether or not.

When the pending notice effect is being executed, if the switching of the effect mode is uniformly restricted, the switching of the effect mode may be excessively restricted, or the execution frequency of the pending notice effect may be suppressed. , there is a concern that the significance of providing a plurality of types of production modes and the significance of installing the execution function of the pending advance notice production will be diminished. In this regard, in this configuration, when switching from the performance mode B with a high expectation corresponding to the pending notice performance to the performance mode A with a low expectation corresponding to the pending notice performance, the restrictions on mode switching are relaxed and switching is performed. Switching is permitted under the condition that the specific display mode when the condition is established is equal to or less than a predetermined mode (green display mode HMc). For this reason, it is possible to prevent the switching of the effect mode and the execution of the pending advance notice effect from being excessively restricted, and it is possible to suitably ensure those opportunities.

<Ninth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, when the effect mode is switched, the execution of the pending notice effect is restricted. The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 95 to 99. FIG. In these figures, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, switching guidance notification is performed during the effective period of switching of the production mode, and when the player operates the operation unit 36 for production while the notification is being performed, the production mode is switched from the next game round. is configured as An example of such mode switching will now be described.

As shown in FIG. 95(a), a switching guidance image 451 is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 as a switching guidance notification in a predetermined game cycle during the effect mode switching effective period. This switching guide image 451 is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, a period until the game cycle ends).

In FIG. 95(a), as a display example of the switching guidance image 451, a character display such as "If you press the effect button, the effect mode will switch" is displayed as a telop above the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G. is shown. Note that the switching guidance notification is not limited to this, and may be such as displaying a window in which the above character display is performed, or causing a predetermined light-emitting unit corresponding to the switching guidance to emit light. . Further, the notification is not necessarily limited to visual notification, and voice guidance using the speaker unit 29 may be used.

In such a state, when the player performs a predetermined operation with the effect operation section 36, a switching standby notification is performed. The switching standby notification notifies that the switching of the production mode is on standby. Although the specific mode of switching standby notification is not particularly limited, for example, as shown in FIG. One that displays an image 452 is conceivable.

When the game cycle in which the switching standby image 452 is displayed is completed and the next game cycle is started, the display of the switching standby image 452 is erased and the effect mode is switched as shown in FIG. 95(c). .

Also, if the player does not operate the effect operation unit 36 during the display period of the switching guide image 451 of FIG. The production mode of is maintained.

Note that the effect mode has effect mode A and effect mode B, and these differ in the occurrence frequency of the pending advance notice effect, as in the first embodiment. Specifically, the production mode A functions as a mode in which the pending advance notice effect is easily executed and the production is easy to enjoy, and the production mode B functions as a mode in which the pending advance notice effect is difficult to execute, but a big hit when it is executed. It is configured to function as a mode with high expectations.

<Production mode switching process>
The effect mode switching process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This process is executed in step S1307 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30), and is executed in place of the effect mode switching process of FIG.

First, in step S8101, it is determined whether or not it is during the effect mode switching effective period. Also in this embodiment, as in the eighth embodiment, a predetermined state (for example, a normal game state and a state in which an effect that is performed across a plurality of game rounds such as a continuous effect is not performed) is set as the effect mode switching effective period. If it is not during the effect mode switching valid period, the process for effect mode switching is terminated so as to maintain the current effect mode.

If it is during the effect mode switching valid period, the process proceeds to step S8102, and it is determined whether or not the switching standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM344. The switching standby flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp that it is in a state of waiting for mode switching, in other words, that the production mode will switch after that.

If the switch standby flag is not stored, that is, if the mode switching standby state is not set, the flow advances to step S8103 to determine whether or not the guidance display flag is stored in the flag storage area 344d. The guidance notification flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp that the switching guidance notification is being executed.

If the guidance notification flag is not stored, that is, if the switching guidance notification is not being executed, the process advances to step S8104 to determine whether or not it is time to execute the switching guidance notification execution lottery. The execution lottery for the switching guidance notification is a process of drawing lots to determine whether or not to execute the switching guidance notification. Although the lottery timing of the switching guidance notification is not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the start timing of the game cycle is set to the lottery timing. When it is not the lottery timing, the production mode switching process is terminated as it is.

If it is the lottery timing, the process advances to step S8105 to perform a lottery for switching guidance notification. In this step, the lottery is performed based on the lottery counter (random number) obtained from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344 and the switching guidance lottery table stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. In step S8106, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S8105 is a winning result. When the lottery result is a result of losing, the effect mode switching process is terminated so that the switching guidance notification is not executed.

If the lottery result is a winning result, the process advances to step S8107 to control the display control device 350 to display the switching guidance image 451 as the switching guidance notification. Specifically, a command to display the switching guidance image 451 is set as a transmission command to the display control device 350 . As a result, the switching guidance image 451 is displayed on the display screen G. FIG. In step S8108, the guidance notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d, and then the effect mode switching process is terminated.

When the affirmative determination is made in step S8103 (when the guidance notification flag is stored), that is, when the switching guidance notification is being executed, the process proceeds to step S8109, and the performance mode is switched by the performance operation unit 36. is performed. If the predetermined operation has been performed, the process advances to step S8110 to erase the guidance notification flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d.

In step S8111, a switching standby flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d. As a result, the mode shifts to a waiting state for mode switching. In step S8112, the display control device 350 is controlled to display the switching standby image 452 as switching standby notification. Specifically, a command to display the switching standby image 452 is set as a transmission command to the display control device 350 . As a result, the switching standby image 452 is displayed on the display screen G. FIG. After execution of step S8112, the production mode switching process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S8109 (the predetermined operation has not been performed), the process advances to step S8113 to determine whether or not the display period of the switching guidance image 451 (the switching guidance notification period) has elapsed. If the display period has not elapsed, the effect mode switching process is terminated so as to continue the display of the switching guide image 451 .

If the display period has passed, the process advances to step S8114 to erase the guidance notification flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d. As a result, the acceptance period of the switching operation of the production mode ends. Further, in step S8114, the display control device 350 is controlled to erase the switching guide image 451. FIG. After execution of step S8114, the production mode switching process is terminated.

If the determination in step S8102 is affirmative (if the switching standby flag is stored), that is, if the mode switching standby state is set, the process advances to step S8115 to determine whether or not it is time to execute mode switching. . The switching timing of the production mode is not particularly limited as long as it is the timing after the transition to the standby state, but in the present embodiment, the next game round that is performed after the game round in which the switching operation is completed is started. The timing is set to the above switching timing. If it is not the switching timing, the production mode switching process is terminated so as to continue the mode switching standby state.

If it is the switching timing, the flow advances to step S8116 to erase the switching wait flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d. This completes the standby state for mode switching. In step S8117, switching processing for switching the production mode is executed. For example, if the current performance mode is the performance mode A, the performance data is set so as to switch to the performance mode B.

In step S8118, an effect mode flag corresponding to the effect mode after switching is set in the various flag storage areas 344d. In step S8119, the second setting process of the pending notice is executed, and then the effect mode switching process is terminated. The second setting processing of the pending notice is to set the execution of the pending notice effect for the holding information generated during the waiting period of the mode switching. Details of the setting process will be described later.

<Processing for pending command>
The pending command handling process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed when a hold command is received from the main control device 162 (executed in step S1302 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30)), instead of the hold command handling process of FIG. It is executed. In FIG. 97, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 31, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In step S1402, after incrementing by 1 the value of the pending number counter (starting pending storage number SN) provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344, the flow advances to step S8201 to store the switching wait flag in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344. is stored. If the switch standby flag is not stored, that is, if the mode switch is not in a standby state, the process advances to step S1403 to execute setting processing for suspension notice (FIG. 34). In the setting process for the pending notice, setting for executing the pending notice effect is performed for the generated pending information.

If the switch standby flag is stored (mode switching standby state), the process advances to step S8202 to set the display mode of the hold image corresponding to the generated hold information to the normal display mode HMa. That is, in the present embodiment, when new hold information is generated during the standby period for mode switching, execution of the hold advance notice effect triggered by the hold information is restricted.

Prefetching of the pending information is performed by the pending prefetching process (FIG. 26) of the main controller 162 in the same manner as other pending information. Therefore, in the effect control device 143, the setting process for the suspension notice in step S1403 is not executed, and the display mode of the suspension image is forcibly set to the normal display mode HMa. It is in the state acquired by the pending command from the device 162 .

In step S8203, in association with the generated hold information, wait occurrence information indicating that the hold information is generated during the standby period is stored. This process is carried out by storing the waiting occurrence information in the first to fourth areas (FIG. 32) provided in the reserve storage area 344c of the RAM 344, for example. Therefore, when the shift process of step S1704 in the shift command handling process (FIG. 40) is executed, the standby occurrence information is shifted to the lower area side along with the hold information (fluctuation pattern information, etc.). Thereby, even when the shift processing is performed and the display area of the images for suspension is shifted, it is possible to grasp which images for suspension occurred during the standby period. Note that the standby occurrence information may be stored in a storage area other than the suspension storage area 344c of the RAM 344 as long as it is possible to recognize which suspension information is targeted.

After execution of step S8203, in step S1405, processing for displaying a hold image on the hold display portion 200 of the display screen G is executed. As described above, since the display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa in step S8202, the hold image of the hold information generated during the standby period is displayed in the normal display mode HMa.

<Second setting process for hold notice>
The second setting process for holding notice in step S8119 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The second setting process for the pending advance notice is to set the execution setting of the pending advance notice effect for the holding information generated during the waiting period of the mode switching.

First, in step S8301, hold information generated during the waiting period for mode switching is grasped. That is, based on the wait occurrence information, it is specified which hold information is the hold information that occurred during the waiting period among the hold information existing at that time.

After executing the processing of step S8301, the processing of step S8302 and subsequent steps is executed for the hold of occurrence during the grasped standby period. Note that most of the processing after step S8302 is the same as each processing in the reservation notice setting processing (FIG. 34), so common processing will be simplified, and different processing will be described in detail. .

In steps S8302 to S8304, referring to the storage area 344c for suspension of the RAM 344, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern in the occurrence suspension during the standby period is grasped, and whether or not the jackpot is won. In step S8305, the production mode after switching is grasped. For example, when the current mode switching is switching from the production mode A to the production mode B, the production mode B is grasped as the production mode after the switching.

In steps S8306 to S8308, a holding notice execution lottery table corresponding to the effect mode after switching grasped in step S8305 is acquired, and a holding notice effect execution lottery is performed. When the execution lottery is won, in steps S8309 to S8314, the final display mode of the holding image in the holding notice effect is determined, or the effect scenario is determined. At that time, if different tables are set for each effect mode as the final display mode lottery table for lottery for the final display mode or the effect scenario lottery table for lottery for the effect scenario, it is grasped in step S8305. A lottery is performed by acquiring a table corresponding to the performance mode after switching.

As described above, in the present embodiment, for the hold information generated during the waiting period for mode switching, setting of the holding notice effect (setting processing of the display mode based on the result of prefetching) is performed when the waiting state is canceled. At that time, although the occurrence suspension during the standby period occurred during the production mode before switching, the execution lottery of the suspension notice production and the lottery of the final display mode are set for the production mode after switching. Applying the above conditions, it is performed corresponding to the production mode after switching.

In step S8315, a hold notice flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344, and then the second setting process for the hold notice is terminated. After the hold notice flag is set in this manner, the first execution processing of the hold notice of step S1701 in the shift time command corresponding processing (FIG. 38(a)) and the special figure fluctuation display processing (FIG. 41) In step S1807 in step S1807, processing for changing the display mode of the suspension image to the specific display mode is executed. That is, the suspension notice effect for the suspension information generated during the standby period for mode switching is performed after the effect mode is switched.

<About the display mode of the holding image when the production mode is switched>
95 and 99, the display mode of the holding image when the effect mode is switched will be described. Here, the case where the production mode A is switched to the production mode B will be described as an example.

If the lottery for switching guidance notification is won during the mode switching effective period, a switching guidance image 451 is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 as shown in FIG. 95(a). In this state, when the player performs a mode switching operation using the effect operation section 36, the mode shifts to a standby state for mode switching (a state in which the player is aware that the mode will be switched later), as shown in FIG. 99(a). As shown, the switching standby image 452 is displayed on the display screen G. FIG. The standby state for mode switching ends when the mode switching timing (starting timing of the next game round) comes.

Assuming that two pieces of new pending information are generated during the standby period, the main controller 162 executes the pending prefetch process (step S305) in the same manner as for the pending information generated in a situation other than the standby period, and reads each of the pending information. Foresee fluctuation patterns, etc. of information. In addition, the effect control device 143 does not execute the setting process (step S1403) for the suspension notice targeting each of the suspension information, and changes the display mode of the corresponding suspension images HW1 and HW2 to the normal display mode HMa. set.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 99(b), the holding images HW1 and HW2 in the normal display mode HMa are displayed in the second unit reserved display area Ga2 and the third unit reserved display area Ga3 of the first reserved display area Ga. Is displayed. The state in which the display mode of the holding images HW1 and HW2 is set to the normal display mode HMa continues at least until the standby state ends.

When the mode switching timing comes along with the start of the next game round, the standby state for mode switching ends, and the production mode is switched from the production mode A to the production mode B as shown in FIG. 99(c). At this time, the effect control device 143 executes the second setting process (step S8119) for the suspension notice for the suspension information (the images HW1 and HW2 for suspension) generated during the standby period.

In the second setting process for pending notice, various lotteries for executing the pending notice effect (execution lottery for pending notice effect, final display, etc.) mode lottery, production scenario lottery, etc.). At that time, the lottery table set for the performance mode B, which is the performance mode after switching, is used for those lotteries.

As a result of the second setting process for the pending notice, it is assumed that the holding notice effect is not executed for the holding notice HW1, and the holding image HW2 is changed to the blue display mode HMb at the next shift timing. As shown in FIG. 99(d), when the holding image HW2 is shifted from the second unit holding display area Ga2 to the first unit holding display area Ga1, the display mode changes from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb. is changed to That is, the suspension notice effect triggered by the suspension information generated during the mode switching waiting period is executed after the mode switching.

In addition, there is a case where the switching guidance notification execution lottery is won during execution of the pending notice effect, and the switching guidance image 451 (FIG. 95(a)) is displayed in a situation where the pending notice effect is being executed. In this case, the pending advance notice effect is not subject to the execution restriction, and the standby state is entered while the pending notice effect is continued.

In addition, when the hold information is generated during the period from the display of the switching guidance image 451 until the switching operation is performed (until the transition to the standby state), and the hold notice effect is executed with the hold information as a trigger. There is also In other words, the standby state may be entered in a state in which the hold image of the hold information acquired after the switching guidance image 451 is displayed is in the specific display mode. In this case as well, the pending advance notice effect is not subject to execution restriction, and the standby state is entered while the pending notice effect is continued.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

In a structure for switching the presentation mode when the switching condition of the presentation mode is established and the switching state is shifted to the standby state, and then when the switching timing comes, the display mode of the holding image is set to the specific display mode during the standby state. A configuration is adopted in which the execution of the advance notice effect is restricted.

In the present embodiment, the holding notice effect is executed in which the display mode of the holding image is the specific display mode based on the result of the holding prefetching process. can arouse expectations of In addition, since the mode is switched between the performance mode A and the performance mode B, the player can change his/her mood during the game and can suppress boredom with the game. In such a configuration, for example, if the performance mode is switched during the execution of the pending notice effect, the attention to the pending notice effect is reduced due to the change of the effect mode, or conversely, the pending notice effect As a result of concentrating, there is a concern that the presentation mode is changed without the player's awareness, causing confusion.

In this regard, according to the present configuration, in the state where it is understood that the production mode will be switched later (waiting state for mode switching), the execution of the pending notice production is restricted, so the production mode is changed during the execution of the pending notice production. Switching can be suppressed. As a result, the execution of the pending advance notice effect and the switching of the effect mode can be carried out in such a manner that the player can easily pay attention to each of them, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience. In addition, if the production mode after switching is not suitable for the pending advance notice production being executed, prior adjustment is required to match both when designing production, but according to this configuration, such adjustment is possible. There is also an advantage that it becomes unnecessary and the burden at the time of design can be reduced.

It is configured to restrict the execution of the suspension notice effect for the suspension information acquired during the standby state.

With the above configuration, the range of the special state subject to restriction of the pending notice effect is widened, and it is possible to suppress the execution of the pending notice effect from being excessively restricted. In particular, if the suspension information acquired during the period from the display of the switching guidance image 451 to the transition to the standby state is subject to the execution restriction of the suspension notice effect, it is uncertain whether the effect mode will actually be switched. Execution of the suspension notice effect is limited to the suspension information acquired in . In this case, if the player does not execute the switching operation and the effect mode is not switched, as a result, the execution of the pending notice effect is restricted for the pending information that did not need to be restricted. However, according to this configuration, it is possible to suppress such useless restrictions.

The configuration is such that the execution of the suspension notice effect is restricted regardless of the result of the suspension look-ahead processing.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to forcibly restrict the execution of the pending notice effect regardless of the result of the pending prefetching process. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress the effect mode from being switched during execution of the pending advance notice effect. In addition, since the execution limit of the pending notice effect is not affected by the result of the pending prefetching process, even in the standby state (during the limit period of the pending notice effect), the pending prefetching process proceeds in the same way as in the non-waiting state. be able to. That is, since there is no need to change the configuration of the pending prefetch processing, it is possible to restrict the execution of the pending advance notice effect during the standby state while suppressing complication of the configuration.

The performance mode A and the performance mode B have different easiness of execution of the pending notice performance.

In the case of such a configuration, by switching the production mode, the production characteristics related to the suggestion of the degree of expectation of the big win change, so compared to the case where only the appearance is changed by changing the background image or the character image, etc. It can make a strong impression on people. On the other hand, however, if the performance mode is switched while the pending advance notice effect is being executed, there is a possibility that the degree of expectation suggested by the pending notice effect is different before and after switching the effect mode. In this case, there is a concern that the degree of expectation indicated by the pending advance notice effect and the result of the success/failure determination that is actually reported in the effect mode after the switching may differ, giving the player an unpleasant impression. To such a configuration, by applying the present embodiment (configuration for limiting the execution of the pending notice effect in the standby state in which the effect mode is being prepared for switching), the occurrence of the discrepancy is avoided. , it is possible to suitably suppress giving an unpleasant impression to the player.

The performance mode B is a performance mode in which the suspension advance notice performance is less likely to be executed than the performance mode A, and is configured to restrict switching to the performance mode B when the suspension advance notice performance is executed in the performance mode A.

In a case where the ease of execution of the pending advance notice performance in the performance mode B is lower than that in the performance mode A, if the performance mode A is switched to the performance mode B while the pending advance notice performance is being executed, the apparent degree of expectation increases. There is a concern that the player will be expected to have higher expectations than they actually are. In this regard, in this configuration, the pending notice effect is difficult to execute from the production mode A, in which the pending notice effect is likely to be executed (the expectation level corresponding to the At the time of switching to the performance mode B), when the preparation for switching to the mode is underway, the execution of the pending notice performance is restricted. As a result, switching from the performance mode A to the performance mode B is suppressed during execution of the pending advance notice performance, and it is possible to suitably suppress the suggestion of an expectation level higher than the actual one.

A configuration is adopted in which a suspension notice performance corresponding to suspension information acquired during a standby state is executed after the performance mode is switched. As a result, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the execution of the pending advance notice effect remains restricted for the pending information acquired during the standby state, and the expectation degree suggestion cannot be performed.

In the above case, the suspension notice effect after mode switching is configured to be executed based on the result of suspension prefetch processing (suspension prefetch processing when suspension information is acquired) performed during the standby state. In this case, it is possible to execute the suspension notice effect corresponding to the suspension information acquired during the standby state without executing the suspension prefetch processing again after the effect mode is switched. As a result, the existing configuration can be used as it is for the pending prefetch processing of the main controller 162, and complication of the configuration can be suppressed.

For the hold information acquired during the standby state, after switching the production mode, an execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the holding notice production, and the lottery conditions (winning probability, etc.) for the execution lottery are set after switching. It is configured to apply the conditions set corresponding to the production mode.

In the above configuration, when drawing lots to determine whether or not to execute the pending notice effect after switching the effect mode, the lottery conditions when the target hold information is acquired (the lottery set corresponding to the effect mode before switching condition), but the lottery condition set corresponding to the production mode after switching is applied. Thereby, even if the suspension information is acquired during the standby state (before switching of the performance mode), it is possible to perform the suspension notice performance corresponding to the performance mode after switching.

When the pending information is acquired during the standby state, the standby occurrence information indicating that the pending information was acquired during the standby state is stored in the pending storage area 344 c of the RAM 344 .

According to the above configuration, based on the waiting occurrence information stored in the holding storage area 344c of the RAM 344, it can be grasped after the waiting state that the holding information was acquired during the waiting state. Therefore, after the standby state ends, even if the pending information acquired before entering the standby state and the pending information acquired during the standby state are mixed, the pending information acquired during the standby state can be easily retrieved. can be specified. As a result, in the case of executing the suspension notice effect after mode switching, the suspension information acquired during the standby state is distinguished from the other suspension information, and only the suspension information acquired during the standby state is processed. It becomes possible to do

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the descriptions of the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above-described embodiments, or may be applied to each of the above-described embodiments by combining a part or all of them. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured.

(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, up to four pieces of hold information based on the winning of the first operation port 62 are stored. may be), and may be five or more. Also, the upper limit number of pieces of pending information to be stored based on winning to the second operation port 63 may be less than four (may be one), or may be five or more. Moreover, it is good also as a structure with which the upper limit storage number of the pending|holding information based on winning a prize to each operation|movement opening 62 and 63 differs.

(2) In each of the embodiments described above, the configuration is such that the pending information based on the winning of the first operation port 62 and the second operation port 63 is distinguished, but it may be configured so as not to be distinguished. In addition, the reservation information based on the winning to the second operation opening 63 is prioritized over the reservation information based on the winning to the first operation opening 62, and is the target of the winning/failure determination, but the relationship is reversed. Or, it may be a configuration in which winning or losing determination is performed in order of prize winning.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, only game balls that flow down the right route are configured to pass through the through gate 64 and the second operation opening 63 or win prizes, but only game balls that flow down the left route pass. Alternatively, it may be configured to allow winning, or may be configured to allow passing or winning from either the right route or the left route. However, in terms of sharpening the game, only game balls that flow down either the right route or the left route can enter the first operating port 62, and only game balls that flow down the other of the right route and the left route are through gates. 64, the second operation opening 63 can be passed through or won.

(4) In each of the above-described embodiments, the image for suspension is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75, thereby performing the suspension notification that allows the player to recognize the number of suspensions. The holding image may be displayed on a display unit separate from the device 75, or the holding lamp units (light emitting units) provided in a number corresponding to the upper limit storage number may be caused to emit light, and depending on the number of the holding lamp units that emit light It is good also as a structure which alert|reports the number of reservations. When the holding lamp part is caused to emit light, the holding notice effect is performed by setting the light emission mode (e.g., light emission color) to a specific light emission mode different from the normal light emission mode based on the result of the hold prefetch processing. be able to.

(5) In each of the above-described embodiments, the result of the success/failure determination is a jackpot result, so that the transition to the jackpot game (opening/closing execution mode) is performed. The result is a small winning result, and the game ball moves through the V winning opening (V winning sensor) in a small winning game (a game state in which a variable winning device having a V winning opening inside or having a V winning opening and an exit opening is opened and closed). When passing (when the result of grant determination becomes a predetermined result and a predetermined game result), it may be configured to shift to a jackpot game.

In addition, in the present invention, ``a privilege can be given to the player based on the result of the grant correspondence'' or ``the transition to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the result of the grant It can be understood that "make" includes the case where the result of the winning/failure determination is a small winning result as described above, and the transition to a big winning game occurs via V winning.

(6) In each of the above-described embodiments, as the specific notification, the holding notice effect in which the display mode of the holding image is the specific display mode is executed. The configuration of each embodiment may be applied to a game round effect (so-called continuous advance notice effect or look-ahead zone effect) that is executed over a plurality of game times based on the result of (1).

(7) In each of the above-described embodiments, an effect that spans game rounds is executed as the specific notification. There may be. For example, in the case of the first embodiment, it is assumed that the effect mode is switched over a plurality of times during the game round. In this case, the effect performed in the game round does not necessarily have to be triggered by the result of the pending look-ahead process, but is based on the result of the success or failure judgment performed at the start of the game round. may be

(8) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbols variably displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 are configured to scroll in the horizontal direction. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the symbols are scrolled in the vertical direction so as to be variably displayed. In other words, the direction in which the symbols are arranged and the direction in which the symbols are scrolled are not particularly limited. Also, the number of symbols (the number of rows of symbol rows) is not limited to three, and may be two, or may be four or more.

(9) In each of the above-described embodiments, the execution display area D is provided so as to notify the player of the execution of the game round that has been put on hold. good.

(10) In each of the above-described embodiments, when executing the suspension notice effect, the effect scenario is set including the notification period in the execution display area D, but the target suspension image HW is displayed in the execution display area D A production scenario may be set for a period before being displayed (a period during which the game round of the target suspension image HW is suspended).

(11) In each of the above-described embodiments, when executing the suspension notice effect, the setting is performed step by step, such as determining the final display mode of the suspension image and then setting the effect scenario. may be configured to set the final display mode and effect scenario in the process of . For example, one table may be used to determine both the final display mode and the production scenario.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, when notifying the performance control device 143 of the result of the pending prefetching process executed by the main control device 162, the information of the variation pattern is transmitted, but the data capacity of the transmission command is In order to suppress the increase, predetermined information with a smaller amount of data than the variation pattern (identifier corresponding to the variation pattern, rank information when the variation pattern is ranked according to the degree of expectation, etc.) As a configuration for transmitting good too. This also applies to the hold command at power recovery and the like in the sixth embodiment.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, the game round production (production pattern) is determined based on the variation pattern. good. In this case, the main control device 162 does not execute the pending prefetching process, and based on the pending command from the main control device 162 (information indicating the value of the fluctuation type counter CS and the jackpot random number counter C1), the effect control device 143 It is good to have the structure which performs pending|holding prefetching process (process which prefetches the result of success-or-failure determination, and game round production|presentation).

(14) In each of the above-described embodiments, the mode of the pending notice effect (the display mode of the image for suspension) is set based on the variation pattern specified by the pending prefetch process. Based on the information of the variation pattern (variation pattern specified by the pending prefetching process) transmitted from, the performance pattern (game round performance) is read in advance, and the mode of the pending notice performance is set based on the result. . Such a configuration is particularly effective when, for example, one variation pattern corresponds to a plurality of types of production patterns (game round production).

(15) In the first to fourth and sixth to ninth embodiments, the configuration is such that the pending prefetching process is performed by the main control device 162, but it is also possible to configure it to be performed by the effect control device 143 or the display control device 350. good. When executing the pending look-ahead process in the effect control device 143, information corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the variation type counter CS (obtained random number) is sent from the main control device 162 as in the fifth embodiment. It is good to set it as the structure which transmits to the production|presentation control apparatus 143 and prefetches the lottery result etc. of the result of right or wrong determination and a variation pattern in the production|presentation control apparatus 143. FIG. Further, in the fifth embodiment, at least one of the first pending prefetch processing and the second pending prefetch processing may be performed by the main controller 162 .

(16) In the first to fifth embodiments, the display mode of the target holding image HW is restored to the original specific display mode and then promoted to a higher display mode, but the original specific display A configuration may be adopted in which the display mode is promoted to a higher display mode without returning to the mode. In addition, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which both a case of returning to the original specific display mode and then promoting to a higher display mode and a case of promoting to a higher display mode without returning to the original specific display mode may occur. good.

(17) In the first to fifth embodiments, when the display mode of the target holding image HW is returned to the original specific display mode, the display mode of the target holding image HW is restored step by step However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the gradual return mode does not occur. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which the display mode is returned to the original specific display mode by uniformly changing the display mode once.

(18) In the above-described first to fifth embodiments, the recovery scenario is set including the display period in the execution display area D, but the first suspension display area Ga or the second suspension display area Gb A return scenario may be set only for the display period (not including the display period in the execution display area D).

(19) In the above-described first to fifth embodiments, the configuration may be such that the promotion processing of the target holding image HW is not executed.

(20) In the first to fifth embodiments, the original specific display in the period (holding period) in which the target holding image HW is displayed in the first holding display area Ga or the second holding display area Gb Although it is configured to return to the mode and then to be promoted to a higher display mode in the game round of the target holding image HW, it is not always necessary to wait for the promotion until the game round of the target holding image HW, and the holding period It is good also as a structure which can be promoted by . When the promotion process is performed before the game round is started, the hold prefetch process performed for the target hold image HW (hold information) instead of the change start command transmitted from the main controller 162 at the start of the change See results.

(21) In the above-described first to fifth embodiments, when the target holding image HW is promoted to a higher display mode in the game round, the fluctuation start command transmitted from the main controller 162 at the start of fluctuation is Although it is configured to refer to, it may be configured to perform the promotion based on the result of the pending prefetch processing performed for the target pending image HW (holding information).

(22) In the first to third embodiments, the production mode is switched by the player's operation (manual), but as in the eighth embodiment, regardless of the player's operation, A configuration may be adopted in which the production mode is automatically switched to.

(23) In the first to third embodiments, the effect mode is switched during the game, but the effect mode may be switched via the opening/closing execution mode (jackpot game). For example, a plurality of production modes are set as the production mode for the high-quality game state, and the player can select which production mode to play in the opening and closing execution mode immediately before that. , the configurations according to the first to third embodiments may be applied.

For example, when applying the configuration according to the first embodiment, the following configuration can be used. In the performance mode A in the high-probability game state, the display mode of the target holding image HW is set to the specific display mode, and in the game round of the holding information before the target holding image HW, the probability variable jackpot is obtained and the opening/closing execution mode is shifted to. Then, when an effect mode B different from the effect mode A is selected during the opening/closing execution mode, the display mode of the object holding image HW is displayed normally in the effect mode B (high-precision game state) after the opening/closing execution mode. Mode HMa is set. Then, in the game round of the holding information before the target holding image HW, the variable probability hits again and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, and when the effect mode A is selected during the opening/closing execution mode, after the opening/closing execution mode. The display mode of the target holding image HW is set to the original specific display mode in the production mode A (high accuracy game state).

In addition, in the above configuration, it is not limited to the case where the effect mode is switched by the player's operation (manual), and the effect mode may be automatically switched without depending on the player's operation.

(24) In the first to third embodiments, the ease of execution (execution probability) of the pending notice effect is different between the effect mode A and the effect mode B, but in these effect modes may be configured to have the same ease of execution.

(25) In the above-described first to third embodiments, two types of production modes, production mode A and production mode B, are provided as multiple types of production states, but a configuration with three or more production modes may be At that time, for example, in a configuration including production mode A to production mode C as three or more types of production states, the pending notice production is difficult to execute in the order of production mode A> production mode B> production mode C. The performance mode may have a configuration in which the easiness of execution of the pending advance notice effect is different from each other, or the configuration may be such that the ease of execution of the pending notice effect is the same in all of the production modes A to C. Mode A and production mode C have the same easiness of execution of the pending advance notice effect, but production mode B has the same ease of execution of the pending advance notice effect, such as difficulty in executing the pending advance notice effect, and A configuration may be adopted in which performance modes with different easiness of execution are mixed.

In addition, in a configuration in which a production mode in which the ease of execution of the pending notice production is the same and a production mode in which the ease of execution is different are mixed, switching between the production modes in which the ease of execution is the same Also, similar to the switching between different effect modes, the display mode of the target holding image HW may be changed to the normal display mode HMa with the switching of the effect mode. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which switching between production modes with the same ease of execution and switching between different production modes are not distinguished.

Further, in switching between production modes with the same ease of execution, unlike switching between different production modes, even if the production mode is switched, the normal display mode HMa is not changed, and the specific display before mode switching is performed. The configuration may be such that the aspect is maintained. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which switching between production modes with the same easiness of execution is distinguished from switching between different production modes, and handling of the pending advance notice production is made different between the two.

(26) In the above-described first to third embodiments, the configuration is such that the pending advance notice effect can be executed in the effect mode B in which the pending advance notice effect is difficult to execute. good too. That is, it is understood that the ``effect state in which the specific notification is difficult to be executed'' of the present invention includes not only the effect mode in which the execution probability of the pending advance notice effect is low, but also the effect mode in which the pending advance notice effect is not executed. can be done.

(27) In the above-described first to third embodiments, by varying the execution probability of the pending notice effect when the hold information corresponds to the disconnection, execution of the pending notice effect in the effect mode A and the effect mode B Although it is configured to differ in the easiness of being caught, the execution probability of the suspension notice performance is made different when the suspension information corresponds to a big win, or the execution probability is made different both when it corresponds to a loss and when it corresponds to a win. By doing so, it may be configured such that the easiness of execution of the pending notice effect in these effect modes is made different.

(28) In the above-described first to third embodiments, when the effect mode is switched during execution of the pending notice effect, the suspending image displayed in the execution display area D is also changed to the normal display mode HMa. However, the execution display area D is distinguished from the first reservation display area Ga and the second reservation display area Gb, and the reservation image displayed in the execution display area D is not changed to the normal display mode HMa. good too.

(29) In the above-described first to third embodiments, when the display mode of the target holding image HW is returned to the original specific display mode, the execution of the change suggestion effect is restricted. It is good also as a structure which performs the exclusive production|presentation (different from the change suggestion production|presentation) corresponding to. With such a configuration, a case where the display mode of the holding image is purely changed to a higher display mode, and a case where the holding image is returned to the original specific display mode along with the return process are played. can make it easier for people to identify

(30) In the above-described first embodiment, when the production mode A is transferred to the production mode B during execution of the pending advance notice production, and then the production mode is shifted again to the production mode A (the original When returning to the production mode), the display mode of the target holding image HW is returned to the original specific display mode. , the display mode of the target suspension image HW is changed to the normal display mode HMa, and then the performance mode is performed before the game round of the target suspension image HW is completed. A configuration may be adopted in which, when switching to C (a production mode different from production mode A), the original specific display mode is restored.

In the above case, the performance mode A and the performance mode C have the same ease of execution of the pending notice effect, or the performance mode C is more likely to execute the pending notice effect than the performance mode A (expectation degree for the pending notice effect is low) production mode. However, the present invention is not limited to these, and the effect mode C may be configured such that the pending notice effect is less likely to be executed than the effect mode A. At that time, the performance mode C may be a performance mode in which the pending notice performance is more likely to be executed than the performance mode B, or may be a performance mode in which it is difficult to execute, or the performance mode B and the pending notice performance are executed. It may be a production mode in which the susceptibility to being played is the same. Further, the performance mode A, the performance mode B, and the performance mode C may have the same easiness of execution of the pending notice performance.

(31) In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the effect mode A is switched to the effect mode B during the execution of the pending notice effect, and the case where the effect mode B is switched to the effect mode A during the execution of the pending notice effect In both cases, the display mode of the target holding image HW is changed to the normal display mode HMa, but in the latter case, that is, from the high-expectation production mode corresponding to the holding notice production to the low-expectation production mode. When switching, the display mode of the target holding image HW may be maintained in the specific display mode (not changed to the normal display mode HMa).

(32) In the first embodiment, the performance mode is switched from the performance mode A to the performance mode B during execution of the suspension notice performance, and then the performance is performed before the game round of the suspension information that triggered the suspension notice performance is completed. When the mode is switched to the mode A, the display mode of the target holding image HW is returned to the original specific display mode, but the production is performed before the game round of the holding information which triggered the holding notice production is started. When the mode is switched to A, the display mode of the target holding image HW may be returned to the original specific display mode. That is, when the performance mode is switched to A after the game round of the suspension information that triggered the suspension notice performance is started, the display mode of the target suspension image HW may not be returned to the original specific display mode. .

(33) In the above-described first embodiment, when the performance mode A is switched to the performance mode B during execution of the suspension notice performance, and new suspension information is generated while staying in the performance mode B, the performance In the mode B, the holding notice performance triggered by the holding information is not executed. It may be configured to execute the suspension notice effect.

However, while the holding image that was in the specific display mode in the production mode A before switching to the production mode B is changed to the normal display form HMa by switching to the production mode B, the holding information generated in the production mode B When the suspension notice effect is performed, the player's anxiety that the image for suspension (holding information) in the normal display mode HMa (holding information) may have disappeared even the big win and the degree of expectation will be further fueled. I have concerns. In addition, when the performance mode is switched to A again during execution of the pending advance notice effect started in the effect mode B, there arises a problem of how to handle the pending advance notice effect, and there is a concern that the processing as a whole becomes complicated. .

In that sense, as in the first embodiment, the state of staying in the production mode B (in other words, the target holding image HW set to the specific display mode in the previous production mode A It is preferable to limit the execution of the suspension notice effect for the suspension information newly generated in the state of waiting for the return processing for returning the display mode to the original display mode. In addition, when the performance mode A is switched to the performance mode B in a situation where the pending notice performance is not being executed, the execution of the pending notice performance triggered by the pending information newly generated in the performance mode B is not restricted. may

(34) In the first embodiment described above, the number of holds including the current hold information is grasped in step S1508. good too.

(35) In the second embodiment, the target hold images HB1 and HB2 in the restricted state (holding images for hold information generated during the restricted state) are the normal display mode HMa. A predetermined display mode (for example, a black display mode) different from any of the specific display modes may be used. In this case, it is possible to make it easy for the player to understand that the pending advance notice effect is in a restricted state. to be notified.

(36) In the second embodiment, when the performance mode A is switched to the performance mode B during the execution of the pending advance notice effect, that is, when the state is shifted to the limit state of the pending notice effect, it is in the restricted state. and is different from the holding image (for example, a predetermined display indicating that the user is in the restricted state).

(37) In the above-described second embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which display of the holding image is disabled during the restricted state. More specifically, not only the holding image HA set in the specific display mode in the production mode A and the holding images HB1 and HB2 of the holding information generated in the production mode B, all holding images including other holding images may be configured such that the display thereof is not executed.

At that time, in order to prevent the player from recognizing the number of reservations, the number of reservations may be notified by a separate display such as a numerical display (announcement of the number of reservations different from the image for reservation). However, if the display is suddenly switched to the separate display, it becomes difficult for the player to understand. When the presentation mode A is switched to the presentation mode B, in the presentation mode B, only the display of the holding image may be deleted. In this case, in order to prevent the player from losing sight of the separate display, it is preferable not to change the display location of the separate display.

(38) In the above-described second embodiment, the form of the suspension notice effect triggered by the suspension information generated during the restricted state is set at the end of the restricted period (step S2702). It may be set, or it may be set after the end of the restricted period.

(39) In the above-described second embodiment, when pending information is acquired during the restricted state, the pending prefetching process is executed, and after the restricted state ends, based on the result of the pending prefetching process performed during the restricted state, The display mode of the target holding images HB1 and HB2 is set by setting the display mode of the target holding images HB1 and HB2. A configuration may be adopted in which the display mode of the holding images HB1 and HB2 is set. At this time, the pending prefetching process may be performed by the main control device 162 or may be performed by the effect control device 143 . Further, the pending prefetching process when the pending information is acquired during the restricted state may not be executed, or may be executed.

(40) In the above-described third embodiment, when the production mode A is switched to the production mode B during execution of the pending notice production, the display mode in the production mode B is the same as that in the production mode A. In the case where the presentation mode of the holding image is differentiated between the presentation mode A and the presentation mode B, etc., it is not always necessary to return to the same specific display mode, and the player recognizes that the display mode is of the same rank. It is also possible to change the display mode to one that allows For example, in production mode A, the ranking is in the order of blue display mode HMb<green display mode HMc<red display mode HMd<rainbow display mode HMe, while in production mode B, yellow display mode<brown display mode <Purple display mode <Rainbow color display mode When the display mode of the target holding image HW is set to the green display mode HMc and the production mode A is switched to the production mode B , In the production mode B, the display mode of the target holding image HW may be a brown display mode.

In addition, in a game machine that suggests the degree of expectation by changing the hold image to a predetermined character image, if the configuration is set so that the character's costume, pose, expression, etc. When the production mode A is switched to the production mode B in a state where the image HW is changed to a character image such as a costume corresponding to the production mode A (a state in which the pending notice production is being executed), the target in the production mode B While the image HW for holding is returned to the same character image as in the production mode A, the costumes and the like may correspond to the production mode B.

The point is that the player can recognize that the display mode of the target holding image HW in the effect mode B is equivalent to the display mode in the effect mode A. The same applies to the case where the display mode of the target holding image HW is promoted to a higher display mode in the production mode B. In other words, it is sufficient if the player can recognize that the display mode is of a higher order. In the above example, after the display mode of the image HW for object holding is changed to the brown display mode, it is promoted to the purple display mode.

It should be noted that, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the configuration to return the display mode of the target holding image HW to the original specific display mode triggered by returning to the original production mode A, In the fourth embodiment, when the game state before the opening/closing execution mode and the game state after the opening/closing execution mode are the same, the display mode of the target holding image HW after the opening/closing execution mode is the same as before the opening/closing execution mode. Configuration of the specific display mode, in the fifth embodiment, the specific display mode of the target hold image HW in the game state before the opening/closing execution mode is the upper limit display corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the second hold look-ahead process In the following modes, the display mode of the object holding image HW after the opening/closing execution mode is the same specific display mode as before the opening/closing execution mode. Regarding the configuration in which the display mode of the target holding image HW is set to the same specific display mode as the display mode at the time of power failure, the display mode of the target holding image HW is changed to a display mode that allows the player to recognize that the display mode is the same. This is a specific example of returning.

(41) In the third embodiment, when the performance mode A is switched to the performance mode B during execution of the suspension notice performance, the display mode of the target suspension image HW is temporarily changed to the normal display mode HMa. However, the configuration may be such that the display mode is not changed to the normal display mode HMa. That is, when the determination result is to display the display mode of the same rank in the production mode B (when the affirmative determination is made in step S3107), the display mode of the target holding image HW is not set to the normal display mode HMa ( A configuration may be adopted in which display modes of the same rank are used without executing the process of step S3110.

(42) In the third embodiment, when the determination result is that the display mode of the same rank is not displayed in the production mode B (when the negative determination is made in step S3107), the display mode of the target holding image HW is set to the normal display mode HMa, but may be set to the specific display mode within a range not exceeding the actual expectation. Specifically, when the specific display mode of the target holding image HW before switching the effect mode is a mode higher than the upper limit display mode set in the return determination table, the display mode below the upper limit display mode (A display mode lower than the specific display mode before the effect mode switching) may be used as the specific display mode.

(43) In the above-described fourth and fifth embodiments, the game state includes three types of game states, namely, the normal game state, the high-accuracy game state, and the time-saving game state. It may be configured to provide a game state other than three types, such as providing two types of game states. In other words, it is sufficient to have a plurality of types of game states.

(44) In the above-described fourth and fifth embodiments, the suspension image is not displayed during the opening/closing execution mode, but the suspension image may be displayed. In this case, the display mode of the holding image during the opening/closing execution mode may be the normal display mode HMa, or may be the specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode. Alternatively, a predetermined display mode (for example, a black display mode) different from the normal display mode HMa and the specific display mode may be used. In this case, the predetermined display mode may be one that does not correspond to the degree of expectation for a big win, etc. (does not suggest the degree of expectation, etc.) of each piece of reservation information.

(45) In the above fourth and fifth embodiments, the display of the holding image is resumed during the ending period. Alternatively, the display of the holding image may be resumed after the ending period ends (for example, when the first game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends).

(46) In the above fourth and fifth embodiments, the display mode of the target hold image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode in the game state after the opening/closing execution mode. A configuration may be adopted in which a specific display target is displayed instead of the mode HMa. That is, it may be configured such that the display of the holding image is restarted in a state where the display mode of the target holding image HW is set to the specific display mode.

(47) In the above fourth and fifth embodiments, as a configuration to be applied, a configuration in which the game state (fluctuation pattern table) is changed via the opening and closing execution mode in which the round game is executed a plurality of times. Although exemplified, it is also possible to apply a configuration in which the variation pattern table is changed via a small winning game (opening and closing execution mode in which one round game is executed). It should be noted that the change of the variation pattern table is not limited to the fact that the result of the winning/failure determination becomes a winning result or the execution of the opening/closing execution mode (game state in which the variable winning device 65 is opened/closed). It may be performed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, such as the number of game rounds in which the result of the success/failure determination is incorrect, such as reaching a predetermined number of times.

(48) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, even if the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the variation type counter CS are the same, the results obtained by the lottery are different. Although the game state is changed as an example, the above difference may be triggered by an event other than the open/close execution mode. Such an event may be, for example, that the number of game rounds in which the result of the win/fail determination is wrong reaches a predetermined number of times, or that the player wins a lottery. In other words, the trigger is arbitrary, and the point is that the occurrence of some event causes the above-described difference. Further, the difference is not limited to that caused by a change in the game state, and may be caused by, for example, a change in the presentation state that does not involve a change in the probability of a big win.

(49) In the fourth embodiment, the display mode of the holding image is stored when the opening/closing execution mode is started, but the storage timing of the display mode is not particularly limited. For example, it may be configured to be stored in a winning game cycle that triggers the open/close execution mode.

However, if the display mode of the holding image is stepped up in the holding notice effect, there is a possibility that the display mode of the holding image will change during the execution of the winning game round. It is preferable to store the display mode after it has been determined, in other words, the state in which changes in the display mode are restricted. Specifically, it is preferable to store it when the open/close execution mode is started (when the winning game cycle ends) as in the fourth embodiment.

(50) In the above-described fourth embodiment, return determination and return processing setting (step S3416) are performed during the ending period, but these processing may be performed after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Alternatively, it may be performed after the opening/closing execution mode is started and before the ending period is started.

It should be noted that when each of the above processes is performed during the open/close execution mode, it is preferable to perform it during a period in which the variable winning device 65 is in a closed state, such as an opening period, an ending period, or a round interval period. When the variable prize winning device 65 is in the open state in the open/close execution mode, the processing load is relatively high, such as the need to perform processing for performing a prize winning effect based on the occurrence of a prize to the variable prize winning device 65. It is assumed that there are If such a period is used to determine recovery and to set recovery processing, there is a concern that the load will be further increased. In this respect, the processing load can be reduced by using the period in which the variable prize winning device 65 is closed to perform the above processes.

(51) In the above fourth embodiment, when the game state before the opening/closing execution mode is the normal game state and the game state after the opening/closing execution mode is the high-probability game state, the result of the pending look-ahead process is the normal game state. Although the display mode of the target holding image HW is restored in the case of the jackpot result, the jackpot result is read ahead by the reserve look-ahead processing regardless of whether it is the normal jackpot result or the probability variable jackpot result. In this case, the configuration may be such that the display mode of the target holding image HW is restored.

(52) In the fifth embodiment, the obtained random number itself such as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the variation type counter CS is transmitted from the main control device 162 to the effect control device 143, but the data of the transmission command In order to suppress an increase in capacity, a configuration may be used in which predetermined information (an identifier corresponding to a random number, etc.) having a smaller data amount than those acquired random numbers is transmitted.

(53) In the fifth embodiment, the second pending prefetch process is performed when the opening/closing execution mode ends, but it may be configured to perform after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Further, it may be configured to perform during execution of the opening/closing execution mode or before starting the opening/closing execution mode (period from the start of the winning game cycle to the start of the opening/closing execution mode).

(54) In the fifth embodiment, the variation pattern is prefetched in the first pending prefetch process and the second pending prefetch process, but the effect pattern (game round effect) may be prefetched. Such a configuration is particularly effective when, for example, one variation pattern corresponds to a plurality of types of production patterns (game round production).

(55) In the fifth embodiment, the upper limit display mode is set in correspondence with the fluctuation pattern in the upper limit display mode table. good.

(56) In the above-described fifth embodiment, even if the hit/fail result for the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 fluctuates between the game state before the opening/closing execution mode and the game state after the opening/closing execution mode, the target holding image Although the HW display mode is configured to be in the specific display mode after the opening/closing execution mode, it may be configured not to be in the specific display mode. Specifically, when the result of the first pending prefetching process is a jackpot and the result of the second pending prefetching process is a losing result, the display mode of the target pending image HW is changed to the specific display mode after the opening/closing execution mode. It is good also as the structure which does not carry out.

(57) In the fifth embodiment, the specific display mode of the target hold image HW in the game state before the opening/closing execution mode and the upper limit display mode corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the second hold look-ahead process are changed. Although the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is set based on the result of the comparison, the comparison is not performed (regardless of the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode), The display mode may be set based on the result of the second pending prefetch process.

(58) In the fifth embodiment, the specific display mode of the target hold image HW in the game state before the opening/closing execution mode is higher than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the second hold look-ahead process. In the case of the upper mode, the display mode of the target holding image HW in the game state after the open/close execution mode is set to the normal display mode HMa, but the specific display mode is set to the extent that the actual expectation is not exceeded. May be set. Specifically, when the specific display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is a mode higher than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the second holding prefetch process , a display mode (a display mode lower than the specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode) that is equal to or lower than the upper limit display mode may be used as the specific display mode.

(59) In the fifth embodiment, regardless of whether the game state before the opening/closing execution mode is different from the game state after the opening/closing execution mode, the second pending look-ahead process is executed. If the states are the same, the second pending prefetch process may not be executed, and the display mode of the target pending image HW after the opening/closing execution mode may be set based on the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the display mode after the opening/closing execution mode may be set to be the same as the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode. In this case, the normal display mode HMa may be temporarily changed to the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode, or the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode may be displayed from the beginning.

(60) In the sixth and seventh embodiments described above, power failure is exemplified as the predetermined abnormality, but other abnormalities such as magnetic sensor abnormality and vibration sensor abnormality may be used. At that time, the predetermined abnormality is not limited to stopping the progress of the game, but may continue the progress of the game.

(61) In the sixth and seventh embodiments, when the power failure is resolved and the power is restored, the display of the holding image is resumed while the target holding image HW is in the specific display mode. However, in the initial stage when the power is restored, the display mode of the target holding image HW is set to the normal display mode HMa. It may be configured to be changed to a specific display mode set based on.

In addition, in the initial stage when power is restored, the display mode of the target holding image HW is a predetermined display target that differs from both the normal display mode HMa and the specific display mode (a display mode dedicated to power recovery, such as a purple display mode). After that, the display mode may be changed to a specific display mode set based on the display mode before the occurrence of the power failure or the result of the pending prefetching process performed before the power failure. In this case, the image for holding, which has been set to the predetermined display mode, may be changed from the normal display mode HMa once to the specific display mode.

(62) In the sixth and seventh embodiments, when the power failure is resolved and the power is restored, the screen state of the pattern display device 75 is changed to the recovery standby screen (such as "The screen will be restored soon."). The display of the hold image is resumed in the situation where the character display 461 is displayed), but in the return standby screen state, the hold image is not displayed, and the screen returns (symbol row Z1 to The display of the holding image may be resumed when Z3 (return of the symbol variation display) is performed (or when the screen is restored). In such a case, the display of the suspension images is restarted in a state in which the display number of the suspension images is updated (the suspension images are shifted to the lower side and the suspension number is decreased by one).

Further, the display timing of the holding image may differ between when the power failure occurs during non-execution of the game cycle and when it occurs during the execution of the game cycle. Specifically, if a power failure occurs while the game is not running, the power-on screen (a screen that displays characters such as "The power has been turned on") will be held. If the power failure occurs during the game cycle, the hold image will not be displayed in the return standby screen state, and the hold image will be displayed again when the screen returns. It may be configured to be In other words, if the power failure occurs during non-execution of the game cycle, the holding image is displayed at an earlier timing (shorter elapsed time from the start of power supply) than when it occurs during the execution of the game cycle. may be resumed.

(63) In the above sixth and seventh embodiments, the case where the power interruption occurred during execution or non-execution of the game was illustrated, but the power interruption abnormality occurred during execution of the opening/closing execution mode. It is also possible to apply At that time, the display of the target hold image may be resumed in the power-on screen state or the return standby screen state, or the hold image may be displayed during the period in which the subsequent opening/closing execution mode is performed after the power is restored. The display may be disabled, and the display of the target hold image may be resumed at the start timing of the first game round after the opening/closing execution mode. Further, the display of the holding image may be disabled during the period of the return standby screen state, and the display of the holding image may be restarted in accordance with the screen return.

(64) In the sixth and seventh embodiments, the power failure monitoring unit 315 is provided in the power supply and launch control device 191, but may be provided in the main control device 162 or the effect control device 143. In this case, in the sixth embodiment, the power failure monitoring unit 315 may be provided in each of the main control device 162 and the effect control device 143, or provided in one of the main control device 162 and the effect control device 143, A power failure signal from the power failure monitoring unit 315 or a power failure command (a command indicating occurrence of a power failure state) from one control device may be transmitted to the other control device.

(65) In the sixth and seventh embodiments, the setting process of the display mode of the target holding image HW after the power is restored (the process of returning the holding notice in step S5202 and the setting process of the display mode in step S6204). is executed when power is restored, but may be executed after power is restored. Specifically, it may be configured to be executed at a predetermined timing during the period until the game round of the target holding image HW is started after the power is restored.

(66) In the sixth embodiment, the information indicating the display mode of the target holding image HW is backed up, and after the power is restored, the display mode before the power interruption is grasped based on the information and the display mode after the power is restored. In the seventh embodiment, the display mode of the target holding image HW is set, and in the seventh embodiment, the information indicating the result of prefetching is backed up, and after the power is restored, the result of prefetching before the occurrence of the power failure is grasped and restored based on the information. Although the display mode of the target holding image HW after power recovery is set, the pre-reading process may be executed again after the power is restored, and the display mode of the target holding image HW after power recovery may be set based on the result. In that case, the prefetching process after the power recovery may be performed by the main control device 162 or may be performed by the effect control device 143 .

In the above case, when a plurality of on-hold images are displayed, change location information is stored that enables grasping which of the on-hold images is in the specific display mode. It is preferable that the changed portion information is also backed up (stored). By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to grasp which holding image was displayed in the specific display mode before the power failure occurred after the power is restored. The change point information may be stored in the RAM 314 of the main control device 162 and backed up by the main control device 162, or may be stored in the RAM 344 or backup RAM 345 of the effect control device 143 and backed up by the effect control device 143. good too.

In the above case, it is preferable to execute the pre-reading process after the power is restored, targeting the holding image (holding information) that was found to be in the specific display mode before the power failure. In this case, even the holding image, which was not set to the specific display mode before the power interruption, is set to the specific display mode by the pre-reading process after the power is restored, and it is possible to suppress giving the player an unnatural impression. Furthermore, compared to the case where prefetch processing is performed again for all pending information that exists after power is restored, the number of prefetch processing executions can be reduced, making it possible to reduce the processing load when power is restored. .

Here, understanding which holding image was displayed in the specific display mode before the power cutoff can also be understood as knowing which holding image was not displayed in the specific display mode before the power cutoff. However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the display mode is set to the normal display mode for the holding image that has been determined not to have been displayed in the specific display mode. The processing in this case may be to set the display mode to the normal display mode for the holding images that were not targeted for the prefetching process after the power recovery, or to set the display mode to the normal display mode for all the holding images. After performing the prefetching process, the display mode of the holding image that is recognized as not being displayed in the specific display mode may be forcibly set to the normal display mode regardless of the result of the prefetching process. .

In addition, in the configuration for setting the display mode of the target holding image HW based on the result of prefetching after the power is restored, the display mode is set to a certain value or less, as in the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment. may be set by limiting to a specific display mode (for example, a green display mode HMc or a blue display mode HMb).

Note that the pre-reading process after power restoration may be performed at the time of power restoration, or if it is before the start of the game round of the holding image (holding information) that was set to the specific display mode before the power interruption, It may be performed after power is restored.

Further, the display mode of the holding image, which is determined to have been in the specific display mode before the power failure without executing the prefetching process after the power recovery, is changed to a predetermined specific display mode (for example, the blue display mode). HMb).

(67) In the sixth embodiment, the backup RAM 345 is provided to back up (store and retain) information related to images for holding. It may be configured to be backed up as a target. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which part of the information (information relating to the holding image) stored in the RAM 344 is backed up without providing the backup RAM 345 .

(68) In the sixth embodiment, the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring unit 315 is configured to be transmitted to the main control device 162 and the effect control device 143, but may be configured to be transmitted only to the main control device 162. . In this configuration, when the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring unit 315 is input to the main controller 162, the power failure command is transmitted from the main controller 162 to the performance control device 143, and the performance control device 143 receives the power failure command. This may be used as a trigger to execute power failure processing (processing of steps S11 to S13, etc.).

(69) In the sixth embodiment described above, when the specific display mode of the target holding image HW before power interruption is a display mode equal to or greater than the predetermined display mode (green display mode HMc) (if an affirmative determination is made in step S5404) ), the display mode of the target holding image HW after power recovery is limited to a specific display mode lower than the predetermined display mode, but the display mode of the target holding image HW is set to the normal display mode HMa (specified The display mode may be canceled).

(70) In the sixth embodiment described above, the target holding image HW after power restoration is set to a specific display mode lower than the specific display mode before the power failure. Although the image HW is configured to perform the promotion process in the game round (steps S5409 and S5601), even if the display mode of the target hold image HW after power restoration is set to the specific display mode before power interruption, It is good also as a structure which performs the promotion process in the game round of the image HW for object holding|holding. Further, regardless of the display mode of the target holding image HW after the power is restored, the promotion process in the game round may be executed.

(71) In the seventh embodiment, when the jackpot result has been prefetched by the prefetch processing for pre-reservation before the power failure (when the affirmative determination is made in step S6302), the target reserving image HW is displayed after the power is restored. Although the mode is uniformly set to the first specific display mode (green display mode HMc), it may be configured to be easily set to the first specific display mode. Specifically, when the jackpot result is prefetched by the prefetching process before power interruption, the display mode of the target holding image HW after the power is restored is lower than the normal display mode HMa or the first specific display mode. may be set to the specific display mode, and the probability of being set to the first specific display mode may be set higher than the probability of being set to those display modes.

In addition, without setting a limitation such as the first specific display mode, setting processing for holding notice similar to that before power interruption is performed based on the grasped holding prefetch result (result of holding prefetch processing performed before power interruption). It may be configured to execute the lottery for execution of the suspension notice effect and the lottery process for the display mode of the image for suspension.

The same applies to the case where a highly expected outlier result is prefetched (when the affirmative determination is made in step S6305).

(72) In the seventh embodiment, the upper limit display mode of the target holding image HW after the power is restored is made different depending on whether the holding prefetch process before the power interruption is a jackpot result or a losing result. However, the configuration may be such that such a distinction is not made. Specifically, it may be configured such that the upper limit display mode of the target holding image HW after the power recovery is uniformly set to a predetermined special display mode, regardless of whether it is appropriate or not.

(73) In the seventh embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern specified by the hold prefetch process before power interruption cannot be grasped (when a negative determination is made in step S6308), the hold image corresponding to the hold information is displayed. Although it is configured to set and display in the normal display mode HMa, it may be configured to not display the holding image as an error handling. At that time, the suspension image corresponding to the suspension information whose variation pattern cannot be grasped may be hidden, or all suspension images including other suspension images may be configured not to be displayed.

(74) In the seventh embodiment, when the jackpot result has been prefetched by the prefetch processing for pre-reservation before the power interruption (when the affirmative determination is made in step S6302), the display of the target reserving image HW after the power is restored. Although the mode is set to the first specific display mode, it may be configured to be set to the normal display mode HMa. In other words, if a specific display mode with a high degree of expectation is set after the power is restored based on the fact that the jackpot result was pre-read before the power failure, the pending pre-read result and the winning/failure judgment result in the game cycle are affected by the power failure abnormality. If there is a mismatch between the two, it is assumed that the player will be greatly affected. In this respect, the display mode of the holding image after power recovery is temporarily set to the normal display mode HMa, and the display mode is changed based on the variation start command transmitted at the start of the game cycle. It is possible to safely set the display mode of the holding image in . The same applies to the case where a highly expected outlier result is prefetched (when the affirmative determination is made in step S6305).

(75) In the seventh embodiment, the case where the big hit result is prefetched by the pending prefetching process before the power interruption, or the case where the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach out or more reach out performance is prefetched. As a target, it is configured to execute the promotion process in the game round of the target holding image HW (step S6304, step S6307), but if it is another prefetch result (such as SP reach out of reach out effect), It is good also as a structure which performs the promotion process in the game round of the image HW for object holding|holding. Moreover, regardless of the prefetch result, it is good also as a structure which performs the promotion process in a game round.

(76) In the seventh embodiment, not only the information corresponding to the result of the hold prefetch process performed before the power cut, but also the information corresponding to the specific display mode of the target hold image HW before the power cut. It is good also as a structure which backs up and sets the display mode of the image HW for object holding|maintenance after power restoration based on the information of both. For example, the upper limit of the specific display mode (upper limit display mode) after power recovery is set in a plurality of types corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, and the specific display mode of the target holding image HW before the power failure (backed up specific display mode) ) is below the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (backed up pending prefetch result) read in the hold prefetch process before power interruption, the display mode of the target hold image HW after the power is restored A configuration may be adopted in which the display mode is set to the same mode as the specific display mode before power failure.

(77) In the seventh embodiment, the information corresponding to the result of the pending prefetching process performed before power failure is backed up by the main control device 162, but the effect control device 143 and the display control device 350 may be backed up. When backing up with the effect control device 143, as in the sixth embodiment, the effect control device 143 is provided with a backup RAM, etc. After installing a backup function, it is transmitted from the main control device 162. Information corresponding to the result of the pending prefetching process is stored in the RAM 344 of the effect control device 143, and when a power failure state occurs, the information is written to the backup RAM, and the information stored in the RAM 344 is stored during the power failure. is also held. In such a configuration, when the power interruption state is canceled and the power is restored, based on the information held in the effect control device 143 (information corresponding to the result of the pending prefetching process), the pending prefetching performed before the power outage It is possible to grasp the result of processing.

In this case, the information corresponding to the result of the pending prefetch processing in the main controller 162 may or may not be backed up. By the way, when configured to back up the information corresponding to the result of the pending prefetching process in both the main control device 162 and the effect control device 143, based on the comparison result of each information backed up in both control devices 162, 143 A configuration for determining the normality of the information may be further provided. Specifically, when the power failure state is resolved and the power is restored, information corresponding to the result of the pending prefetching process backed up by the main control device 162 is transmitted to the effect control device 143, and the effect control device 143 , the information backed up by itself (information corresponding to the result of the pending prefetch processing) is compared with the information sent from the main controller 162 . As a result, if both information correspond, it is determined that the backed-up information is normal, the information is recognized as valid, and used for setting (returning) the hold notice effect after the power is restored. do. Conversely, if the two pieces of information do not correspond, it is determined that the backed-up information is not normal, and the information is regarded as invalid, processing for restoring the pending notice effect (setting of the pending notice effect using the information) ) is not executed.

Here, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the main control device 162 and the information backed up by the effect control device 143 means that the values of both information match, and the form of the information at the time of storage (for example, the value ) are different between the two controllers 162 and 143, and the information itself does not match, but the contents of the respective information are substantially the same.

The comparison of information may be performed not only by the performance control device 143 but also by the main control device 162 or the display control device 350 . When the main control device 162 performs the comparison, the information backed up by the performance control device 143 is transmitted to the main control device 162 when the power failure state is canceled and the power is restored.

In addition, the information that determines the normality by comparison (verification) of the results backed up by each of the main control device 162 and the effect control device 143 is not necessarily limited to the result of the pending prefetch process, for example, the Other information may also be used, such as information about results and pending counts. By the way, if the information about the number of reservations backed up by the main controller 162 and the information about the number of reservations backed up by the effect control device 143 do not correspond, an error notification may be executed as an abnormality, and Instead or in addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of reservations is notified based on information backed up by the main controller 162 (the information backed up by the main controller 162 is prioritized).

(78) In the above eighth and ninth embodiments, the ease of execution (execution probability) of the pending notice effect is different between the effect mode A and the effect mode B. may be configured to have the same ease of execution.

(79) In the above eighth and ninth embodiments, the configuration is such that the pending notice effect can be executed in the effect mode B in which the pending notice effect is difficult to execute. good too. That is, it is understood that the ``effect state in which the specific notification is difficult to be executed'' of the present invention includes not only the effect mode in which the execution probability of the pending advance notice effect is low, but also the effect mode in which the pending advance notice effect is not executed. can be done.

(80) In the eighth embodiment, the effect mode is automatically switched without being operated by the player, but the effect mode may be switched by the player's operation (manually). In this case, the effect mode switching operation may be disabled during execution of the pending notice effect.

(81) In the above-described eighth embodiment, two types of effect modes, ie, effect mode A and effect mode B, are provided as plural types of effect states, but a structure including three or more types of effect modes is also possible. . At that time, for example, in a configuration including production mode A to production mode C as three or more types of production states, the pending notice production is difficult to execute in the order of production mode A> production mode B> production mode C. The performance mode may have a configuration in which the easiness of execution of the pending advance notice effect is different from each other, or the configuration may be such that the ease of execution of the pending notice effect is the same in all of the production modes A to C. Mode A and production mode C have the same easiness of execution of the pending advance notice effect, but production mode B has the same ease of execution of the pending advance notice effect, such as difficulty in executing the pending advance notice effect, and A configuration may be adopted in which performance modes with different easiness of execution are mixed.

In addition, in a configuration in which a production mode in which the ease of execution of the pending notice production is the same and a production mode in which the ease of execution is different are mixed, switching between the production modes in which the ease of execution is the same Also, in the same way as switching between different production modes, it may be configured to limit the switching of production modes during execution of the pending notice production, and in the case of switching between production modes with the same ease of execution, A configuration may be adopted in which the effect mode is allowed to be switched even during execution of the pending advance notice effect.

(82) In the eighth embodiment, when the switching lottery timing comes (when the affirmative determination is made in step S7101), the production mode switching lottery (the first mode switching lottery in step S7102) is executed, and the lottery It is determined whether or not the pending notice effect is being executed when winning, and the switching process of the effect mode is not executed when it is being executed. If affirmative determination is made), it may be determined whether or not the pending notice effect is being executed, and if it is being executed, the mode switching may not be executed without performing the effect mode switching lottery.

(83) In the eighth embodiment, not only is switching from the production mode A, in which the pending advance notice effect is likely to be executed, to the production mode B, in which the pending advance notice effect is difficult to be executed, but also the change from the production mode B to the production mode A is performed. Also, the switching of the performance mode is restricted during execution of the pending notice performance, but the switching from the performance mode B to the performance mode A may be allowed even during the execution of the pending notice performance. .

(84) In the eighth embodiment, when switching from production mode B to production mode A, the display mode of the target holding image HW in which the holding notice production is being executed is the predetermined display mode (green display mode). HMc) It is determined whether or not it is the above display mode, and based on the result, it is configured to distribute whether or not to allow switching of the production mode. Similarly, regardless of the display mode of the target suspension image HW, if the suspension notice effect is being executed, the switching of the effect mode may be restricted.

(85) In the eighth embodiment, in the case of switching from the production mode A to the production mode B, regardless of the display mode of the target holding image HW, if the holding notice production is being executed, the production mode Although it is configured to limit switching, as in the case of switching from the production mode B to the production mode A, it is configured to distribute whether to allow the switching of the production mode based on the display mode of the target holding image HW. good too.

In the above case, the predetermined display mode as a reference (boundary) for whether or not to allow switching of the production mode may be a display mode equivalent to the case of switching from the production mode B to the production mode A, or the production mode A display mode different from the case of switching from B to production mode A may be used. When a different display mode is used, it is preferable to use a higher-order display mode than the case of switching from the production mode B to the production mode A.

(86) In the above eighth embodiment, when switching from the effect mode B to the effect mode A is allowed during execution of the suspension notice effect, the display mode of the target suspension image HW is maintained in the specific display mode. However, the display mode of the target holding image HW may be changed to the normal display mode HMa along with the switching of the presentation mode. In this case, the normal display mode HMa may be maintained until the target hold image HW starts or ends, or as in the first to third embodiments, the target hold The configuration may be changed to the specific display mode before the game round of the image HW is started or ended.

(87) In the eighth embodiment, it may be configured to limit the switching of the effect mode based on the result of the pending prefetching process. For example, when a predetermined result (for example, a jackpot result or a loss result of SPSP ready-to-win performance or more) is prefetched by the pending prefetch processing, the switching of the production mode may be restricted until the game round of the pending information ends. .

For example, if the result of a big hit or a missed result with a high degree of expectation such as an SPSP ready-to-win effect is read in advance, a stimulating effect such as a notice effect (suspended It is assumed that an effect different from the pending notice effect using the image for is performed. If the effect mode is switched during execution of the fanning effect, there is a possibility that the fanning effect becomes difficult to understand from the player's point of view. At this time, regardless of whether or not the pending advance notice effect is being executed, if it is configured to limit the switching of the effect mode based on the result of the pending prefetching process that triggers the pending notice effect, It is possible to suitably suppress the fact that the production mode is switched on the way. In addition, since it is possible to restrict the switching of the production mode before the execution of the pending notice effect, even if the timing of switching the production mode and the start timing of the pending notice effect overlap, the switching of the production mode and the execution of the pending notice effect can be suppressed from occurring at the same time.

(88) In the eighth embodiment, when the effect mode switching condition is met during the execution of the pending notice effect (when the effect mode switching timing comes and the first mode switching lottery is won), the pending notice Although it is configured to allow switching of the production mode when the result of the look-ahead of the holding image (holding information) in which the production is being executed is the jackpot result, instead of or in addition to this, a predetermined out-of-result (for example, It may be configured to allow the switching of the production mode when the SPSP ready-to-win production or more (outgoing result) is read ahead. That is, in principle, the performance mode cannot be switched during execution of the pending advance notice effect, but when the effect mode is switched, it suggests that the degree of expectation of the pending information that is the target of the pending notice effect is high. be able to.

It should be noted that the configuration that allows exceptional effect mode switching as described above is not essential, and in the eighth embodiment, the result of the pending prefetch process is not referred to, and the pending notice effect is being executed. It may be configured such that whether or not switching of the production mode is allowed or not is determined based on whether or not or the type of the specific display mode at that time.

(89) In the above eighth embodiment, the effect mode switching is permitted under the condition that the second mode switching lottery is won, but the mode switching is permitted without such a lottery. may be That is, when the condition for switching the performance mode is established during execution of the pending notice performance, and the result of the look-ahead of the suspension information is the jackpot result, the switching of the performance mode may always be permitted.

(90) In the ninth embodiment, the effect mode is switched by the player's operation (manually), but the effect mode may be switched automatically without the player's operation. As such a configuration, for example, switching of the production mode is set in advance based on the fact that a predetermined result is prefetched by the pending prefetching process, and then automatic switching of the production mode is performed when the switching execution condition is satisfied. things can be considered. As the switching execution condition, for example, the start of the game round of the hold information in which the predetermined result is prefetched, or the start of the game round of the predetermined number before the current game round can be considered.

(91) In the above-described ninth embodiment, two types of effect modes, namely effect mode A and effect mode B, are provided as a plurality of types of effect states. . At that time, for example, in a configuration including production mode A to production mode C as three or more types of production states, the pending notice production is difficult to execute in the order of production mode A> production mode B> production mode C. The performance mode may have a configuration in which the easiness of execution of the pending advance notice effect is different from each other, or the configuration may be such that the ease of execution of the pending notice effect is the same in all of the production modes A to C. Mode A and production mode C have the same easiness of execution of the pending advance notice effect, but production mode B has the same ease of execution of the pending advance notice effect, such as difficulty in executing the pending advance notice effect, and A configuration may be adopted in which performance modes with different easiness of execution are mixed.

In addition, in a configuration in which a production mode in which the ease of execution of the pending notice production is the same and a production mode in which the ease of execution is different are mixed, switching between the production modes in which the ease of execution is the same Similarly to switching between different production modes, it may be configured to limit the execution of the pending notice production while in the standby state for switching production modes, or switching between production modes with the same ease of execution. In the case of , it may be configured to allow the execution of the pending notice effect even in the standby state of the effect mode switching.

(92) In the ninth embodiment, the execution of the pending notice effect is uniformly restricted when in the standby state for switching the effect mode. It may be configured to restrict execution. For example, in the case of the waiting state of the effect mode switching, while allowing the execution of the suspension notice effect in which the display mode of the suspension image is the blue display mode HMb, the display mode of the suspension image is changed to the green display mode HMc or more. A configuration may be adopted in which the suspension notice effect, which is the display mode, is not executed.

(93) In the ninth embodiment, regardless of the switching destination production mode, if it is in the waiting state of the production mode switching, it is configured to limit the execution of the pending notice production, but depending on the switching destination production mode Different restriction modes may be used. For example, in the case of switching from the performance mode B in which the pending notice performance is difficult to execute to the performance mode A in which the pending notice performance is likely to be executed, while uniformly limiting the execution of the pending notice performance in the waiting state of the performance mode switching, In the case of switching from the production mode A to the production mode B, even in the waiting state of the production mode switching, execution of the pending notice production is permitted, or a specific display higher than the predetermined display mode (for example, the blue display mode HMb) is displayed. Although the execution of the pending advance notice effect as a mode is restricted, the execution of the pending notice effect as a specific display mode or less than the predetermined display mode may be permitted.

(94) In the ninth embodiment, the display mode of the target holding image HW after switching the production mode is set when the standby state ends. After switching), it may be set at a predetermined timing in a period until the game round of the target holding image HW starts or ends. In addition, when setting during the game round of the target holding image HW, the display mode may be set based on the result of the holding prefetch processing of the target holding image HW, or the game round of the target holding image HW may be set. The display mode may be set based on the variable start command transmitted at the start.

(95) In the ninth embodiment, the suspension information acquired before the switching guidance image 451 is displayed is configured not to limit the execution of the suspension notice effect. good. That is, the configuration may be such that the execution of the pending notice effect is restricted not only during the standby state but also before shifting to the standby state.

Specifically, when the switching guidance image 451 is displayed during the execution of the suspension notice effect, the suspension notice effect is executed at a predetermined timing in the period from the display of the switching guidance image 451 to the switching of the effect mode. It is conceivable to adopt a configuration in which the display mode of the target holding image is changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa. It should be noted that the specific change timing from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa is assumed to be the display timing of the switching guide image 451, the transition timing to the standby state, the switching timing of the effect mode, and the like.

(96) In the ninth embodiment, after the switching guidance image 451 is displayed, the suspension information acquired before the transition to the standby state is configured not to limit the execution of the suspension notice effect. It may be configured to restrict execution.

In this case, based on the display of the switching guidance image 451 (transition to the switching guidance state), the execution restriction of the pending notice effect may be started prior to the transition to the standby state. That is, after the switching guide image 451 is displayed, the suspension notice effect triggered by the suspension information acquired before the transition to the standby state may be configured not to be executed before the transition to the standby state or in the standby state.

Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which, although the suspension notice effect is temporarily executed before the transition to the standby state, the execution of the suspension notice effect is canceled when the transition is made to the standby state. Specifically, after the switching guidance image 451 is displayed, the suspension notice effect triggered by the suspension information acquired before the transition to the standby state is executed before the transition to the standby state, and then the suspension notice effect is executed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the display mode of the target image for holding is changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa. It should be noted that, as a specific change timing from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa, the timing of transition to the standby state, the timing of switching the production mode, and the like are conceivable.

(97) In the ninth embodiment, when pending information is acquired during the standby state, the pending prefetch processing is executed, and after the standby state ends, based on the result of the pending prefetch processing performed during the standby state, The display mode of the target holding image HW is set by setting the display mode of the target holding image HW. The configuration may be such that the display mode of the image HW is set. At this time, the pending prefetching process may be performed by the main control device 162 or may be performed by the effect control device 143 . Further, the pending prefetching process when the pending information is acquired during the standby state may not be executed, or may be executed.

(98) In the ninth embodiment, the configuration according to the eighth embodiment may be applied to limit the transition to the switching guidance state during execution of the pending advance notice effect. Specifically, during execution of the pending notice effect, even if it is the execution timing of the switching guidance lottery, the lottery is not performed, or even if the lottery is won, the switching guidance image 451 is displayed and the guidance notification flag is displayed. A configuration in which setting is not performed, or a configuration in which it is not determined whether or not it is time to execute the switching guidance lottery may be employed.

(99) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated and a jackpot is obtained when a coin is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a mahball, and the like.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reels is started by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is established on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

Furthermore, the gaming machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

<Invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses, etc., but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

It should be noted that the invention described in each of the following features is "for example, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery opportunity, and when the lottery result is a specific result, the game is played. (For example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2004-81853).” With regard to the background art, “Here, in a game machine such as the above-described example, when performing a game effect, However, there is still room for improvement.” This was accomplished with the problem to be solved by the invention.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing in the main controller 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Attachment determination means (a function of executing a correctness determination process or the like in the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
Privilege granting capable of granting a privilege to a player based on the fact that the grant determination result by the grant determination means is a grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. Means (function for executing big winning opening opening/closing process in main controller 162);
The action for a game cycle is started based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and the end of the motion for a game cycle is notified as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination. a game turn control means (a function for executing a game turn control process in the main controller 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means so that the game turn operation is performed;
Suspension notification means ( Function to execute pending command corresponding processing in the production control device 143),
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, the information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination, rather than the special information being the target of the grant determination. destination identification means for executing destination identification processing to be identified at the previous timing In the embodiment of 5, the setting processing of the pending command by the main control device 162, the function of executing the first pending prefetch processing by the effect control device 143),
Specific mode means (first to seventh In the embodiment, the effect control device 143 performs the setting process for holding notice, the function of executing the first execution process for holding notice),
with
In the specific mode, a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result is different. has been
When a predetermined event occurs in a state in which the notification mode of the suspension notification is set to a specific mode (when the production mode is switched in the first to third embodiments, in the fourth to fifth embodiments When the opening/closing execution mode is performed, when the power failure occurs in the sixth and seventh embodiments), at least the specific mode or the suspension notification is not executed with respect to the suspension notification set as the specific mode. It is configured to be in a specific state (configuration for changing the display mode of the holding image to the normal display mode HMa by switching the production mode in the first to third embodiments, configuration in which the holding image is hidden by execution of the opening/closing execution mode in the embodiment, and a configuration in which the holding image disappears due to the occurrence of a power failure in the sixth and seventh embodiments),
After the end of the specific state, a predetermined first number that allows the player to recognize that the notification mode of the suspension notification that is the target of the specific state is equivalent to the notification mode before the predetermined event occurs. mode (same specific display mode, display mode with the same ranking, same character, etc.) or a predetermined second mode (higher-level Specific display mode, etc.) can be specified means (setting process for return of notice by effect control device 143 in the first to fifth embodiments, second execution process for hold notice, third hold notice Function for executing processing for execution, processing for return of pending notice by production control device 143 in the sixth embodiment, function for executing processing for fourth execution of pending notice, production control device in the seventh embodiment 143).

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the suspension notification is set to a specific mode based on the result of the so-called suspension look-ahead. Therefore, it is possible to arouse the player's expectation for the grant correspondence result before the start of the game cycle. can. Furthermore, since a plurality of types of modes are set as the specific mode so that the degree of expectation of the corresponding result of the granting is different, the degree of expectation can be suggested by giving it a large or small value, and it is possible to arouse the player's sense of expectation. Advantageous configurations can be provided. In such a configuration, when a predetermined event occurs in a situation in which the notification for suspension is in a specific mode, the specific mode or notification for suspension is changed to a specific state in which execution is not performed. In this case, there is a concern that the player may be misunderstood and uneasy that even the degree of expectation suggested by the specific mode has disappeared due to non-execution of the specific mode or the like. In this regard, in this configuration, after the end of the specific state, the notification for suspension is performed as the first mode that is equivalent to the notification mode before the occurrence of the predetermined event or the second mode that is higher than that. It can be suggested, and it becomes possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the result of grant correspondence.

Feature A2. At least the information corresponding to the notification mode of the suspension notification made into the specific mode can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (recovery area 344f of RAM 344),
When the notification mode of the on-hold notification that is the target of the specific state is set to the predetermined first mode, the specifying means determines the predetermined first mode based on the information stored in the predetermined storage unit. Means (1st to 5th embodiment for executing the setting process for the notice return in the production control device 143, the function for executing the setting process of the display mode in the sixth embodiment) is provided The gaming machine according to feature A1, characterized by:

In the above configuration, the information corresponding to the notification mode of the specific notification is stored, and after the specific state ends, the notification mode of the specific notification is set based on the stored information. As a result, after the specific state ends, it is possible to suitably return the notification mode of the suspension notification to a mode equivalent to that before the specific state (before the occurrence of the predetermined event).

Feature A3. an execution notification unit (execution display area D) for performing a predetermined notification (display of an image for suspension in the execution display area D) so that the player can recognize the execution of the suspended game round;
The specifying means selects the mode of the predetermined notification performed by the execution notification unit in the game cycle of the special information corresponding to the suspension notification that is the target of the specific state. Specific means that can be the second mode (function for executing the third execution process of the pending notice by the production control device 143 in the first to fifth embodiments, in the sixth to seventh embodiments The gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2, characterized by comprising a function of executing the fourth execution process of the suspension notice by the effect control device 143.

In the above configuration, after the end of the specific state, when performing the processing of the first mode, which is equivalent to the notification mode before the occurrence of the predetermined event, or the second mode, which is higher than that, the target of the specific state is The implementation period can include up to the game round of the notification for suspension. As a result, it is possible to secure a long processing period for returning the notification mode to the equivalent mode or the like. However, the return process can be performed using the execution period of the game cycle after the end of the specific state. Therefore, it is possible to preferably suggest the degree of expectation after the end of the specific state.

Feature A4. When the game round is executed, based on the special information (suspended information) that is the target of the grant determination that is the trigger for the game round or the specific information (variation pattern) derived from the special information, in the game round Game round production setting means (function for executing special figure fluctuation display processing in production control device 143) for setting game round production (reach production etc.) to be performed,
When the notification mode of the predetermined notification is the predetermined second mode, the means for specifying, based on the special information or the specific information referred to by the game spin effect setting means, the predetermined second mode Means (the function of executing the third execution process of the pending notice by the production control device 143 in the first to fifth embodiments, the fourth execution process of the holding notice in the sixth to seventh embodiments) The gaming machine according to feature A3, characterized by comprising a function of

For example, if the notification mode is simply returned to the equivalent mode after the end of the specific state, it is not possible to suggest a level of expectation higher than that suggested before the occurrence of the predetermined event. On the other hand, if the notification mode is unnecessarily set to a high-ranking one, it will not be consistent with the game-turn production actually performed in the game-turn, and there is a risk that the player's trust will be lost. In this regard, in this configuration, based on the special information or specific information used for setting the game round effect in the game round of the suspension notification that is the target of the specific state, the notification mode of the predetermined notification corresponding to the suspension notification is promoted to a higher mode than before the occurrence of the predetermined event. As a result, it is possible to improve the notification mode of the predetermined notification while preventing the notification mode of the predetermined notification from becoming inconsistent with the game-turn production actually performed in the game round.

Feature A5. The specifying means determines whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is to be the predetermined second mode based on the special information or the specific information referred to by the game spin effect setting means. (The function of executing the third execution process of the suspension notice by the effect control device 143 in the first to fifth embodiments, the function of executing the fourth execution process of the suspension notice in the sixth to seventh embodiments) , wherein the notification mode of the predetermined notification is set to the predetermined second mode when the determination means determines that the predetermined second mode is to be used.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not to be a higher mode based on the special information or specific information used for setting the game round effect, and if the determination allows promotion to a higher mode, the promotion process is performed. done. As a result, after the end of the specific state, the notification mode of the predetermined notification can be promoted within a range that does not exceed the degree of expectation for the game-turn effect that is actually performed.

Feature A6. The specifying means includes means for changing the notification mode of the on-hold notification that is the target of the specific state from the predetermined first mode to the predetermined second mode after the end of the specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, characterized by:

When the notification mode of the suspension notification is set to a higher mode than the original mode after the end of the specific state, if the mode is suddenly set to the higher mode, the specific mode that was performed before the occurrence of the predetermined event from the player's point of view. It is difficult to understand the correspondence between them, and there is a risk of causing confusion. In this regard, in this configuration, since the same notification mode is temporarily changed to a higher notification mode, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the notification mode has been restored, and it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned confusion.

Feature A7. When the notification mode of the suspension notification is set to the specific mode, the specific mode means sets the notification scenario (production scenario) for setting the notification mode of the suspension notification to the specific mode. a function of executing setting processing for holding notice in the device 143),
The specifying means, after the end of the specific state, when the notification mode of the suspension notification that is the target of the specific state is the predetermined first mode or the predetermined second mode, the suspension notification Second scenario setting means for setting the notification scenario (return scenario) for setting the notification mode to the predetermined first mode or the predetermined second mode ), the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6.

For example, in a configuration in which a game can be played in a specific state, since the game cycle is completed during the specific state, the execution period after the specific state (remaining period) is expected to fluctuate depending on the length of stay in the specific state. In this regard, in this configuration, in addition to the notification scenario set before the occurrence of the predetermined event, after the specific state ends, the notification scenario for making the holding notification targeted for the specific state the same level etc. is reset, even if the remaining period of the suspension notification after the specific state fluctuates, it is possible to suitably change the notification mode of the suspension notification to a mode of the same rank or the like.

Feature A8. After the end of the specific state, the holding number grasping means for grasping the number of holdings of the game round before or before the special information corresponding to the holding notification that is the target of the specific state (executes the processing of step S2103 function),
The second scenario setting means is characterized by setting a notification scenario for setting the predetermined first mode or the predetermined second mode based on the number of reservations grasped by the number of reservations grasping means. A gaming machine described in A7.

In the above configuration, when the specific state ends, the number of reservations is grasped, and the notification scenario is reset in order to take the result into consideration and make it a mode of equal rank, etc. Therefore, regardless of the length of stay in the specific state, The notification mode of the notification for suspension can be suitably changed to a mode of the same rank or the like.

Feature A9. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, wherein the specific state is at least the specific mode of the suspension notification, wherein the notification mode is the normal mode.

Misunderstanding that, when the notification mode of the suspension notification is changed (downgraded) from the specific mode to the normal mode due to the transition to the specific state, the expectations suggested by the specific mode before the occurrence of the specified event have disappeared. It becomes easy to give a player anxiety. By applying any one of the features A1 to A8 to such a configuration, each feature can be effectively functioned, and each of the above effects can be favorably exhibited.

In addition, when the notification for suspension is set to the normal mode in the specific state, it is necessary to change (upgrade) from the normal mode to the equivalent mode after the end of the specific state. By applying to , even if the remaining period of the notification for suspension after the specific state fluctuates, it is possible to suitably change from the normal mode to the equivalent mode or the like.

Feature A10. Means for limiting the execution of the specific mode in the specific state with respect to the suspension notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the specific state (suspension triggered by the suspension information acquired in the production mode B A gaming machine according to feature A9, characterized by comprising a function of limiting execution of the advance notice effect.

For example, while the notification mode of the notification for suspension, which has been set to the specific mode, is changed to the normal mode in the specific state, the special information acquired during the specific state is changed to the specific mode. Since it is necessary to distinguish between the special information acquired before the state and the special information acquired during the specific state, there is a concern that the processing may become complicated. In addition, even though there is a suspension notification that has been changed from a specific mode to a normal mode, if the suspension notification of the special information acquired later is set to the specific mode, the normal status of the previous suspension notification There is also a possibility that the feeling of uneasiness that the degree of expectation for the change to the mode may have disappeared may be further fueled. In this regard, in this configuration, regarding the suspension notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the specific state, since the change to the specific mode is restricted in the specific state, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience. be possible.

Feature A11. Means for performing processing by the specific mode means after the end of the specific state with respect to the suspension notification for which the execution of the specific mode is restricted (the second setting process for the suspension notice in the second embodiment) function to execute).

As described in the effect of the feature A10, by restricting the change to the specific mode for the special information acquired during the specific state, the expectations for the change to the normal mode in the previous hold notification disappear It is possible to suppress inciting the feeling of anxiety that something has gone wrong. On the other hand, however, there is a concern that the opportunity of suggesting the degree of expectation regarding the special information acquired during the specific state will be lost. In this regard, in the above configuration, the change to the specific mode after the end of the specific state is allowed for the pending notification with such restrictions, so it is possible to ensure the opportunity of suggesting the degree of expectation.

Feature A12. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, wherein the specific state is, at least, with respect to the suspension notification in the specific mode, the suspension notification is not executed.

If the notification mode of the suspension notification is not executed due to the transition to the specific state, it gives the player misunderstanding and anxiety that the expectation level suggested by the specific mode has disappeared before the occurrence of the predetermined event. easier. By applying any one of the features A1 to A8 to such a configuration, each feature can be effectively functioned, and each of the above effects can be favorably exhibited.

Feature A13. After the specific state ends, the suspension notification that is the target of the specific state is configured to be executed in the normal mode,
The specifying means is means for changing the notification mode of the suspension notification set to the normal mode to the predetermined first mode or the predetermined second mode (setting for advance notice return in the effect control device 143 A gaming machine according to feature A12, characterized by comprising a function of executing processing.

When the suspension notification is resumed in the normal mode after the notification mode of the suspension notification is not executed due to the transition to the specific state, it is suggested by the specific mode before the occurrence of the predetermined event. There is a risk of further fueling the sense of unease that the level of expectation that has been set has disappeared. By applying any one of the features A1 to A8 to such a configuration, each feature can be effectively functioned, and each of the above effects can be favorably exhibited.

In addition, in the case of a configuration in which the suspension notification is not executed in the specific state and the suspension notification is restored in the normal mode after the specific state ends, the normal mode changes to the equivalent mode after the specific state ends. Although processing to change (upgrade) is required, by applying this feature to feature A7 or feature A8, even if the remaining period of the pending notification after the specific state fluctuates, from the normal mode to the equivalent mode etc. Modifications can be conveniently made.

In addition, the present feature is that "the specifying means, after the end of the specific state, after the suspension notification that is the target of the specific state is executed in the normal mode, the predetermined first mode or the predetermined It is provided with the means (the function which performs the setting process for the notice return in the production|presentation control apparatus 143) which is made to be changed into the 2nd mode.

Feature A14. Specific effect means for executing a specific effect (change suggestive effect) suggesting that the notification mode of the pending notification changes to a higher notification mode (function for executing the processes of steps S1603 to S1605);
After the end of the specific state, when the notification mode of the suspension notification that is the target of the specific state is the predetermined first mode, means for limiting the execution of the specific effect (change suggestion effect function to restrict execution) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, since it is suggested that the notification mode of the suspension notification will change to a higher notification mode due to the specific effect, expectations for the change to the higher status are aroused, and the player receives the suspension notification. can increase the attention of In such a configuration, for example, if a specific effect is performed in the case of a state of equal rank after the end of the specific state, the notification state stored in the player's memory ( It is conceivable that, based on the state before the occurrence of the predetermined event), the user associates the higher-level notification state. In this case, since the actual notification mode does not match the mode associated with the player, the player may lose confidence in the specific effect. In this respect, in the present configuration, when the mode of the same rank is set after the end of the specific state, the execution of the specific effect is restricted, so that the player is suppressed from associating a mode higher than the actual notification mode. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of inconvenience.

For each configuration of the features A1 to A14, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B14, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G15, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of H1 to H11 and features I1 to I12 individually, or apply a combination of part or all of the respective technical ideas. is also possible. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing in the main controller 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Attachment determination means (a function of executing a correctness determination process or the like in the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
Privilege granting capable of granting a privilege to a player based on the fact that the grant determination result by the grant determination means is a grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. Means (function for executing big winning opening opening/closing process in main controller 162);
Based on a predetermined execution opportunity (prefetching result), a specific notification means (reservation notice effect) is performed in a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75, reservation lamp section) (representation control device 143 function to execute pending command processing),
with
The specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to one of a plurality of types of notification modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe). Setting means (setting processing for pending notice in production control device 143, function of executing processing for first execution of pending notice) is provided, and the specific notice is executed based on the setting result of the first notice mode setting means. is configured as
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (when a predetermined operation is performed by the operation unit for effect 36), one of a plurality of types of effect states (effect mode A, effect mode B) including a predetermined effect state is selected. Production state transition means (function for executing production mode switching processing in production control device 143) for shifting from to another production state,
During the execution of the specific notification (suspension notice effect by the image HW for suspension), when the predetermined effect state is shifted to another effect state, and then the predetermined effect state is shifted to, the specified effect is specified in the later predetermined effect state. Second notification mode setting means for setting the notification mode of the notification based on the notification mode of the specific notification in the previous predetermined effect state (the function of executing the setting process for the notification return by the effect control device 143 in the first embodiment )and,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, a plurality of types of effect states are provided, and the effect state is switched when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. As a result, the player's mood can be changed during the game, and boredom with the game can be suppressed. In such a configuration, for example, when the execution of the specific notification is canceled when the effect state is switched during the execution of the specific notification, it is said that the chance notified or suggested by the specific notification has disappeared. There is a concern that players may be misunderstood or uneasy. In such a case, it is conceivable to limit the switching of the effect state during the execution of the specific notification, but this may lead to a situation in which the frequency of switching the effect state decreases, and the significance of providing multiple types of effect states may be lost. be.

In this regard, in this feature, when the predetermined effect state is shifted to another effect state during execution of the specific notification, and then the state is shifted to the predetermined effect state, the notification mode of the specific notification in the later predetermined effect state is given first. Since the setting is based on the notification mode in the predetermined effect state, the specific notification can be returned to the original notification mode by returning the effect state to the original state. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the chance has not disappeared, and to execute the specific notification without restricting the switching of the presentation state. In other words, it is possible to favorably achieve both the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the effect state.

Feature B2. The action for a game cycle is started based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and the end of the motion for a game cycle is set as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination. As a game turn control means (function for executing game turn control processing in the main control device 162) for controlling the game turn operation to be performed,
The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the specific notification means is configured to be able to execute the specific notification across game rounds.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed over a relatively long period of time, an event in which the effect state is switched during execution of the specific notification is likely to occur. By applying the configuration of the feature B1 to such a configuration, the feature can be effectively functioned, and the above effects can be favorably exhibited.

It should be noted that the present characteristic may include a feature that "the effect state transition means includes means for switching the effect state in accordance with the execution of the game cycle". In a configuration in which the specific notification is performed across game rounds and the effect state is switched according to the break of the game round, the event that the effect state is switched during the execution of the specific notification is particularly likely to occur, so the above effect of feature B1. can be exhibited more favorably.

Feature B3. Information corresponding to the notification mode of the specific notification can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (recovery area 344f of RAM 344),
The second notification mode setting means according to feature B1 or feature B2, wherein the notification mode of the specific notification in the subsequent predetermined effect state is set based on the information stored in the predetermined storage unit. game machine.

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the specific notification is stored, and the notification mode of the specific notification is set based on the stored information when the predetermined effect state is entered later. As a result, the specific notification in the subsequent predetermined effect state can be preferably returned to the original notification mode executed in the previous predetermined effect state.

Feature B4. The action for a game cycle is started based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and the end of the motion for a game cycle is set as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination. as a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process in the main control device 162) for controlling the operation for the game turn to be performed;
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, the information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination is obtained rather than the special information being the target of the grant determination. destination specifying means for executing the destination specifying process specified at the previous timing (function for executing the pending prefetching process in the main controller 162);
with
The specific notification means is configured to be able to execute the specific notification based on the result of the destination identification process before the special information subject to the destination identification process becomes the subject of the provision determination. ,
The specific notification means transitions from the previous predetermined effect state to the other effect state during execution of specific notification triggered by specific special information (holding information of the target holding image HW), and then the specific Before the game round of the special information is finished or before the specific special information is subject to the grant determination by the grant determination means, when the state shifts to the later predetermined effect state, in the later predetermined effect state, the specific special information Specific means for executing specific notification corresponding to special information (setting process for return of notice in production control device 143, second execution process for holding notice, function for executing third execution process for holding notice) The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, characterized in that

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is executed based on the result of the so-called pending prefetch, the notification mode of the specific notification suggests the degree of expectation that the result of the grant determination will be the grant correspondence result, and the grant determination is performed. It is possible to suitably arouse the player's expectation for the provision correspondence result in advance. In such a case, if the execution of the specific notification is canceled along with the switching of the effect state as described above, the player will be misunderstood that the result of the grant correspondence has disappeared or the degree of expectation has decreased. There is concern to give.

In this regard, according to the present configuration, when the original effect state is returned before the game round of the special information that triggered the specific notification is completed or before the special information is subject to grant determination, the original notification The notification mode of the specific notification is set corresponding to the mode. For this reason, it is possible to inform the player that the grant response result has not disappeared, etc. In addition, before the grant judgment result for the special information that triggered the specific report is notified, the degree of expectation for the special information can be suggested again. Therefore, it is possible to suitably deal with the above-mentioned concern, and it is possible to suitably achieve both execution of the specific notification and switching of the effect state.

Feature B5. The second notification mode setting means determines whether the specific notification is to be performed in the later predetermined effect state based on the notification mode of the specific notification in the previous predetermined effect state, regardless of the result of the destination specifying process in the previous predetermined effect state. The gaming machine according to feature B4, characterized by setting a notification mode.

For example, when the notification mode of the specific notification in the later predetermined effect state is set based on the result of the pending prefetch performed in the previous predetermined effect state, the notification of the specific notification in the previous predetermined effect state It is assumed that aspects different from the aspects are set. In addition, in the configuration in which the notification mode of the specific notification is changed in stages (ranked up), even with the same look-ahead result, there may be a difference in the notification mode of the specific notification at the time of switching depending on the switching timing of the effect state. If the notification mode in the later predetermined effect state is set based on the result of the reserved look-ahead, the mode different from the notification mode of the specific notification in the previous predetermined effect state is likely to be set.

In this regard, in this configuration, the notification mode of the specific notification in the later predetermined effect state is not the result of the pending prefetching performed in the previous predetermined effect state, but the specification when switching from the effect state to another effect state. Since the setting is based on the notification mode of the notification, when the effect state returns to the original state, the same notification mode as the specific notification actually notified can be set. As a result, the notification mode in the previous predetermined performance state and the notification mode in the subsequent predetermined performance state can be suitably matched, and it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the notification mode has returned. become.

Feature B6. The specific notification means is
When performing specific notification triggered by the specific special information in the previous predetermined effect state, first scenario setting means (for pending notice function to execute setting processing) and
Second scenario setting means (announcement return function to execute setting processing for
The gaming machine according to feature B4 or feature B5, comprising:

In the case where the specific notification is performed in the later predetermined effect state, depending on the length of the stay period in the other effect state, after switching to the later predetermined effect state, the game round of the special information corresponding to the specific notification starts or starts. It is assumed that the period until the end, that is, the period during which the specific notification can be executed varies. In this regard, in this configuration, when performing the specific notification in the predetermined effect state later, the notification scenario for changing the notification mode is reset. It can be suitably changed according to the aspect.

Feature B7. When the state is shifted to the later predetermined effect state, holding number grasping means (function for executing the processing of step S2103) for grasping the holding number of the game times before or before the specific special information is provided,
The gaming machine according to feature B6, wherein the second scenario setting means resets the notification scenario based on the number of reservations ascertained by the number of reservations ascertaining means.

In the above configuration, when switching to the later predetermined production state, the number of reservations is grasped, and the notification scenario of the specific notification is reset in consideration of the result. Therefore, regardless of the stay period in another production state, The notification mode of the specific notification can be suitably changed to the original mode.

Feature B8. Means for restricting the continuation of the specific notification (the function of changing the display mode of the holding image HW to the normal display mode HMa) is provided when the specific notification transitions from the previous predetermined effect state to the other effect state during execution of the specific notification. The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, characterized in that

In the above configuration, since the continuation of the specific notification that has been executed up to that point is restricted (regulated) with the switching of the presentation state, it is easy for the player to misunderstand that the chance has been lost. By applying any one of the features B1 to B7 to such a configuration, each feature can be effectively functioned, and each of the above effects can be favorably exhibited.

Feature B9. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, wherein the predetermined effect state is a state of effect in which the ease with which the specific notification is executed is different from that of the other effect states.

In the case of a configuration in which the ease with which the specific notification is executed differs depending on the production state, if the production state is switched while the specific notification is being executed, the degree of expectation, etc. suggested by the specific notification will be different before and after the switching of the production state. may invite. In this case, by canceling the execution of the specific notification along with the switching of the effect state, it is possible to suppress such inconsistencies in expectations and the like. On the other hand, however, there is a concern that the player may be misunderstood and uneasy that the chance suggested by the specific notification has disappeared. By applying any one of the features B1 to B8 to such a configuration, each of the features can be effectively functioned, and each of the above effects can be favorably exhibited.

In addition, in the present feature, ``the predetermined effect state is a effect state in which the specific notification is more likely to be executed than the other effect state'' is defined as a state in which the other effect state can execute the specific notification. It can be understood that not only the configuration to be set but also the configuration in which the other effect state is set as a state in which the specific notification is not executed is included.

Feature B10. The plurality of types of notification modes in the specific notification are set so that the degree of expectation for the given response result is different,
The second notification mode setting means is a predetermined number that allows the player to recognize that the notification mode of the specific notification in the subsequent predetermined effect state is equivalent to the notification mode of the specific notification in the previous predetermined effect state. Characteristic features B1 to B9 characterized by comprising a first means (setting processing for advance notice return in the effect control device 143) for setting to one mode (the same specific display mode, the display mode of the same order, the same character, etc.) The gaming machine according to any one of

In the above configuration, since the notification mode of the specific notification in the later predetermined effect state is set to a mode that the player can recognize as being equivalent to the notification mode in the previous predetermined effect state, the specific notification returns. It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that.

Feature B11. After the second notification mode setting means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to the predetermined first mode in the later predetermined effect state, the player determines that the notification mode of the specific notification is higher than the notification mode of the specific notification in the previous predetermined effect state. Characteristic B10 characterized by comprising a second means (setting processing for advance notice return in the effect control device 143) that is set to a predetermined second mode (higher specific display mode, etc.) that can be recognized The gaming machine described in .

In the above configuration, since the notification mode of the specific notification in the later predetermined effect state can be set to a higher notification mode than the notification mode in the previous predetermined effect state, the notification mode in the later predetermined effect state is the earlier notification mode. It is possible to suppress narrowing of the range of the degree of expectation that can be suggested by being limited to the notification mode in the predetermined effect state. At that time, if the notification mode is suddenly set to a higher order, it may be difficult to understand the correspondence relationship with the notification mode that was performed in the previous predetermined effect state, and the effect may become difficult to understand. In this regard, in this configuration, since the notification mode of the same rank is once changed to the higher notification mode, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the notification mode has returned, and it is possible to suppress the player's confusion.

Feature B12. A specific effect means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1603 to S1605) that executes a specific effect (change suggestive effect) that suggests that the notification mode of the specific notification changes to a higher notification mode,
Means for limiting the execution of the specific effect (function for limiting the execution of the change suggesting effect) when the notification mode of the specific notification is set to the predetermined first mode in the later predetermined effect state. and,
The gaming machine according to feature B10 or feature B11, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, since the specific effect suggests that the notification mode of the specific notification changes to a higher notification mode, expectations for the change to a higher mode are aroused, and the player's attention to the specific notification. degree can be increased. In such a configuration, for example, if the specific effect is performed when the notification mode of the specific notification is a mode of the same rank, the player can use the destination stored by the player even though the mode is actually of the same rank. Based on the notification mode in the predetermined effect state, it is assumed that the notification mode will be associated with a higher-level notification mode. In this case, since the actual notification mode does not match the mode associated with the player, the player may lose confidence in the specific effect. In this regard, in this configuration, even if it corresponds to a change to a higher notification mode, if it is only to return to the notification mode in the previous predetermined effect state, the execution of the specific effect is restricted. It is possible to suppress the player's association with a mode higher than the notification mode, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

Feature B13. The action for a game cycle is started based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and the end of the motion for a game cycle is notified as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination. as a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process in the main control device 162) for controlling the operation for the game turn to be performed;
Suspension notification means (function for executing suspension command corresponding processing in the effect control device 143) that performs suspension notification (suspension image) so that the player can recognize at least the number of suspensions of the game round before execution;
with
The specific notification is characterized in that the notification mode of the suspension notification is a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode). The feature according to any one of B1 to B12 game machine.

When performing the specific notification using the notification for suspension, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, and an event that the effect state is switched during the execution of the specific notification is likely to occur. In addition, since it is clear which special information is the target of the degree of expectation, etc. suggested by the specific notification, it is assumed that the effect of canceling the execution of the specific notification due to the switching of the production state will be large. be. By applying any one of the features B1 to B12 to such a configuration, each feature can be effectively functioned, and each of the above effects can be favorably exhibited.

Feature B14. When the notification mode of the suspension notification corresponding to the specific special information (suspension information of the suspension image HW) is set to the specific mode, when the previous predetermined effect state is changed to the other effect state, the specific special Characteristic B13, characterized in that it comprises means for setting the notification mode of the suspension notification corresponding to the information to the normal mode (the function of setting the display mode of the suspension image HW to the normal display mode HMa). game machine.

In the above configuration, when the presentation state is switched, the pending notification, which had been in the specific mode until then, is changed to the normal mode, so the player is likely to have the impression of being downgraded, and the level of expectation is lowered. easily misleading. By applying any one of the features B1 to B12 to such a configuration, each feature can be effectively functioned, and each of the above effects can be favorably exhibited.

For each configuration of the features B1 to B14, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B14, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G15, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of H1 to H11 and features I1 to I12 individually, or apply a combination of part or all of the respective technical ideas. is also possible. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing in the main controller 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Attachment determination means (a function of executing a correctness determination process or the like in the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
Privilege granting capable of granting a privilege to a player based on the fact that the grant determination result by the grant determination means is a grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. Means (function for executing big winning opening opening/closing process in main controller 162);
The action for a game cycle is started based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and the end of the motion for a game cycle is notified as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination. as a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process in the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75) so that the game turn operation is performed;
The predetermined notification means or a notification means (symbol display device 75, reservation lamp section) for suspension notification means (function for executing suspension command corresponding processing in the effect control device 143),
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, the information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination, rather than the special information being the target of the grant determination. destination specifying means for executing the destination specifying process specified at the previous timing (function for executing the pending prefetching process in the main controller 162);
Specific mode means ( In the second embodiment, the function of executing the setting process for holding notice and the first execution process for holding notice in the effect control device 143),
with
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the production mode A is switched to the production mode B), the execution of the specific mode or the suspension notification is restricted to be shifted to a restricted state. ,
Setting means (second A game machine characterized in that it has a function of executing a second setting process for holding notice by the performance control device 143 in the embodiment of 2).

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the suspension notification is set to a specific mode based on the result of the so-called suspension look-ahead. Therefore, it is possible to arouse the player's expectation for the grant correspondence result before the start of the game cycle. can. Under such a configuration, there is a case where a restricted state is provided to restrict the execution of the specific mode or the suspension notification for the suspension notification that has already been set to the specific mode. However, when new special information is acquired in the restricted state, assuming that such special information is not changed to a specific mode, the expectations of the player regarding the special information acquired during the restricted state are not met. There is a concern that it will not be possible to evoke emotions.

In this respect, according to this configuration, since the notification mode of the on-hold notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the restricted state can be changed to the specific mode after the restricted state ends, Special information can arouse player's expectations. At that time, since the change to the specific mode after the restricted state is performed based on the result of the destination identification processing (suspended prefetch processing) executed during the restricted state, the destination identification processing is performed in the same way as when not in the restricted state. be able to. That is, since there is no need to change the configuration of the destination specifying process, the notification mode of the on-hold notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the restricted state is changed after the restricted state while suppressing the configuration from becoming complicated. becomes possible.

Feature C2. The destination identification means is configured to perform the destination identification processing for the acquired special information in accordance with the acquisition timing of the special information, regardless of whether the restricted state exists. The gaming machine according to feature C1.

According to the above configuration, the destination identification process can be performed in accordance with the acquisition timing of the special information both in the restricted state and in the non-restricted state. There is no need to distinguish processing. Therefore, it becomes possible to change the notification mode of the suspension notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the restricted state after the restricted state, while suppressing the complication of the configuration.

Feature C3. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, wherein the setting means executes the setting when or after the restriction state ends.

For example, when setting the notification mode after the restricted state based on the result of destination identification processing executed during the restricted state, if the setting is performed during the restricted state, it corresponds to the suspension notification for which the notification mode is set. If the game round of the special information is executed during the restricted state, the suspension notification may end without reflecting the setting of the notification mode, and the setting may be wasted. In this regard, in this configuration, the setting of the notification mode is performed at the time of or after the end of the restricted state, so it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such wastefulness and perform efficient processing.

Feature C4. the restricted state restricts execution of the particular aspect;
Regarding the suspension notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the restricted state, the notification mode during the restricted state is the normal mode, or a predetermined mode (black display mode) different from both the normal mode and the specific mode (a function of forcibly setting the display mode of the holding images HB1 and HB2 to the normal display mode HMa or the black display mode).

In the above configuration, in the restricted state in which the execution of the specific mode is restricted, the notification for suspension is performed in the normal mode or in a predetermined mode different from the normal mode and the specific mode, so that the player can recognize the number of times the game is held. Certain aspects can be disabled while doing so. By applying one of the features C1 to C3 to such a configuration, each feature can be effectively functioned, and each of the above effects can be favorably exhibited.

Feature C5. When special information is acquired during the restricted state, predetermined information (occurrence pending during the restricted period) can be grasped after the restricted state that the special information was acquired during the restricted state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, characterized in that it is configured to be able to store the information of the event) in a predetermined storage unit (holding storage area 344c of RAM 344).

According to the above configuration, even if the special information acquired before entering the restricted state and the special information acquired during the restricted state coexist after the end of the restricted state, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage unit The special information obtained during the restricted state can be specified based on the information of As a result, in the setting means related to feature C1, it is possible to distinguish between special information acquired during the restricted state and special information that is not, and to process only the special information acquired during the restricted state. be possible.

Feature C6. A plurality of production states including a first production state (production mode A) and a second production state (production mode B) are set as the production state,
When a predetermined transition condition is established (when a predetermined operation is performed by the operation unit for effect 36), effect state transition means (effect A function to execute the production mode switching process in the control device 143),
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein the game machine is configured to shift to the restricted state when shifting from the first rendering state to the second rendering state.

In the above configuration, the restricted state is entered as the presentation state is switched. In this case, since it is considered that the player will play the game in the effect state after the switching, it is assumed that the special information will be acquired during the restricted state. By applying any one of the above features C1 to C5 to such a configuration, each of these features can be effectively functioned, and each of the above effects can be favorably exhibited.

Feature C7. The gaming machine according to feature C6, wherein the second effect state is a state of effect in which the ease with which the specific mode process is executed is different from that of the first effect state.

In the case of a constitution in which the easiness of changing to a specific mode is different depending on the performance state, if the performance state is switched while the specific mode is maintained, there is a possibility that the degree of expectation suggested by the specific mode will not match before and after the switching. In this case, by restricting the execution of the specific mode and the notification for suspension accompanying the transition from the first effect state to the second effect state, it is possible to suppress such an inconsistency in expectations. However, even if the above restriction is applied to the suspension notification that has been in the specific mode before the transition to the second presentation state, a new suspension notification that is performed by acquiring the special information in the second presentation state Concerns arise about how notifications should be handled. By applying any one of the above features C1 to C6 to such a configuration, each feature can be effectively functioned, and each of the above effects can be favorably exhibited.

It should be noted that "the second rendering state is a rendering state in which the ease with which the specific mode process is executed differs from the first rendering state" in this feature includes both the first rendering state and the second rendering state. , and not only when the execution frequency (execution probability) of the specific notification differs in each of these production states, but also when the specific notification is performed in one of the first production state and the second production state It can be understood that non-executed configurations are also included.

Feature C8. The gaming machine according to feature C6 or feature C7, wherein the restricted state is terminated when the second presentation state is terminated.

In the above configuration, when the second effect state ends, the restricted state is canceled. can be restricted, and then a specific mode can be set according to the end of the second effect state.

Feature C9. An execution notification unit (execution display area) for performing a predetermined notification (displaying a suspension image in the execution display area D) corresponding to the suspension notification so that the player can recognize the execution of the suspended game round D),
When the game round of the special information acquired during the restricted state is performed during the restricted state, the notification mode of the predetermined notification corresponding to the special information and performed by the execution notification unit , means for setting a specified mode different from the normal mode based on the result of the destination specified process performed during the restricted state (function for executing the processes of steps S2901 to S2903). The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8.

According to the above configuration, the change to the specific mode is allowed when the game progresses to the game round of the suspension notification for which the change of the notification mode is restricted due to the shift to the restricted state. Therefore, even if the game round of the special information obtained during the restricted state is executed during the restricted state, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the special information.

For each configuration of the features C1 to C9, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B14, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G15, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of H1 to H11 and features I1 to I12 individually, or apply a combination of part or all of the respective technical ideas. is also possible. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing in the main controller 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Attachment determination means (a function of executing a correctness determination process or the like in the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
Privilege granting capable of granting a privilege to a player based on the fact that the grant determination result by the grant determination means is a grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. Means (function for executing big winning opening opening/closing process in main controller 162);
The action for a game cycle is started based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and the end of the motion for a game cycle is set as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means. a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process in the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75) so that the game turn operation is performed as one;
The predetermined notification means or a notification means (symbol display device 75, reservation lamp section) for suspension notification means (function for executing suspension command corresponding processing in the production control device 143),
Based on a predetermined execution opportunity (prefetching result), a specification capable of executing a specific mode process in which the notification mode of the suspension notification is a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode) Aspect means (setting process for pending notice in production control device 143, function of executing process for first execution of pending notice),
with
In the specific mode, a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result is different. has been
A plurality of types of states are set, including a first state (production mode A) and a second state (production mode B) in which the ease of execution of the specific mode process differs from that of the first state,
When the specific mode process is executed in the first state, and the notification mode of the suspension notification is set to one of a plurality of types of modes, and the transition to the second state is performed, the notification mode of the suspension notification A mode determination for determining whether or not a predetermined mode (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) that allows the player to recognize that the notification mode in the first state is on the same level as the player. A game machine characterized by comprising means (a function of executing the effect mode switching process by the effect control device 143 in the third embodiment).

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the notification for suspension is a specific mode, and the specific mode is set with a plurality of types of modes so that the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result is different. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the level of expectation by setting the notification for suspension to any specific mode, and it is possible to suitably arouse the player's expectation for the result of the award correspondence. In addition, in this configuration, a plurality of types of states are set, including a first state and a second state in which the easiness of changing to a specific mode differs from that of the first state. Since switching between these states is performed, the player can change his/her mood during the game, and can suppress boredom with the game.

Under such a configuration, when the state shifts from the first state to the second state in the state where the notification for holding in the specific mode is being performed, if the specific mode is maintained, depending on the type, the corresponding expectation level will be the second state. There is a risk that the player will be misunderstood because the state will be far different from before the transition to the state. In this regard, in this configuration, when such a transition occurs, the player recognizes that the notification mode of the suspension notification after the transition to the second state is equivalent to the notification mode in the first state. is possible. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconsistency in the degree of expectation, and it is possible to suitably perform the suspension notification after the transition to the second state.

In addition, the second state is set as a state in which the second state can execute a change to the specific mode of the notification for suspension in the "second state in which the specific mode processing is more likely to be executed than the first state" in this feature. It can be understood that not only the configuration in which the second state is set as a state in which the second state does not execute the change to the specific mode of the notification for suspension is included.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the second state is a state in which the specific mode process is less likely to be executed than in the first state.

In the above configuration, in the second state, since it is more difficult for the suspension notification to be in the specific mode than in the first state, the degree of expectation for the result of granting when the notification mode of the suspension notification is changed to the specific mode is assumed to be higher in the second state than in the first state. In this case, the transition from the first state to the second state is a transition from a state in which the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result for the specific mode is low to a state in which the degree of expectation is high. By applying the configuration of (1), it is possible to suppress the inconsistency of the degree of expectation and suitably perform the suspension notification after the transition to the second state.

In addition, in the present feature "the second state is a state in which the specific mode process is less likely to be executed than in the first state", the probability that the suspension notification is the specific mode in the second state is the first In addition to the configuration in which the second state is set to be lower than that of the state, it can be understood to include the configuration in which the second state is set as a state in which the change to the specific mode of the notification for suspension is not executed.

Feature D3. If the notification mode of the suspension notification when shifting to the second state is higher than a predetermined notification mode (upper limit display mode), the mode determination means sets the notification mode of the suspension notification to the predetermined notification mode. If it is determined that the mode is not allowed, and the notification mode of the suspension notification in the case of shifting to the second state is a mode equal to or less than the predetermined notification mode, the notification mode of the suspension notification is set to the predetermined notification mode The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, characterized in that it is determined that the aspect is permitted.

In the above configuration, by comparing the notification mode at the time of transition to the second state with the predetermined notification mode set corresponding to the second state, it is possible to set the notification mode to the same level as the notification mode in the first state. is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not to use the mode of the same rank based on the degree of expectation corresponding to each mode in the second state, and it is possible to suitably perform the notification for holding after the transition to the second state. Become.

In addition, in this feature, the "predetermined notification mode" can also be expressed as "a predetermined notification mode set corresponding to the second state".

Feature D4. For the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, information (variation pattern, etc.) corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination, and the special information is the grant determination. Equipped with destination identification means (function for executing pending prefetch processing in main controller 162) for executing destination identification processing to be identified at a timing prior to being targeted,
The specific mode means is configured to execute the specific mode process based on a result of the destination specific process,
Any one of characteristics D1 to D3, wherein the mode determining means performs the determination based on the result of the destination specifying process for the special information corresponding to the on-hold notification to be determined by the mode determining means. The gaming machine described in .

In the above configuration, the change to the specific mode is performed based on the result of pre-specification processing (so-called pre-reading result). When the mode determination means determines whether or not to set the mode of the same rank, the above determination is performed based on the result of pre-reading of the on-hold notification, which is the determination target. As a result, the pre-reading result of the reservation notification, that is, the notification result in the game round executed when the special information of the reservation notification is the determination target of the grant determination means, and the game round in the game round Based on the performance, it is possible to determine whether or not to set the aspect of the same rank.

Feature D5. A plurality of types of upper limit modes (upper limit display modes) are set in correspondence with the result of the destination specifying process (recovery determination table),
The mode determination means is
Grasping means for grasping the result of the destination specifying process for the special information corresponding to the reservation notification to be judged by the mode judging means (function for executing the process of step S3105);
means for performing the determination based on the upper limit mode corresponding to the result grasped by the grasping means among the plurality of types of modes (function for executing the process of step S3106);
The gaming machine according to feature D4, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, a plurality of types of upper limit mode are set corresponding to the look-ahead result, and when determining whether or not to be the mode of the same grade by the mode determination means, the look-ahead result of the pending notification that is the determination target The corresponding upper limit aspect is applied to make the above determination. Thereby, it is possible to determine whether or not the notification mode of the suspension notification when shifting to the second state does not exceed the corresponding expectation level in the first state, and whether or not to be the mode of the same rank.

Feature D6. When executing the specific mode process, the specific mode means executes the suspension notification in a first specific mode (blue display mode HMb) that is one of the plurality of types of modes, and then Means for changing the notification mode of the notification for suspension to the second specific mode (green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) higher than the first specific mode (for the suspension notice in the production control device 143 A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, characterized by comprising a function of executing setting processing.

In the above configuration, after the notification mode of the on-hold notification is set to the specific mode, the notification mode is changed step by step to a higher mode. In such a configuration, when the process of setting the notification mode of the notification for suspension to the specific mode is performed in the first state, for example, when the transition to the second state occurs in the early stages after the specific mode is set , it is assumed that the specific mode at that time will be a relatively low-level mode (mode with low expectations), and conversely, if the transition occurs in the final stage, it will be a relatively high-level mode (mode high degree). In other words, depending on the timing of transition to the second state, there is a difference in which mode the specific mode in the notification for suspension is. By applying any one of the features D1 to D5 to the configuration in this way, it is possible to sort whether or not to use the same level mode according to the notification mode each time, and after the transition to the second state It becomes possible to suitably perform the notification for holding in.

In addition, in this feature, "the mode determination means determines whether or not to set a predetermined mode that allows the player to recognize that the notification mode in the first mode immediately before the transition to the second state is on the same level. It may further include the feature of "comprising means for determining

Feature D7. the second state is a state in which the specific mode process is less likely to be executed than in the first state;
When the specific mode process is executed in the second state, and the state of the notification for suspension is set to one of a plurality of types of modes, and the state is shifted to the first state, the determination by the mode determination means is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, characterized by comprising means for not executing (a function of skipping the processing of steps S3105 to S3107 when a negative determination is made in step S3104).

In the above configuration, the transition from the second state in which it is relatively difficult for the holding notification to be in the specific mode to the first state in which it is relatively easy to be in the specific mode, that is, the expectation for the result of giving the specific mode is high. In the case of switching from a state to a low state, it is configured not to determine whether or not to perform a mode of the same rank. As a result, it is possible to suppress excessive restriction of opportunities for maintaining the notification mode of the suspension notification, and to reduce the processing load.

Feature D8. When it is determined by the mode determination means that the predetermined mode is to be used, the change means for changing the notification mode of the suspension notification that is the target of the determination from the normal mode to the predetermined mode (executing the process of step S3110 The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, characterized in that it has a function of

In the above configuration, when the notification mode of the on-hold notification is set to the same level mode, it is changed from the normal mode to the same level mode. In this case, in both the case of using the same-ranked mode and the case of not using the same-ranked mode, the notification mode of the notification for holding is switched to the normal mode along with the switching from the first state to the second state. As a result, it is possible to reduce unnaturalness when the specific mode is changed to the normal mode due to the determination that the mode of the same rank is not used. In addition, by adopting a configuration that changes to the specific mode after changing to the normal mode, even if it is determined not to change to the same mode, after the transition to the second state, the notification for holding that is set to the normal mode is specified. It is possible to arouse the expectation that the mode will be changed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation for the suspension notification.

Feature D9. Specific effect means for executing a specific effect (change suggestion effect) suggesting that the notification mode of the suspension notification changes to a higher notification mode (function for executing the processes of steps S1603 to S1605);
means for limiting the execution of the specific effect (function for limiting the execution of the change suggesting effect) when the notification mode of the suspension notification is changed to the predetermined mode by the changing means; ,
The gaming machine according to feature D8, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, since it is suggested that the notification mode of the suspension notification will change to a higher notification mode by the specific effect, the expectation for the change to the higher notification mode is aroused, and the game to the suspension notification is stimulated. You can increase the attention of the person. In such a configuration, for example, when a specific effect is performed when changing to a mode of the same rank, the notification mode in the first state stored by the player is used as a reference, and a higher notification mode is associated with it. It is assumed that In this case, there is a concern that an unnatural impression may be given as if the original mode had just returned to the original state even though the specific effect was performed. In this regard, in this configuration, even if the notification mode is changed to a higher-level notification mode, when changing from the normal mode to the equivalent mode, the execution of the specific effect is restricted, so it is preferable to prevent such an inconvenience from occurring. can be suppressed to

Feature D10. When the mode determination means determines not to use the predetermined mode, the notification mode of the pending notification that is the target of the determination is the normal mode, or the means (step A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of S3108.

In the above configuration, when it is determined not to be in the same rank mode, the notification mode of the suspension notification that is the determination target is set to the normal mode or the lower notification mode, so that the suspension notification when shifting to the second state It is possible to prevent the notification mode from exceeding the corresponding expectation level in the first state, and it is possible to suitably perform the suspension notification after the transition to the second state.

For each configuration of the features D1 to D10, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B14, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G15, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of H1 to H11 and features I1 to I12 individually, or apply a combination of part or all of the respective technical ideas. is also possible. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing in the main controller 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Attachment determination means (a function of executing a correctness determination process or the like in the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
A special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of grant determination by the grant determination means is a grant correspondence result indicating that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. Special game state means (function for executing the big winning opening opening and closing process in the main control device 162) to shift to
The action for a game cycle is started based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and the end of the motion for a game cycle is notified as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination. as a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process in the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75) so that the game turn operation is performed;
The predetermined notification means or a notification means (symbol display device 75, reservation lamp section) for suspension notification means (function for executing suspension command corresponding processing in the effect control device 143),
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, the information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination, rather than the special information being the target of the grant determination. destination specifying means for executing the destination specifying process specified at the previous timing (function for executing the pending prefetching process in the main controller 162);
Based on the result of the destination identification process, the notification mode of the suspension notification can be changed to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode). a function for executing the advance notice setting process and the first execution process of the pending notice);
with
In addition to the special game state, a plurality of game states (normal game state, high-precision game state, time-saving game state) are set as game states,
When the determination result of the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result and the special game state is executed, state transition means (in the main controller 162) for shifting to one of the game states of the plurality of types function to execute transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends),
With respect to the suspension notification set in the specific mode before the special game state, if the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are different, the notification mode after the special game state is changed to the special mode. Specific means (function for executing the setting process for the previous notice return by the effect control device 143 in the fourth embodiment) that is different from the notification mode before the game state,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, since the notification mode of the suspension notification is set to a specific mode based on the so-called retention look-ahead result, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result, and the player's expectation is suitable. can be called to Further, in this configuration, a plurality of types of game states are set as the game state, the determination result of the grant determination means becomes the grant correspondence result, and when the special game state is executed, one of the plurality of types of game states is selected. is shifted to the game state of. In such a configuration in which a plurality of types of game states are provided, even if the special information used for grant determination is the same, there may be differences in the result of grant determination and the game round effects performed in game rounds depending on the game state. There is In this regard, in this configuration, regarding the suspension notification set to the specific mode before execution of the special game state, if the game state before and after execution of the special game state is different, the notification mode after the special game state is special. Since it is different from the notification mode before the game state, even if the award determination result or the game turn performance due to the difference in the game state changes, misunderstandings by the player due to the suspension notification are suppressed. It is possible to suitably perform the suspension notification in the game state after the transition.

Feature E2. When the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are different, the specifying means, when the game state before the special game state is different from The gaming machine according to feature E1, further comprising means for setting the notification mode to the normal mode (function for executing the process of step S3417 after making a negative determination in step S3504).

In the above configuration, when the game state after the special game state is different from the game state before the special game state, the mode is changed to the normal mode and the suspension notification is performed. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress misunderstanding by the player due to the notification for holding that does not match the actual degree of expectation after the special game state. In addition, by uniformly setting the normal mode, it is possible to eliminate the need for fine adjustment of the notification mode in accordance with the change in the degree of expectation, and it is possible to simplify the processing configuration.

Feature E3. The specifying means is
a first means as a means for setting to the normal mode;
After the normal mode is set by the first means, it is determined whether or not the notification mode of the suspension notification set to the normal mode is a specific mode, and based on the result, the notification mode of the suspension notification A second means for setting the (function for executing the third execution process of the pending notice);
The gaming machine according to feature E2, characterized by comprising:

To change the notification mode of the reservation notification, which is the specific mode before the special game state, to the normal mode after the special game state based on the difference between the game state after the special game state and the game state before the special game state. Therefore, although it is possible to absorb the fluctuations in the grant determination results and the game-turn effects caused by the changes in the game state, there is a concern that the degree of expectation of the special information corresponding to the suspension notification cannot be notified or suggested. In this respect, according to the present configuration, since an opportunity to change to the specific mode is given for the suspension notification that has been set to the normal mode, it can be promoted to the specific mode after the fact, and the degree of expectation is notified. It becomes possible to equal

Feature E4. An execution notification unit (execution display area) for performing a predetermined notification (displaying a suspension image in the execution display area D) corresponding to the suspension notification so that the player can recognize the execution of the suspended game round D),
The specifying means is
a first means as a means for setting to the normal mode;
It is determined whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification corresponding to the suspension notification is set to a specific mode different from the normal mode in the game round of the suspension notification set to the normal mode by the first means, and the result is determined. Second means for setting the notification mode of the predetermined notification based on (function for executing the third execution process of the pending notice);
The gaming machine according to feature E2 or feature E3, characterized by comprising:

To change the notification mode of the reservation notification, which is the specific mode before the special game state, to the normal mode after the special game state based on the difference between the game state after the special game state and the game state before the special game state. Therefore, although it is possible to absorb the fluctuations in the grant determination results and the game-turn effects caused by the changes in the game state, there is a concern that the degree of expectation of the special information corresponding to the suspension notification cannot be notified or suggested. In this regard, in the present configuration, an opportunity to change to a specific mode is given when the game progresses to the game round of the suspension notification set to the normal mode. Therefore, even if the notification mode is changed from the specific mode to the normal mode, it can be upgraded to the specific mode after the fact, and it is possible to notify the degree of expectation.

Feature E5. When the game round is executed, based on the special information (suspended information) that is the target of the grant determination that is the trigger for the game round or the specific information (variation pattern) derived from the special information, in the game round Equipped with game round production setting means (function for executing special figure fluctuation display processing in production control device 143) for setting game round production (reach production etc.) to be performed,
The second means is characterized in that it determines whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is a specific mode based on the special information or the specific information referred to by the game round effect setting means. The gaming machine described in E4.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is to be the specific mode based on the special information or the specific information used for setting the game cycle performance by the game cycle performance setting means. Thus, when the game state after the special game state and the game state before the special game state are different, the notification mode of the predetermined notification is adapted to the game round performance actually performed in the game round after the special game state. can be modified in certain ways.

When this feature is applied to the above feature E2, "the second means sets the notification mode of the predetermined notification to a specific mode based on the special information or the specific information referred to by the game spin effect setting means. "determine whether or not" to "the second means, regardless of the information stored in the predetermined storage unit, the special information or the specific information referred to by the game round effect setting means It is determined whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is set to the specific mode based on the determination."

Feature E6. In the specific mode, a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result is different. has been
Information corresponding to the notification mode of the suspension notification set as a specific mode before execution of the special game state can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (recovery area 344f of RAM 344),
When the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are the same, the specifying means stores, in the predetermined memory, the suspension notification set in the specific mode before the special game state. A feature characterized by comprising mode setting means (function for executing setting processing for advance notice return in the effect control device 143) for setting the notification mode after the special game state based on the information stored in the part. The game machine according to any one of E1 to E5.

For example, if the notification mode after the special game state is set based on the result of the pending look-ahead performed before the special game state, there is a concern that the notification mode will be set to a different notification mode from the notification mode before the special game state. be. In this regard, in this configuration, when the special game state is executed in a situation where the notification for suspension of the specific mode exists, the information of the notification mode at that time is stored, and the game state after the special game state is changed to the game state before the special game state. If it is the same as the game state of (1), the notification mode after the special game state is set based on the stored information. As a result, it is possible to preferably restore the notification mode after the special game state to the original mode before the special game state.

In addition, in this feature, "mode setting means for setting the notification mode after the special game state based on the information stored in the predetermined storage unit for the suspension notification set in the specific mode before the special game state ' is changed to 'Notice after the special game state based on the information stored in the predetermined storage unit regardless of the result of the destination identification process regarding the suspension notification set in the specific mode before the special game state It can also be expressed as "mode setting means for setting a mode".

Feature E7. In the specific mode, a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result is different. has been
When the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are the same, the specifying means, when the game state is the same as the game state after the special game state, the special game state with respect to the suspension notification set in the specific mode before the special game state. Mode setting for setting the subsequent notification mode to a predetermined mode (the same specific display mode, the same rank display mode, the same character, etc.) that allows the player to recognize that the player is of the same rank as the notification mode before the special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, characterized by comprising means (a function of executing setting processing for return of advance notice in the effect control device 143).

In the above configuration, when the game state after the special game state is the same as the game state before the special game state, the player recognizes that the notification mode after the special game state is equivalent to the notification mode before the special game state. In order to make it possible to set the mode, the suspension notification that aroused the expectation of the player by changing to the specific mode before the special game state can similarly arouse the expectation even after the special game state. .

Feature E8. In the specific mode, a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result is different. has been
The specifying means is
When the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are different, the notification mode after the special game state is changed to the normal mode for the suspension notification set in the specific mode before the special game state. A first means for setting the mode (a function of executing the process of step S3417 after making a negative determination in step S3504);
When the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are the same, the notification mode after the special game state is changed with respect to the suspension notification set in the specific mode before the special game state. A second means (effect control device) for setting a predetermined mode (the same specific display mode, the display mode of the same order, the same character, etc.) that allows the player to recognize that the notification mode before the special game state is of the same rank 143), and
with
Said second means comprises means (function of executing the process of step S3507) capable of setting the notification mode after said special game state to said predetermined mode after setting it to said normal mode. A gaming machine according to any one of the characterizing features E1 to E7.

In the above configuration, when the notification mode after the special game state is set to the same level as the notification mode before the special game state, the normal mode is once changed to the same level mode. In this case, regardless of whether or not the game state after the special game state and the game state before the special game state are the same, the notification mode of the suspension notification is changed to the specific mode as the special game state is executed. to normal mode. As a result, it is possible to reduce the unnaturalness when the mode is changed to the normal mode due to the difference in the game state. In addition, by adopting a configuration that changes to the specific mode after entering the normal mode, in the game state after the special game state, including the case where the game state is different, the suspension notification that is the normal mode is changed to the specific mode. It is possible to arouse the expectation that it will be done, and it is possible to maintain the expectation for the suspension notification.

Feature E9. The specifying means determines whether or not the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are the same in the special game state or when the special game state ends. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E8, characterized by comprising state determination means (a function of executing the process of step S3416).

In the above configuration, the determination of whether or not the game states are the same is performed during execution of the special game state or when the special game state ends. As a result, it is possible to promptly respond after the special game state as to how the notification mode of the reservation notification, which is the specific mode before the special game state, should be changed after the special game state. Therefore, after the special game state, even if the number of reservations before the reservation notification is small, it is possible to suitably adjust the notification mode of the reservation notification.

Feature E10. A variable that can be switched between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can enter or is likely to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which a game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state. ball entry means (variable prize winning device 65);
Switching control means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening/closing process in the main controller 162) for executing switching control to change the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state; ,
with
The special game state is a state in which the switching control is performed at least once,
The gaming machine according to feature E9, wherein the game state determination means performs the determination while the variable ball-entering means is in the second state.

When the variable ball entry means is in the first state in the special game state, the processing load is relatively high, such as the need to perform an effect based on the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means. is assumed. Using such a period to make a match/deny determination may lead to an even higher load. In this regard, in this configuration, the match determination is performed using the period in which the variable ball entering means is in the second state, so it is possible to reduce the processing load.

Feature E11. The grant determination means performs the grant determination based on the first information (value of the jackpot random number counter C1) included in the special information,
Based on the second information (the value of the variation type counter CS) included in the special information or the specific information (variation pattern) derived from the second information, the game round effect (ready-to-win effect) performed in the game round is performed. Game round production setting means to be set (function for executing special figure fluctuation display processing in production control device 143),
The destination specifying process is configured such that the second information included in the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means or the specific information corresponding to the second information is transferred to the first information included in the predetermined special information. is specified at a timing before being subject to the grant determination,
The plurality of types of game states correspond to a first game state (either a normal game state, a time-saving game state, or a high-quality game state) and predetermined second information (variation type counter CS whose value is 80). A second game state (a normal game state, a time-saving game state, or a high-accuracy game state and different from the first game state) in which the game-turn effect or the specific information is different from the first game state A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E9, characterized in that it comprises:

In the above configuration, the game-turn effect is set based on the second information included in the special information, and even if the value of the second information is the same in the first game state and the second game state, the corresponding game It is configured so that the rotation performance is different. Therefore, when the game state after the special game state is different from the game state before the special game state, if the notification mode after the special game state in the notification for suspension is made the same as the notification mode before the special game state, the special game state There is a possibility that the game round effects suggested by the notification for suspension may not match before and after the special game state. By applying any one of the features E1 to E9 to such a configuration, each feature can be effectively functioned, and each of the above effects can be favorably exhibited.

Feature E12. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E10, further comprising means for not executing the suspension notification in the special game state (function for executing the process of step S3411).

To prevent a player from feeling unnatural if the notification mode of the suspension notification is suddenly changed to another mode at the end of the special game state when the notification mode of the suspension notification is changed upon termination of the special game state. I am worried about getting an impression. For example, when the notification mode of the suspension notification is downgraded to a normal mode or a lower notification mode, it is assumed that it is likely to be noticeable to the player and likely to give an unnatural impression. In this regard, in this configuration, since the suspension notification is not executed in the special game state, when changing the notification mode, intervening a period in which the suspension notification itself including other suspension notifications is not performed. can be done. As a result, conspicuousness of the change in the notification mode is suppressed, and the unnaturalness can be alleviated. In addition, there is also the advantage that it is easier to draw the player's attention to the effect for the special game state by not executing the specific notification.

Feature E13. information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing in the main controller 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Attachment determination means (a function of executing a correctness determination process or the like in the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
A special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of grant determination by the grant determination means is a grant correspondence result indicating that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. Special game state means (function for executing the big winning opening opening and closing process in the main control device 162) to shift to
The action for a game cycle is started based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and the end of the motion for a game cycle is notified as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination. as a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process in the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75) so that the game turn operation is performed;
The predetermined notification means or a notification means (symbol display device 75, reservation lamp section) for suspension notification means (function for executing suspension command corresponding processing in the effect control device 143),
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, the information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination, rather than the special information being the target of the grant determination. destination specifying means for executing the destination specifying process specified at the previous timing (function for executing the pending prefetching process in the main controller 162);
Based on the result of the destination identification process, the notification mode of the suspension notification can be changed to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode). a function for executing the advance notice setting process and the first execution process of the pending notice);
with
In addition to the special game state, a plurality of game states (normal game state, high-precision game state, time-saving game state) are set as game states,
When the determination result of the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result and the special game state is executed, state transition means (in the main controller 162) for shifting to one of the game states of the plurality of types function to execute transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends),
When the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are the same as the notification mode after the special game state with respect to the reservation notification set in the specific mode before the special game state Specifying means for differentiating between and otherwise (the function of executing the setting process for the return of notice by the effect control device 143 in the fourth embodiment),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, since the notification mode of the suspension notification is set to a specific mode based on the so-called retention look-ahead result, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result, and the player's expectation is suitable. can be called to Further, in this configuration, a plurality of types of game states are set as the game state, the determination result of the grant determination means becomes the grant correspondence result, and when the special game state is executed, one of the plurality of types of game states is selected. is shifted to the game state of. In such a configuration in which a plurality of types of game states are provided, even if the special information used for grant determination is the same, there may be differences in the result of grant determination and the game round effects performed in game rounds depending on the game state. There is In this regard, in the present configuration, the notification mode in the game state after the special game state is changed to the notification mode in the game state after the special game state with respect to the notification for suspension set to the specific mode before the execution of the special game state. Since it is different depending on whether it is the same or not, it is possible to set the notification mode based on the change in the grant determination result and the game rotation effect due to the difference in the game state, and the suspension notification in the game state after the transition It becomes possible to perform it suitably.

Feature E14. In the specific mode, a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result is different. has been
Information corresponding to the notification mode of the suspension notification set as a specific mode before execution of the special game state can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (recovery area 344f of RAM 344),
When the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are the same, the specifying means stores, in the predetermined memory, the suspension notification set in the specific mode before the special game state. A feature characterized by comprising mode setting means (function for executing setting processing for advance notice return in the effect control device 143) for setting the notification mode after the special game state based on the information stored in the part. The gaming machine described in E13.

For example, if the notification mode after the special game state is set based on the result of the pending look-ahead performed before the special game state, there is a concern that the notification mode will be set to a different notification mode from the notification mode before the special game state. be. In this regard, in this configuration, when the special game state is executed in a situation where the notification for suspension of the specific mode exists, the information of the notification mode at that time is stored, and the game state after the special game state is changed to the game state before the special game state. If it is the same as the game state of (1), the notification mode after the special game state is set based on the stored information. As a result, it is possible to preferably restore the notification mode after the special game state to the original mode before the special game state.

In addition, in this feature, "mode setting means for setting the notification mode after the special game state based on the information stored in the predetermined storage unit for the suspension notification set in the specific mode before the special game state ' is changed to 'Notice after the special game state based on the information stored in the predetermined storage unit regardless of the result of the destination identification process regarding the suspension notification set in the specific mode before the special game state It can also be expressed as "mode setting means for setting a mode".

Feature E15. In the specific mode, a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result is different. has been
When the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are the same, the specifying means, when the game state is the same as the game state after the special game state, the special game state with respect to the suspension notification set in the specific mode before the special game state. Mode setting for setting the subsequent notification mode to a predetermined mode (the same specific display mode, the same rank display mode, the same character, etc.) that allows the player to recognize that the player is of the same rank as the notification mode before the special game state. The gaming machine according to feature E13 or feature E14, characterized by comprising means (a function of executing setting processing for return of advance notice in the effect control device 143).

In the above configuration, when the game state after the special game state is the same as the game state before the special game state, the player recognizes that the notification mode after the special game state is equivalent to the notification mode before the special game state. In order to make it possible to set the mode, the suspension notification that aroused the expectation of the player by changing to the specific mode before the special game state can similarly arouse the expectation even after the special game state. .

Feature E16. When the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are different, the specifying means, when the game state before the special game state is different from The gaming machine according to any one of features E13 to E15, further comprising means for setting the notification mode to the normal mode (function for executing the process of step S3417 after making a negative determination in step S3504).

In the above configuration, when the game state after the special game state is different from the game state before the special game state, the mode is changed to the normal mode and the suspension notification is performed. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress misunderstanding by the player due to the notification for holding that does not match the actual degree of expectation after the special game state. In addition, by uniformly setting the normal mode, it is possible to eliminate the need for fine adjustment of the notification mode in accordance with the change in the degree of expectation, and it is possible to simplify the processing configuration.

Feature E17. An execution notification unit (execution display area) for performing a predetermined notification (displaying a suspension image in the execution display area D) corresponding to the suspension notification so that the player can recognize the execution of the suspended game round D),
The specifying means is
a first means as a means for setting to the normal mode;
It is determined whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification corresponding to the suspension notification is set to a specific mode different from the normal mode in the game round of the suspension notification set to the normal mode by the first means, and the result is determined. Second means for setting the notification mode of the predetermined notification based on (function for executing the third execution process of the pending notice);
The gaming machine of feature E16, comprising:

To change the notification mode of the reservation notification, which is the specific mode before the special game state, to the normal mode after the special game state based on the difference between the game state after the special game state and the game state before the special game state. Therefore, although it is possible to absorb the fluctuations in the grant determination results and the game-turn effects caused by the changes in the game state, there is a concern that the degree of expectation of the special information corresponding to the suspension notification cannot be notified or suggested. In this regard, in the present configuration, an opportunity to change to a specific mode is given when the game progresses to the game round of the suspension notification set to the normal mode. Therefore, even if the notification mode is changed from the specific mode to the normal mode, it can be upgraded to the specific mode after the fact, and it is possible to notify the degree of expectation.

Feature E18. When the game round is executed, based on the special information (suspended information) that is the target of the grant determination that is the trigger for the game round or the specific information (variation pattern) derived from the special information, in the game round Equipped with game round production setting means (function for executing special figure fluctuation display processing in production control device 143) for setting game round production (reach production etc.) to be performed,
The second means is characterized in that it determines whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is a specific mode based on the special information or the specific information referred to by the game round effect setting means. The gaming machine described in E17.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is to be the specific mode based on the special information or the specific information used for setting the game cycle performance by the game cycle performance setting means. Thus, when the game state after the special game state and the game state before the special game state are different, the notification mode of the predetermined notification is adapted to the game round performance actually performed in the game round after the special game state. can be modified in certain ways.

When this feature is applied to the above feature E2, "the second means sets the notification mode of the predetermined notification to a specific mode based on the special information or the specific information referred to by the game spin effect setting means. "determine whether or not" to "the second means, regardless of the information stored in the predetermined storage unit, the special information or the specific information referred to by the game round effect setting means It is determined whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is set to the specific mode based on the determination."

Feature E19. In the specific mode, a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result is different. has been
The specifying means is
When the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are the same, the notification mode after the special game state is changed to the notification mode after the special game state for the suspension notification set as the specific mode before the special game state. A first means (effect control device) for setting a predetermined mode (the same specific display mode, the same rank display mode, the same character, etc.) that allows the player to recognize that the notification mode before the special game state is of the same rank 143), and
When the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are different, the notification mode after the special game state is changed to the normal mode for the suspension notification set in the specific mode before the special game state Second means for setting the mode (function for executing the process of step S3417 after making a negative determination in step S3504);
with
Said first means is provided with means (function of executing the processing of step S3507) capable of setting the notification mode after said special game state to said predetermined mode after setting it to said normal mode. A gaming machine according to any of the characterizing features E13 to E18.

In the above configuration, when the notification mode after the special game state is set to the same level as the notification mode before the special game state, the normal mode is once changed to the same level mode. In this case, regardless of whether or not the game state after the special game state and the game state before the special game state are the same, the notification mode of the suspension notification is changed to the specific mode as the special game state is executed. to normal mode. As a result, it is possible to reduce the unnaturalness when the mode is changed to the normal mode due to the difference in the game state. In addition, by adopting a configuration that changes to the specific mode after entering the normal mode, in the game state after the special game state, including the case where the game state is different, the suspension notification that is the normal mode is changed to the specific mode. It is possible to arouse the expectation that it will be done, and it is possible to maintain the expectation for the suspension notification.

It is possible to apply the configurations of the features E9 to E12 to the features E13 to E19. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying these configurations.

For each configuration of the features E1 to E19, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B14, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G15, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of H1 to H11 and features I1 to I12 individually, or apply a combination of part or all of the respective technical ideas. is also possible. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing in the main controller 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) for storing the special information (holding information) acquired by the information acquisition means with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Attachment determination means (a function of executing a correctness determination process or the like in the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
Specific notification means (effect control) for executing specific notification (display of holding image) corresponding to the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means before the predetermined special information is subject to the provision determination a function of executing the first execution process of the pending notice in the device 143;
with
Regarding the predetermined special information, information (variation pattern etc.) corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination, before the special information is subject to the grant determination First destination specifying means (function to execute the first pending prefetch processing by the effect control device 143 in the fifth embodiment) to specify at a predetermined timing (obtaining information acquisition timing),
When a predetermined event (opening/closing execution mode, etc.) occurs during execution of the specific notification corresponding to the predetermined special information, determination in the case where the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination for the predetermined special information Information corresponding to the result (fluctuation pattern, etc.) is specified at a specific timing (end timing of the opening and closing execution mode, etc.) after the predetermined event (the effect control device 143 in the fifth embodiment a function of executing the second pending prefetching process);
with
The specific notification means is
First means for setting the notification mode of the specific notification corresponding to the predetermined special information before the predetermined event based on the identification result of the first destination identification means (setting processing for holding notice in the effect control device 143 is executed function) and
Second means for setting the notification mode of the specific notification corresponding to the predetermined special information after the predetermined event based on the identification result of the second destination identification means (executing the setting process for the advance notice return in the effect control device 143 function) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed based on the result of the so-called look-ahead processing, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result by the specific notification, and to appropriately arouse the player's expectation. can be done. In such a configuration, the state changes with the occurrence of the predetermined event, and even if the value of the special information used for grant determination is the same, there may be a difference in the result of grant determination before and after the predetermined event. In this regard, in this configuration, when a predetermined event occurs during the execution of the specific notification, the special information that triggered the specific notification is subjected to the pre-reading process again after the predetermined event, and the specific notification is performed based on the result. Set the notification mode of Therefore, the notification mode of the specific notification performed before the predetermined event can be adjusted to a mode suitable after the predetermined event, and the specific notification after the predetermined event can be preferably performed.

Feature F2. The action for a game cycle is started based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and the end of the motion for a game cycle is set as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination. As a game turn control means (function for executing game turn control processing in the main control device 162) for controlling the game turn operation to be performed,
The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the specific notification means is configured to be able to execute the specific notification across game rounds.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed over a relatively long period of time, it is likely that a predetermined event will occur during execution of the specific notification. By applying the configuration of the feature F1 to such a configuration, the feature can be effectively functioned, and the above effects can be favorably exhibited.

Feature F3. Before the predetermined event and after the predetermined event, the grant information (random number value corresponding to the big win) or the determination condition (winning probability) in the grant determination means may be different. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2.

In the above configuration, even if the value of the special information is the same, there may be a difference in the result of grant determination before the predetermined event and after the predetermined event. Therefore, if the specific notification after the predetermined event is performed in the notification mode before the predetermined event, there is a concern that a result different from the notification result (determination result) actually notified in the game round may be suggested. By applying the configuration of the feature F1 or F2 to such a configuration, it is possible to adjust the notification mode so as to match the actual notification result in the game round and perform notification after a predetermined event, It is possible to suitably perform the specific notification after the predetermined event.

Feature F4. The gaming machine according to feature F3, wherein the second destination identifying means performs the identification by applying the given information or the judgment condition corresponding to after the predetermined event.

In the above configuration, when the special information that triggered the specific notification is subjected to the pre-reading process again after the predetermined event, the pre-reading process is performed by applying the additional information and the judgment condition corresponding to the state after the predetermined event. . As a result, it is possible to perform notification after the predetermined event by adjusting the notification mode so as to match the actual notification result in the game round with respect to the specific notification that was performed before the predetermined event, thereby enabling the identification after the predetermined event. It becomes possible to suitably perform notification.

Feature F5. The action for a game cycle is started based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and the end of the motion for a game cycle is set as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination. as a game turn control means (a function for executing game turn control processing in the main controller 162) so that the game turn operation is performed;
Game round production setting means (production control device 143 Function to execute special figure fluctuation display processing in) and
with
A game turn effect corresponding to predetermined special information or predetermined specific information (variation pattern with a value of 80) derived from the predetermined special information can be different before the predetermined event and after the predetermined event. The game machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, characterized in that

In the above configuration, even if the value of the special information or the specific information is the same, a difference may occur in the game round effects set by the game round setting means before the predetermined event and after the predetermined event. Therefore, if the specific notification after the predetermined event is performed in the notification mode before the predetermined event, there is a concern that an effect different from the game-time effect actually performed in the game-time may be suggested. By applying the configuration described in any one of the above features F1 to F4 to such a configuration, the specific notification performed before the predetermined event is changed to match the actual game round effect. Notification after the predetermined event can be performed by adjusting, and it becomes possible to suitably perform the specific notification after the predetermined event.

Feature F6. The first target specifying means and the second target specifying means are means for specifying, as information corresponding to the determination result, a game spin effect corresponding to the predetermined special information or specific information corresponding to the predetermined special information. with
Characteristic feature F5, characterized in that the second destination specifying means specifies a game round effect corresponding to the predetermined special information or specific information corresponding to the predetermined special information after the predetermined event. game machine.

In the above configuration, when the special information that triggered the specific notification is subjected to the pre-reading process again after the predetermined event, the game round effect and the specific information are pre-read corresponding to the state after the predetermined event. As a result, it is possible to perform notification after the predetermined event by adjusting the notification mode so as to match the actual game performance with respect to the specific notification performed before the predetermined event, and the specific notification after the predetermined event is preferable. It becomes possible to go to

Feature F7. Any one of the characteristics F1 to F6, wherein the second means sets the notification mode after the predetermined event based on the notification mode before the predetermined event and the identification result of the second destination identification means. The game machine described.

For example, if the notification mode of the specific notification frequently changes with the occurrence of a predetermined event, the player may feel uncomfortable. In this regard, in this configuration, the notification mode after the predetermined event is set by considering not only the identification result of the second destination identification means but also the notification mode before the predetermined event. In light of the identification result of the second party identification means, if there is no problem in using the same manner after the predetermined event, the notification manner before the predetermined event can be taken over and the specific notification can be performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification mode from changing excessively with the predetermined event as a boundary, and it is possible to execute the specific notification after the predetermined event in a natural manner.

Feature F8. In the specific notification, a plurality of types of modes (normal display mode HMa, blue display mode) are provided so that the degree of expectation for the provision determination result that the result of the provision determination corresponds to the provision information is different. HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set,
The second means sets the notification mode after the predetermined event to the same level as the notification mode before the predetermined event based on the notification mode before the predetermined event and the identification result of the second destination identification means. A mode determination means (function for executing the processes of steps S4703 to S4705) that determines whether or not a predetermined mode (the same specific display mode, the display mode of the same rank, the same character, etc.) that can be recognized as The gaming machine according to feature F7, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, as the notification mode of the specific notification, a plurality of types of modes are set so that the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result is different. In such a configuration in which the degree of expectation is set in stages and a large number of notification modes are provided, the range of expectations corresponding to one notification mode becomes narrow. When the later specific notification is performed, the degree of expectation suggested before and after the predetermined event is likely to differ. In this regard, in this configuration, the player recognizes the notification mode after the predetermined event as being equivalent to the notification mode before the predetermined event based on the notification mode before the predetermined event and the identification result of the second destination identification means. Therefore, even in a situation in which a large number of notification modes are set, it is possible to appropriately perform the specific notification after the predetermined event by matching expectations.

Feature F9. The second means sets the notification mode after the predetermined event to a normal mode (normal display mode HMa) or a notification mode lower than the notification mode before the predetermined event when the mode determination means determines not to use the predetermined mode. The gaming machine according to feature F8, characterized by comprising means for setting the mode (a function of executing the process of step S3417 after making a negative determination in step S4706).

In the above configuration, when it is determined not to be the mode of the same rank, the notification mode of the specific notification that is the determination target is the normal mode or the lower notification mode, so that the notification mode after the predetermined event corresponds to before the predetermined event. Exceeding the degree of expectation can be suppressed, and it becomes possible to suitably perform the specific notification after the predetermined event.

Feature F10. The action for a game cycle is started based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and the end of the motion for a game cycle is set as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination. as a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process in the main control device 162) for controlling the operation for the game turn to be performed;
Suspension notification means (function for executing suspension command corresponding processing in the effect control device 143) for performing suspension notification (suspension image) so that the player can recognize at least the number of suspensions of the game round before execution;
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, wherein the specific notification is the suspension notification.

When performing the specific notification using the notification for suspension, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, and a situation in which a predetermined event occurs during the execution of the specific notification is likely to occur. In addition, since it becomes clear which special information is the target of the degree of expectation suggested by the specific notification, it is assumed that a difference in the degree of expectation before and after the predetermined event will have a large impact. By applying any one of the features F1 to F9 to such a configuration, each feature can be effectively functioned, and each of the above effects can be favorably exhibited.

Feature F11. A special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of grant determination by the grant determination means is a grant correspondence result indicating that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. A special game state (a function of executing the big winning opening opening and closing process in the main control device 162) to be shifted to,
In addition to the special game state, a plurality of game states (normal game state, high-precision game state, time-saving game state) are set as game states,
When the determination result of the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result and the special game state is executed, state transition means (in the main controller 162) for shifting to one of the game states of the plurality of types function to execute transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends),
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F10, wherein the predetermined event is the special game state.

There is a game machine that shifts to a game state such as a normal game state, a high-precision game state, a time-saving game state, or the like, triggered by the transition to the special game state. In such a gaming machine, even if the value of the special information used for grant determination is the same between the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state, the result of grant determination before and after the special game state. etc., there may be differences. By applying any one of the features F1 to F10 to such a configuration, each of the features can be effectively functioned, and each of the above effects can be favorably exhibited.

Feature F12. Characteristic F11 characterized by comprising means (function of executing the process of step S3411) for not executing the specific notification in the special game state when the special game state is entered during execution of the specific notification. The gaming machine described in .

To provide a player with an unnatural impression when suddenly changing the specific notification that has been performed until then to another mode at the end of the special game state when changing the notification mode of the specific notification along with the end of the special game state. I have concerns about it. For example, when the notification mode of the specific notification is downgraded to a normal mode or a lower notification mode, it is assumed that this is likely to be noticeable to the player and likely to give an unnatural impression. In this regard, in this configuration, since the specific notification is not executed in the special game state, it is possible to intervene a period in which the specific notification itself is not performed when changing the notification mode. As a result, conspicuousness of the change in the notification mode is suppressed, and the unnaturalness can be alleviated. In addition, there is also the advantage that it is easier to draw the player's attention to the effect for the special game state by not executing the specific notification.

For each configuration of the features F1 to F12, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B14, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G15, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of H1 to H11 and features I1 to I12 individually, or apply a combination of part or all of the respective technical ideas. is also possible. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing in the main controller 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Attachment determination means (a function of executing a correctness determination process or the like in the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
Privilege granting capable of granting a privilege to a player based on the fact that the grant determination result by the grant determination means is a grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. Means (function for executing big winning opening opening/closing process in main controller 162);
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, the information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination, rather than the special information being the target of the grant determination. destination specifying means for executing the destination specifying process specified at the previous timing (function for executing the pending prefetching process in the main controller 162);
Based on the result of the destination identification process, the first specific notification means (holding notice effect in the effect control device 143) is executed by the predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75). a function of executing the setting process and the first execution process of the pending notice);
with
The first specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to one of a plurality of types of notification modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe). A first notification mode setting means (a function of executing a setting process for holding notice in the effect control device 143) is provided, and the specific notification is performed based on the setting result of the first notification mode setting means. cage,
When a predetermined abnormality (power failure state) occurs during the execution of the specific notification, the second specific notification means (effect in the sixth embodiment) for re-executing the specific notification after the predetermined abnormality is resolved A function of executing the process for returning the pending notice by the control device 143, a function of executing the effect setting process by the effect control device 143 in the seventh embodiment),
The second specific notification means selects the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed after the predetermined abnormality is resolved, the notification mode of the specific notification before the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality, or the notification mode of the specific notification before the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality. Second notification mode setting means (effect control in the sixth and seventh embodiments) that is set based on the result of the executed destination specifying process or the result of the destination specifying process that is performed after a predetermined abnormality is resolved A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing display mode setting processing by a device 143 .

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed based on the result of the so-called look-ahead processing, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result by the specific notification, and to appropriately arouse the player's expectation. can be done. At that time, since a plurality of types of modes are set as the notification mode of the specific notification, by setting one of the plurality of types of modes and executing the specific notification, the degree of expectation is given a magnitude and suggested. be able to. Under such a configuration, when a predetermined abnormality occurs while the specific notification is being performed, and then the abnormality is resolved, the specific notification that was performed before the abnormality occurred is re-executed. . As a result, the specific notification can be restored after the abnormality is resolved, and disappearance of the specific notification due to the occurrence of the abnormality is suppressed. At that time, the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed is set based on the notification mode before the occurrence of the abnormality, the result of the pre-reading performed before the occurrence of the abnormality, or the result of the pre-reading performed again after the occurrence of the abnormality. It is possible to suitably restore the specific notification that has been performed.

Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the specific notification is not executed when the predetermined abnormality occurs during execution of the specific notification.

A configuration in which the specific notification is not executed due to the occurrence of an abnormality tends to cause the player's anxiety that not only the specific notification but also the degree of expectation associated with the specific notification has disappeared. By applying the configuration of the feature G1 to such a configuration, the feature can be effectively functioned, and the above effects can be favorably exhibited.

Feature G3. The second notification mode setting means performs the setting at a predetermined timing during a period from when the predetermined abnormality is resolved until the special information that triggered the specific notification becomes the target of the provision determination by the provision determination device. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or feature G2, characterized by performing

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed is set during the period from the resolution of the abnormality to the start of the game cycle of the special information that triggered the specific notification. Therefore, before the game round of the special information is started, the notification mode of the specific notification can be restored to the mode before the occurrence of the abnormality, and the degree of expectation can be suggested before the game round.

Feature G4. The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed based on the notification mode of the specific notification before the occurrence of a predetermined abnormality,
Information corresponding to the notification mode of the specific notification (information on the image for holding) can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (backup RAM 345),
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, wherein the information stored in the predetermined storage unit can be held when the predetermined abnormality occurs.

In the above configuration, the information corresponding to the notification mode of the specific notification is stored in the predetermined storage section, and the information stored in the storage section is retained without disappearing when an abnormality occurs. Therefore, after the abnormality is resolved, the notification mode of the specific notification can be determined based on the information in the storage unit, and the specific notification can be preferably performed after the abnormality is resolved.

Feature G5. The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed based on the notification mode of the specific notification before the occurrence of a predetermined abnormality,
In the specific notification, the plurality of types of notification modes are set so that the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result is different,
If the notification mode of the specific notification before the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality is a notification mode higher than the predetermined notification mode (green display mode HMc), the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed is set to the predetermined notification mode. It is provided with specifying means for setting the notification mode below the mode (function of executing the processing of step S5407) or not executing the specific notification (function of not executing the pending notice effect after the abnormality is resolved) The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, characterized by:

For example, if the special information stored in the acquired information storage means changes due to the influence of an abnormality, a mismatch occurs between the result of the pre-reading performed before the occurrence of the abnormality and the result of the assignment determination performed after the abnormality is resolved. . In such a case, the specific notification suggests a high degree of expectation before the occurrence of the abnormality, and if it is re-executed as it is after the abnormality is resolved, the notification result in the game round (result of grant judgment) and the performance in the game round There is a concern that the game-turn effect that is provided does not match the degree of expectation suggested by the specific notification, and gives an unpleasant impression to the player. In this regard, in the above configuration, when the notification mode of the specific notification performed at the time of occurrence of an abnormality is a predetermined mode or more, and suggests a certain degree of expectation, the specific notification is limited to a lower notification mode. Either re-execute or not execute the specific notification itself. As a result, it is possible to prevent the specific notification from suggesting the degree of expectation that does not match the notification result or the like in the game round, and to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

Feature G6. When the predetermined abnormality occurs, the special information stored in the obtained information storage means can be held,
When the special information that triggered the specific notification after the predetermined abnormality was eliminated is the target of the provision determination by the provision determination means, the provision determination means sets the notification mode to the predetermined mode or less. Setting means for setting the notification mode of specific notification or non-execution of specific notification based on the determination result of the grant determination means (function for executing the fourth execution process of the pending notice in the effect control device 143) The gaming machine according to feature G5, characterized in that

In the above configuration, even if the specific notification is re-executed after the predetermined cancellation is restricted to a lower notification mode, or the specific notification is not executed, the special information that triggered the specific notification is subject to the provision determination. As a result, the notification mode of the specific notification is reset, or the specific notification that has been disabled is executed. For this reason, it is possible to avoid a state in which the implied degree of expectation is kept low, or that the specific notification completely disappears. At that time, since the notification mode is reset based on the result of grant determination, the specific notification can be executed in an appropriate mode consistent with the notification result in the game round.

Feature G7. The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed based on the result of the destination identification process executed before the occurrence of a predetermined abnormality,
Information (variation pattern, etc.) corresponding to the result of the destination identification process can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (RAM 344),
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, wherein the information stored in the predetermined storage unit can be retained when the predetermined abnormality occurs.

In the above configuration, the information corresponding to the prefetch result is stored in the predetermined storage section, and the information stored in the storage section is retained without being lost when an abnormality occurs. Therefore, after the abnormality is resolved, the notification mode of the specific notification can be determined based on the information in the storage unit, and the specific notification can be preferably performed after the abnormality is resolved.

Feature G8. The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed based on the result of the destination identification process executed before the occurrence of a predetermined abnormality,
In the specific notification, the plurality of types of notification modes are set so that the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result is different,
If the identification result of the destination identification means is a predetermined result (hit result) before the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality, the notification mode of the specific notification is set to a higher notification mode (red display) than the predetermined mode (green display mode HMc). Mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) is allowed,
Either the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed is limited to a notification mode equal to or less than the predetermined mode (function for executing the process of step S6303), or the Characteristic features G1 to G7 characterized by comprising a specifying means for not executing the specific notification (function for not executing the holding notice effect after the abnormality is resolved) when the result of the destination specifying process is a predetermined result. The gaming machine according to any one of

For example, if the special information stored in the acquired information storage means changes due to the influence of an abnormality, a mismatch occurs between the result of the pre-reading performed before the occurrence of the abnormality and the result of the assignment determination performed after the abnormality is resolved. . In such a case, the specific notification suggests a high degree of expectation before the occurrence of the abnormality, and if it is re-executed as it is after the abnormality is resolved, the notification result in the game round (result of grant judgment) and the performance in the game round There is a concern that the game-turn effect that is provided does not match the degree of expectation suggested by the specific notification, and gives an unpleasant impression to the player. In this respect, in the above configuration, the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved is limited to a predetermined mode or less, or if the prefetch result before the occurrence of the abnormality is the predetermined result, the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the specific notification from suggesting the degree of expectation that does not match the notification result or the like in the game round, and to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

Feature G9. When the predetermined abnormality occurs, the special information stored in the obtained information storage means can be held,
When the special information that triggered the specific notification after the predetermined abnormality was eliminated is the target of the provision determination by the provision determination means, the provision determination means sets the notification mode to the predetermined mode or less. Setting means for setting the notification mode of specific notification or non-execution of specific notification based on the determination result of the grant determination means (function for executing the fourth execution process of the pending notice in the effect control device 143) The gaming machine according to feature G8, characterized in that

In the above configuration, even if the specific notification is re-executed after the predetermined cancellation is restricted to a lower notification mode, or the specific notification is not executed, the special information that triggered the specific notification is subject to the provision determination. As a result, the notification mode of the specific notification is reset, or the specific notification that has been disabled is executed. For this reason, it is possible to avoid a state in which the implied degree of expectation is kept low, or that the specific notification completely disappears. At that time, since the notification mode is reset based on the result of grant determination, the specific notification can be executed in an appropriate mode consistent with the notification result in the game round.

Feature G10. When a predetermined abnormality occurs during the execution of the specific notification, and if the result of the destination identification process performed before the occurrence of the abnormality cannot be identified after the predetermined abnormality is resolved, the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G9, characterized by comprising means for restricting the execution of (a function of moving to step S6311 when a negative determination is made in step S6308).

In the above configuration, if an abnormality occurs during the execution of the specific notification and the prefetch result that is the basis of the notification cannot be specified after the abnormality is resolved, the execution of the specific notification is restricted after the abnormality is resolved. It is possible to suppress that the degree is suggested.

Feature G11. The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed based on the result of the destination identification process performed after the predetermined abnormality is resolved,
The action for a game cycle is started based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and the end of the motion for a game cycle is notified as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination. As a game turn control means (function for executing game turn control processing in the main control device 162) for controlling the game turn operation to be performed,
With suspension notification means (function for executing suspension command corresponding processing in the effect control device 143) for performing suspension notification (suspension image) corresponding to the number of games whose execution is suspended,
The first specific notification means uses a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode) for the notification mode of the suspension notification as the specific notification,
Specific information (change part information) that can grasp the suspension notification in which the specific notification is performed in a situation where a plurality of suspension notifications are performed is stored in a predetermined storage unit (RAM 314, RAM 344, backup RAM 345) can be stored,
The game machine according to any one of features G1 to G10, wherein the information stored in the predetermined storage unit can be retained when the predetermined abnormality occurs.

In the above configuration, it is stored in the predetermined storage unit which suspension notification is used for the specific notification, and the information is backed up when an abnormality occurs. It is possible to suitably grasp whether or not the specific notification was performed in the notification for use.

Feature G12. After the predetermined abnormality has been resolved, based on the specific information held in the predetermined storage unit, the holding notification for which the specific notification was made before the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality is grasped, and the grasp is grasped. The gaming machine according to feature G11, characterized in that the specific process is executed with respect to the suspension notification that has been performed.

In the above configuration, since the destination specifying process after the abnormality is resolved is executed for the suspension notification for which the specific notification was performed before the abnormality occurred, even the suspension notification for which the specific notification was not performed before the abnormality occurred The specific notification is performed after the abnormality is resolved, and it is possible to suppress giving the player an unnatural impression. Furthermore, compared to the case where destination identification processing is performed for all pending notifications that are performed after the abnormality is resolved, the number of executions of the destination identification processing can be reduced, and the processing load at the time of recovery can be reduced. .

Feature G13. After the predetermined abnormality is resolved, the holding notification for which the specific notification was not performed before the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality is grasped based on the specific information held in the predetermined storage unit, and The gaming machine according to feature G11 or feature G12, further comprising means for setting the notification mode of the grasped notification for suspension to a normal mode.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suppress the specific notification from being performed after the abnormality is resolved for the suspension notification for which the specific notification was not performed before the occurrence of the abnormality. Become.

Feature G14. The game machine according to any one of features G1 to G13, wherein the predetermined abnormality is a power failure state.

When a power failure occurs during execution of the specific notification, the power supply to the game machine is cut off, so the specific notification that has been performed until then suddenly disappears. In this case, it is assumed that the player will be uneasy about whether the degree of expectation suggested before the power failure will not disappear and will remain after the power is restored after the recovery from the power failure state. By applying any one of the features G1 to G113 to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably re-execute the specific notification after the power is restored, and to make these features function effectively. can be done.

Note that the "power-off state" of this feature can also be expressed as "power-off state in which power is not supplied to the gaming machine from an external power source (commercial power source)".

Feature G15. The action for a game cycle is started based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and the end of the motion for a game cycle is notified as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination. As a game turn control means (function for executing game turn control processing in the main control device 162) for controlling the game turn operation to be performed,
At least a suspension notification means (a function of executing a suspension command corresponding process in the effect control device 143) that performs suspension notification (suspension image) so that the player can recognize the number of suspensions of the game round before execution.
In the specific notification, the notification mode of the suspension notification is a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode),
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G14, wherein the plurality of types of notification modes are set for the specific mode.

When performing the specific notification using the notification for suspension, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, and an event that an abnormality occurs during the execution of the specific notification is likely to occur. In addition, since it becomes clear which special information is the target of the degree of expectation suggested by the specific notification, it is assumed that the impact will be great if the specific notification cannot be continued due to the occurrence of an abnormality. By applying any one of the features G1 to G14 to such a configuration, each of the features can be effectively functioned, and each of the above effects can be favorably exhibited.

For each configuration of the features G1 to G15, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B14, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G15, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of H1 to H11 and features I1 to I12 individually, or apply a combination of part or all of the respective technical ideas. is also possible. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing in the main controller 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Attachment determination means (a function of executing a correctness determination process or the like in the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
Privilege granting capable of granting a privilege to a player based on the fact that the grant determination result by the grant determination means is a grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. Means (function for executing big winning opening opening/closing process in main controller 162);
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, the information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination, rather than the special information being the target of the grant determination. destination specifying means for executing the destination specifying process specified at the previous timing (function for executing the pending prefetching process in the main controller 162);
Specific notification means (suspension notice in the effect control device 143) capable of executing specific notification (suspension notice effect) by predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75, reservation lamp unit) based on the result of the destination identification process function for executing the setting process for the first execution of the pending notice);
When a predetermined condition is established (when the first mode switching lottery is won in the eighth embodiment), one of a plurality of types of production states (production mode A, production mode B) is selected. Effect state switching means for executing processing for switching from to another effect state (function for executing the effect mode switching process by the effect control device 143 in the eighth embodiment),
Switching restriction means (in the eighth embodiment, mode switching determination by the effect control device 143 function to perform processing) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed based on the result of the so-called look-ahead processing, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result by the specific notification, and to appropriately arouse the player's expectation. can be done. In addition, since a plurality of types of presentation states are provided and switching between the presentation states is performed, the player can change his/her mood during the game and can suppress boredom with the game. In such a configuration, for example, when the production state is switched during execution of the specific notification, attention is focused on the change in the production state, and the degree of attention to the specific notification decreases, or conversely, the user concentrates on the specific notification. As a result, there is a concern that the presentation state is changed without the player being aware of it, causing confusion.

In this regard, in this configuration, when the specific notification is being executed, the switching of the effect state is restricted, so it is possible to suppress the overlap between the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the effect state. As a result, the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the effect state can be carried out in such a manner that the player can easily pay attention to each of them, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience. In addition, if the effect state after switching is not suitable for the specific notification being executed, prior adjustment is required to match both in designing the effect, but according to this configuration, such adjustment is unnecessary. As a result, there is also the advantage that the burden at the time of design can be reduced.

Feature H2. The plurality of types of performance states include a first performance state (performance mode A) and a second performance state (performance mode B) in which specific notification is different from the first performance state. ,
The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the switching restricting means includes means for restricting switching to the second effect state when the specific notification is being executed in the first effect state.

In the case of a configuration in which the ease of execution of the specific notification differs depending on the performance state, if the performance state is switched while the specific notification is being executed, the degree of expectation suggested by the specific notification will be different before and after the switching of the performance state. There is a risk. In this case, there is a concern that the degree of expectation suggested by the specific notification and the result of grant determination that is actually notified in the effect state after the switching may differ, giving the player an unpleasant impression. By applying the configuration of the feature H1 to such a configuration, the occurrence of the discrepancy can be avoided, and it is possible to suitably suppress an unpleasant impression on the player.

It should be noted that, in the present feature, the second effect state in which the specific notification is more likely to be executed than the first effect state only needs to be configured so that the second effect state is set as an effect state in which the specific notification can be executed. However, it can be understood that a configuration in which the second state is set as an effect state in which the specific notification is not executed is also included.

Feature H3. The gaming machine according to feature H2, wherein the second effect state is a effect state set so that the specific notification is less likely to be executed than the first effect state.

When the ease of execution of the specific notification in the second performance state is lower than that in the first performance state, if the first performance state is switched to the second performance state while the specific notification is being executed, the apparent degree of expectation. increases, and there is a concern that the player may have higher expectations than they actually are. In this regard, in this configuration, the likelihood of executing the specific notification is relatively high (the degree of expectation that the specific notification corresponds to is relatively low), and the likelihood of executing the specific notification is low (the specific notification is relatively high) When switching the second effect state, if the specific notification is being executed, the execution of the switching is restricted. can be suppressed to

In addition, in the present feature, "the second effect state is an effect state set so that the specific notification is less likely to be executed than the first effect state" is the probability that the specific notification is executed in the second effect state. is set to be lower than that of the first effect state, and the second effect state is set as a effect state in which the specific notification is not executed.

Feature H4. The switching restricting means includes means for restricting the switching of the effect state based on the result of the destination specifying process that triggered the specified notification (the function of executing the process of step S7207). The game machine according to any one of H1 to H3.

In the above configuration, switching of the effect state is restricted based on the result of the look-ahead process that triggered the specific notification. For example, when there is a high possibility that a specific notification such as when a big win is prefetched, based on the fact that the prefetch is performed, the performance state is continued until the game round of the prefetched special information ends. can be configured to limit the switching of In this case, it is possible to quickly restrict switching, and it is possible to suitably suppress overlap between the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the effect state. Moreover, the following effect can also be expected by setting it as this structure. If the result of the look-ahead is a big win or the like, it is assumed that an inciting effect such as an advance notice effect that arouses the player's sense of expectation will be performed before the special information is subject to grant determination. If the effect state is switched during execution of the fanning effect, there is a possibility that the fanning effect becomes difficult to understand from the player's point of view. At this time, by restricting the switching of the performance state based on the prediction of the big win or the like, it is possible to suppress the switching of the performance state in the middle of the fanning performance, and it is possible to suitably suppress the difficulty of understanding the performance. Become.

Further, for example, while the switching of the performance state is not permitted basically during execution of the specific notification, the switching of the performance state can be permitted in a special case such as when a big win is predicted. In this case, even though the switching of the presentation state is not normally performed, the occurrence of the switching causes the player to break the law and suggest a big win. In other words, it becomes possible to utilize the switching of the effect state as one of the expectation level suggesting effects.

Note that the "means for restricting switching" of this feature can also be expressed as "means for differentiating whether or not to restrict switching".

Feature H5. The switching restricting means, the result of the destination specific processing that triggered the specific notification is a predetermined first result corresponding to the grant correspondence result (forecast result of the jackpot) or the grant correspondence result as a predetermined degree of expectation Means (function of executing the process of step S7207) for restricting the switching of the effect state based on whether it is a predetermined second result (prefetch result of SPSP reach effect) corresponding to the degree of expectation is provided. The gaming machine according to characterizing feature H4.

When the result of the look-ahead is a jackpot result (first result) or a high-expectation result (second result), the switching of the production state is restricted, or conversely allowed, so that each of the above effects of the feature H4 can be achieved. It becomes possible to exhibit it suitably.

Feature H6. In the specific notification, a plurality of types of notification modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are provided so that the degree of expectation for the given correspondence result is different. is set and
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5, wherein the switching restriction means includes means for restricting switching of the effect state based on the notification mode of the specific notification (step S7211).

For example, if the switching of the effect state is uniformly restricted during execution of the specific notification, there is a risk that the switching of the effect state will be excessively restricted or the frequency of execution of the specific notification will be suppressed. There is a concern that the significance of providing a plurality of types of presentation states and the significance of installing a specific notification execution function will be diminished. In this regard, in the above configuration, switching of the effect state is restricted based on the notification mode of the specific notification being executed. For example, in the case of the specific notification corresponding to the degree of expectation below a certain level, switching of the effect state is not restricted. , it is possible to allow such switching. As a result, it is possible to prevent the switching of the effect state and the execution of the specific notification from being excessively restricted, and it is possible to suitably ensure those opportunities.

Feature H7. The restricting means restricts switching of the effect state when the notification mode of the specific notification is a notification mode higher than the predetermined mode (green display mode HMc), and the notification mode of the specific notification is a mode below the predetermined mode. The gaming machine according to feature H6, characterized in that it permits switching of the presentation state in the event of a failure.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to limit the switching of the effect state only when the specific notification of a predetermined mode or more is being executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the switching of the effect state and the execution of the specific notification from being excessively restricted, and it is possible to suitably ensure those opportunities.

Feature H8. The plurality of types of effect states include a first effect state (effect mode A) and a second effect state (effect mode B) set so that the execution frequency of the specific notification is lower than that of the first effect state. and
In the specific notification, a plurality of types of notification modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are provided so that the degree of expectation for the given correspondence result is different. is set and
The switching restriction means is
When the specific notification is being executed in the first effect state, regardless of the notification mode of the specific notification, the first means for restricting switching to the second effect state (step S7206 Executes processing when affirmative determination is made function) and
When the specific notification is being executed in the second effect state, the second means for restricting switching to the first effect state based on the notification mode of the specific notification (negative determination in step S7206, step S7211 processing functions to perform) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H7, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, the effect state (first effect state) in which the degree of expectation corresponding to the specific notification is relatively low is switched to the effect state (second effect state) in which the degree of expectation corresponding to the specific notification is relatively high. In the case of , since the switching of the presentation state is uniformly restricted, it is possible to suitably suppress the suggestion of a higher-than-actual level of expectation. Conversely, it is possible to switch from an effect state (second effect state) in which the degree of expectation corresponding to the specific notification is relatively high to a state (first effect state) in which the degree of expectation to which the specific notification corresponds is relatively low. In this case, since the switching of the effect state is limited to a part of the notification modes, excessive restriction of the switching of the effect state is suppressed, and the opportunity for the switching can be secured appropriately. .

Feature H9. The production state switching means is
A switching determination means (function for executing the processing of step S7102) that determines whether or not to switch the effect state based on a predetermined opportunity (becoming a switching lottery timing);
When it is determined to switch by the switching determination means, switching execution means (function to execute the processing of step S7106) for executing the switching of the effect state,
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H8, wherein the switching restriction means restricts at least one of the determination by the switching determination means and the execution by the switching execution means.

In the above configuration, when limiting the switching of the effect state, at least one of the switching determination of whether to switch the effect state and the execution process of whether to execute the switching is restricted. It becomes possible to limit it appropriately.

Feature H10. The action for a game cycle is started based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and the end of the motion for a game cycle is notified as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination. As a game turn control means (function for executing game turn control processing in the main control device 162) for controlling the game turn operation to be performed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H9, wherein the specific notification means is configured to be able to execute the specific notification across game rounds.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed over a relatively long period of time, an event in which the effect state is switched during execution of the specific notification is likely to occur. By applying any one of the above features H1 to H9 to such a configuration, each of these features can be effectively functioned, and each of the above effects can be favorably exhibited.

Feature H11. The action for a game cycle is started based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and the end of the motion for a game cycle is notified as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination. As a game turn control means (function for executing game turn control processing in the main control device 162) for controlling the game turn operation to be performed,
At least a suspension notification means (a function of executing a suspension command corresponding process in the effect control device 143) that performs suspension notification (suspension image) so that the player can recognize the number of suspensions of the game round before execution.
The specific notification is characterized in that the notification mode of the suspension notification is a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode). Any one of features H1 to H10 game machine.

When performing the specific notification using the notification for suspension, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, and an event that the effect state is switched easily occurs during the execution of the specific notification. In addition, since it is clear which special information is the target of the level of expectation, etc. suggested by the specific notification, it is assumed that the impact of changes in the level of expectation suggested by the switching of the production state will be large. . By applying any one of the features H1 to H10 to such a configuration, each of the features can be effectively functioned, and each of the above effects can be favorably exhibited.

For each configuration of the features H1 to H11, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B14, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G15, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of H1 to H11 and features I1 to I12 individually, or apply a combination of part or all of the respective technical ideas. is also possible. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1. information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing in the main controller 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Attachment determination means (a function of executing a correctness determination process or the like in the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
Privilege granting capable of granting a privilege to a player based on the fact that the grant determination result by the grant determination means is a grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. Means (function for executing big winning opening opening/closing process in main controller 162);
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, the information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination, rather than the special information being the target of the grant determination. destination specifying means for executing the destination specifying process specified at the previous timing (function for executing the pending prefetching process in the main controller 162);
Specific notification means (suspension notice in the effect control device 143) capable of executing specific notification (suspension notice effect) by predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75, reservation lamp unit) based on the result of the destination identification process function for executing the setting process for the first execution of the pending notice);
Production state switching means (production control device 143 in the ninth embodiment) for switching the production state from one production state to another production state among a plurality of types of production states (production mode A, production mode B A function to execute the switching process of the production mode by) and
with
The production state switching means is
When a predetermined first condition is satisfied (when affirmative determination is made in the determination process of step S8109 in the ninth embodiment), a specific state (standby state ) as the first means (the function of executing the process of step S8111 in the ninth embodiment),
When a predetermined second condition different from the predetermined first condition is established in the situation of the specific state (if affirmative determination is made in the determination processing of step S8115 in the ninth embodiment), switching of the effect state is performed. Second means for executing (function for executing the process of step S8117 in the ninth embodiment);
with
It is characterized by comprising limiting means (a function of executing the processing of step S8203 in the ninth embodiment) capable of limiting the execution of the specific notification when it is in the specific state. game machine.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed based on the result of the so-called look-ahead processing, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result by the specific notification, and to appropriately arouse the player's expectation. can be done. In addition, since a plurality of types of presentation states are provided and switching between the presentation states is performed, the player can change his/her mood during the game and can suppress boredom with the game. In such a configuration, for example, if the production state is switched during execution of the specific notification, attention to the specific notification is reduced due to the change in the production state, or conversely, the specific notification is concentrated. As a result, there is a concern that the presentation state is changed without the player being aware of it, causing confusion.

In this regard, according to this configuration, since the execution of the specific notification is restricted under the specific state in which it is grasped that the performance state will be switched after that, the switching of the performance state during the execution of the specific notification can be suppressed. As a result, the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the effect state can be carried out in such a manner that the player can easily pay attention to each of them, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience. In addition, if the effect state after switching is not suitable for the specific notification being executed, prior adjustment is required to match both in designing the effect, but according to this configuration, such adjustment is unnecessary. As a result, there is also the advantage that the burden at the time of design can be reduced.

Feature I2. The limiting means is characterized by having a means capable of limiting the execution of the specific notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the specific state (function for executing pending command corresponding processing in the production control device 143). The gaming machine according to feature I1.

In the above configuration, it is possible to restrict the execution of the specific notification targeting the special information acquired during the period of the specific state in which the switching of the effect state is on standby. As a result, the range of the special information subject to restriction of the specific notification is widened, and it is possible to suppress excessive restriction of the opportunity to execute the specific notification.

Feature I3. Characteristic I1 or Characteristic characterized in that the limiting means can limit execution of the specific notification corresponding to the special information regardless of the result of the preceding specific processing for the special information acquired during the specific state. The gaming machine described in I2.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to forcibly restrict the execution of the specific notification regardless of the result of the prefetching process. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress the switching of the effect state during execution of the specific notification. Further, since the execution limitation of the specific notification is not affected by the result of the prefetching process, even in the specific state (during the waiting period of the specific notification), the prefetching process can proceed in the same way as in the non-specific state. That is, since there is no need to change the configuration of the look-ahead processing (previous identification processing), it is possible to limit the specific notification during the specific state while suppressing the complexity of the configuration.

Feature I4. The plurality of types of performance states include a first performance state (performance mode A) and a second performance state (performance mode B) in which specific notification is different from the first performance state. ,
Any of the features I1 to I3, wherein the limiting means is capable of limiting the execution of the specific notification at least when the switching from the first presentation state to the second presentation state is in the specific state. The gaming machine described in Crab.

In the case of a configuration in which the ease of execution of the specific notification differs depending on the performance state, if the performance state is switched while the specific notification is being executed, the degree of expectation suggested by the specific notification will be different before and after the switching of the performance state. There is a risk. In this case, there is a concern that the degree of expectation suggested by the specific notification and the result of grant determination that is actually notified in the effect state after the switching may differ, giving the player an unpleasant impression. By applying any one of the features I1 to I3 to such a configuration, the occurrence of the discrepancy can be avoided, and it is possible to suitably suppress an unpleasant impression on the player.

It should be noted that, in the present feature, the second effect state in which the specific notification is more likely to be executed than the first effect state only needs to be configured so that the second effect state is set as an effect state in which the specific notification can be executed. However, it can be understood that a configuration in which the second effect state is set as a effect state in which the specific notification is not executed is also included.

Feature I5. The gaming machine according to feature I4, wherein the second effect state is a effect state set so that the specific notification is less likely to be executed than the first effect state.

When the ease of execution of the specific notification in the second performance state is lower than that in the first performance state, if the first performance state is switched to the second performance state while the specific notification is being executed, the apparent degree of expectation. increases, and there is a concern that the player may have higher expectations than they actually are. In this regard, in this configuration, the likelihood of executing the specific notification is relatively high (the degree of expectation that the specific notification corresponds to is relatively low), and the likelihood of executing the specific notification is low (the specific notification is a specific state for switching to the second effect state (the degree of expectation corresponding to is relatively high), the execution of the specific notification is restricted. This suppresses the switching from the first presentation state to the second presentation state during execution of the specific notification, and makes it possible to suitably suppress the suggestion of a higher-than-actual level of expectation.

In addition, in the present feature, "the second effect state is an effect state set so that the specific notification is less likely to be executed than the first effect state" is the probability that the specific notification is executed in the second effect state. is set to be lower than that of the first effect state, and the second effect state is set as a effect state in which the specific notification is not executed.

Feature I6. When the specific notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the specific state is restricted by the limiting means, the specific means (effect control The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics I1 to I5, characterized in that it has a function of executing the second setting process for the reservation notice and the first execution process for the reservation notice in the device 143.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification whose execution is restricted due to the specific state is executed after the specific state or after the effect state is switched, the execution of the specific notification regarding the special information acquired during the specific state remains limited. As a result, it is possible to suppress the impossibility of suggesting the degree of expectation.

Feature I7. The specifying means, with respect to the special information for which the execution of the specific notification is restricted by the restriction means, provides the specific notification after the specific state or after the effect state is switched based on the result of the destination specific processing performed during the specific state. The gaming machine according to feature I6, characterized by comprising means for executing the processing of step S8302 (function for executing the processing of step S8302).

According to the above configuration, since the specific notification after the switching of the presentation state is performed based on the result of the prefetching performed during the specific state, the specific notification is executed without re-executing the prefetching process after the switching of the presentation state. be able to. As a result, the existing configuration can be used as it is for the look-ahead processing (previous identification processing), and complication of the configuration can be suppressed.

Feature I8. The specifying means provides specific information after the specified state or after the effect state is switched, based on the result of the preceding specifying process performed during the specific state, with respect to the special information whose execution of the specific notification is restricted by the restricting means. (function for executing the process of step S8307) for determining whether or not to execute the specific determination means, and when it is determined to be executed by the specific determination means, the specific notification is performed,
The gaming machine according to feature I6 or feature I7, wherein the specific determination means performs the determination by applying a determination condition (executed winning probability) set in correspondence with the effect state after switching.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not to execute the specific notification after the specific state or after the effect state is switched, and when it is determined to be executed, the specific notification is executed. At that time, when making the above determination, the determination conditions set in correspondence with the production state after switching are not used when the special information is acquired (the judgment conditions set in correspondence with the production state before switching). Conditions apply. Thus, even when the performance state before switching and the performance state after switching are different in the ease with which the specific notification is executed, it is possible to suitably perform the specific notification after the specific state or after the switching of the performance state.

Feature I9. In the notification mode of the specific notification, a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe ) is set and
When executing the specific notification after the specific state or after the switching of the production state, the specifying means applies the lottery conditions (scenario lottery table, etc.) set in correspondence with the production state after the switching to select the plurality of types. The gaming machine according to any one of features I6 to I8, characterized by comprising means for drawing any one of the modes (a function of executing the processes of steps S8310 to S8313).

In the above configuration, since a plurality of types of modes are set as the notification mode of the specific notification, it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation by assigning magnitudes, and it is possible to more preferably arouse the player's sense of expectation. Under such a configuration, when executing the specific notification after the specific state or after the switching of the production state, in order to draw a lottery for the notification mode by applying the lottery condition set corresponding to the production state after switching, Even when the degree of expectation corresponding to each notification mode differs between the performance state before switching and the performance state after switching, it is possible to suitably perform the specific notification after the specific state or after the performance state is switched.

Feature I10. When the special information is acquired during the specific state, predetermined information (waiting occurrence information) so that it can be grasped after the specific state that the acquired special information was acquired during the specific state is stored in a predetermined storage unit (holding storage area 344c of RAM 344).

According to the above configuration, even if the special information acquired before the specific state and the special information acquired during the specific state are mixed after the specific state or after the effect state is switched, it is stored in the predetermined storage unit. The special information acquired during the specific state can be identified based on the stored predetermined information. This makes it possible to distinguish between special information acquired during the specific state and other special information, and to process only the special information acquired during the specific state.

Feature I11. The action for a game cycle is started based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and the end of the motion for a game cycle is notified as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination. As a game turn control means (function for executing game turn control processing in the main control device 162) for controlling the game turn operation to be performed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I10, wherein the specific notification means is configured to be able to execute the specific notification across game rounds.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed over a relatively long period of time, the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the effect state tend to overlap. By applying any one of the features I1 to I10 to such a configuration, each feature can be effectively functioned, and each of the above effects can be favorably exhibited.

Feature I12. The action for a game cycle is started based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and the end of the motion for a game cycle is notified as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination. As a game turn control means (function for executing game turn control processing in the main control device 162) for controlling the game turn operation to be performed,
At least a suspension notification means (a function of executing a suspension command corresponding process in the effect control device 143) that performs suspension notification (suspension image) so that the player can recognize the number of suspensions of the game round before execution.
The specific notification is characterized in that the notification mode of the suspension notification is a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode). Any one of features I1 to I11 game machine.

When performing the specific notification using the notification for suspension, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, and the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the effect state are likely to overlap. In addition, since it is clear which special information is the target of the level of expectation, etc. suggested by the specific notification, it is assumed that the impact of changes in the level of expectation suggested by the switching of the production state will be large. . By applying any one of the features I1 to I11 to such a configuration, each of the features can be effectively functioned, and each of the above effects can be favorably exhibited.

For each configuration of the features I1 to I12, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B14, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G15, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of H1 to H11 and features I1 to I12 individually, or apply a combination of part or all of the respective technical ideas. is also possible. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in each configuration of the other feature group A to feature group I to each configuration of feature group A to feature group I detailed above. However, it is also possible to combine and apply each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a final stop after variably displaying the symbol row; A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine (ball-use reel-type game machine): Equipped with variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping and displaying the symbol row. The game is played with the necessary condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is started, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A throwing device for generating a special game state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to players, furthermore, providing a ball receiving tray for performing a casting process for taking in game balls from the ball receiving tray, and dispensing game balls to the ball receiving tray. and a payout device, wherein the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when a game ball is thrown in by the throwing device.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine, 62... 1st operation opening, 63... 2nd operation opening, 63a... General electronic role, 65... Variable winning device, 75... Symbol display device, 143... Production control device, 162... Main control device, 200... Suspension display portion, 314b... Suspension ball storage area, 344f... Return area, D... Execution display area, Ga... First suspension display area, Gb... Second suspension display area, HW... Object suspension image.

Claims (1)

information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as an upper limit;
grant determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant information;
Privilege granting capable of granting a privilege to a player based on the fact that the grant determination result by the grant determination means is a grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. means and
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, the information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination, rather than the special information being the target of the grant determination. a destination identifying means for identifying at the previous timing;
a specific notification execution means capable of executing a specific notification by a predetermined notification means based on the identification result of the destination identification means;
with
It has a plurality of rendering states including a first rendering state and a second rendering state different from the first rendering state,
a first means for setting a specific state that grasps that a transition to the second effect state is made after a predetermined first condition is satisfied in the first effect state;
a second means for executing a transition to the second rendering state when a predetermined second condition different from the predetermined first condition is established in the specific state;
means for enabling the execution of the specific notification corresponding to the specific special information acquired in the specific state in the specific state to be restricted;
means for enabling the specific notification corresponding to the specific special information to be executed after the end of the specific state;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

Images